Home

WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2

1. Left byte LB Right byte RB Word 1 0 69 Word 2 Recipe number 1 999 Word 3 Data record number 1 to 65535 Word 4 Do not overwrite existing data record 0 Overwrite existing data record 1 No 70 Write data record to PLC DAT gt PLC PLC job No 70 transfers data records from the HMI device to the PLC The PLC job is structured as follows Left byte LB Right byte RB Word 1 0 70 Word 2 Recipe number 1 999 Word 3 Data record number 1 to 65535 Word 4 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 230 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 4 User data areas Sequence when reading from the PLC with PLC job PLC gt DAT no 69 Step Action 1 Check Status word 0 Yes No 2 The HMI device enters the recipe and data record number specified in Abort without the job and the status Transfer active in the data record return message 3 The HMI device reads the values from the PLC and saves these to the data record defined in the PLC job 4 e If Overwrite was selected in the job an existing data record is overwritten without any prompt for confirmation The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed e If Do not overwrite was selected in the job and the data record already exists the HMI device aborts the job and enters 0000 1100 in the status word of the data record 5 The control
2. Word Left byte Right byte n 0 0 Job number n 1 Parameter 1 n 2 Parameter 2 n 3 Parameter 3 The HMI device evaluates the job mailbox if the first word of this job is unequal to zero This means that the parameters must be entered in the job mailbox first followed by the job number When the HMI device accepts the job mailbox the first word is set to 0 again The execution of the job mailbox is generally not completed at this point in time Job mailboxes All job mailboxes and their parameters are listed below The No column contains the job number of the job mailbox Job mailboxes can only be triggered by the PLC when the HMI device is online Note Please note that not all HMI devices support job mailboxes TP 170A and Micro Panel do not support PLC jobs for example No Function 14 Setting the time BCD coded Parameter 1 Left byte Right byte hours 0 23 Parameter 2 Left byte minutes 0 59 Right byte seconds 0 59 Parameter 3 15 Setting the date BCD coded Parameter 1 Left byte Right byte weekday 1 7 Sunday Saturday Parameter 2 Left byte day 1 31 Right byte month 1 12 Parameter 3 Left byte year 23 User logon Logs the user on with the name PLC user at the HMI device with the group number transferred in Parameter 1 The logon is possible only when the transferred group number exists in the project Parameter 1 G
3. Number Effect causes Remedy 260000 An unknown user or an unknown password has Log on to the system as a user with a valid been entered in the system password The current user is logged off from the system 260001 The logged in user does not have sufficient Log on to the system as a user with sufficient authorization to execute the protected functions authorization on the system 260002 This alarm is triggered by the system function TrackUserChange 260003 The user has logged off from the system 260004 The user name entered into the user view Select another user name because user names have already exists in the user management to be unique in the user management 260005 The entry is discarded Enter a shorter user name 260006 The entry is discarded Use a shorter or longer password 260007 The logon timeout value entered is outside the Enter a logon timeout value between 0 and 60 valid range of 0 to 60 minutes minutes The new value is discarded and the original value is retained 260008 An attempt was made to read a PTProRun pwl file created with ProTool V 6 0 in WinCC flexible Reading the file was canceled due to incompatibility of the format 260009 You have attempted to delete the user Admin If you need to delete a user because perhaps you or PLC User These users are fixed have exceeded the maximum number permitted components of the user management and delete another user cannot be delet
4. NOTICE indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into account If more than one degree of danger is present the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage Qualified Personnel The device system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation Commissioning and operation of a device system may only be performed by qualified personnel Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission ground and label devices systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards Prescribed Usage Trademarks Note the following WARNING This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens Correct reliable operation of the product requires proper transport storage positioning and assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance All names identified by are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their
5. 290044 The data store for the recipe has been destroyed and is deleted 290050 Alarm reporting that the export of records has started 290051 Alarm reporting that the export of records was completed 290052 Alarm reporting that the export of records was canceled due to an error Ensure that the structure of the records at the storage location and the current recipe structure on the HMI device are identical 290053 Alarm reporting that the import of records has started 290054 Alarm reporting that the import of records was completed 290055 290056 Alarm reporting that the import of records was canceled due to an error Error when reading writing the value in the specified line column The action was canceled Ensure that the structure of the records at the storage location and the current recipe structure on the HMI device are identical Check the specified line column 290057 The tags of the recipe specified were toggled from offline to online mode Each change of a tag in this recipe is now immediately downloaded to the PLC 290058 The tags of the specified recipe were toggled from offline to online mode Modifications to tags in this recipe are no longer immediately transferred to the PLC but must be transferred there explicitly by downloading a record 290059 Alarm reporting that the specified record was saved 290060 Alarm rep
6. Representation in WinCC The representation of the data types corresponds to the representation in WinCC WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 120 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 2 Configuring the communication driver for GE Fanuc Special features of connections with GE Fanuc SNP Area pointers can only be created with the R and M operands The trigger tag for discrete alarms can only be tags of the R and M operands These tags are only valid for the data types Int and Word Array tags may only be used for discrete alarms and trends Array tags only of the R and M operands and data types Int and Word are permitted 3 2 6 Optimizing the configuration Acquisition cycle and update time Discrete alarms Screens The acquisition cycles for the Area pointers and the acquisition cycles of the tags specified in the configuration software are decisive factors for the update times that can actually be achieved The update time is the sum of the acquisition cycle transmission time processing time To achieve optimum update times remember the following points during configuration e Keep the individual data areas as small as possible and as large as necessary e Define data areas that belong together as belonging together You can improve the update time by setting up one large data area instead of several small areas e If the acquisition cycle
7. Adapter HE693SNP232A GE Fanuc connector 1 connector 2 15 pin D Sub female connector 15 pin D Sub connector screw locking 5V RxD RxD TxD TxD GND RTS RTS CTS CTS 5V RxD RxD TxD TxD GND RTS RTS CTS CTS 5V RxD RxD TxD TxD GND RTS RTS CTS CTS 5V RxD RxD TxD TxD GND RTS RTS CTS CTS Shield with large area contact to casing at both ends Cable 5 x 0 14 mm shielded max length 300 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 155 Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 5 Connecting cables for GE Fanuc 3 5 8 Connection cable MP2 RS 422 for GE Fanuc Multipoint cable MP8 Further controllers are attached as with the MP7 cable HMI device GE Fanuc connector 1 connector 2 9 pin D Sub connector 15 pin D Sub connector screw locking screw locking cable outlet to the rear cable outlet to the rear TxD RxD TxD RxD gt RxD TxD RxD TxD lt H 5V GND GND RTS RTS lt H CTS CTS gt Terminating resistor R 120 Ohm has to be inserted e g type 0207 Shield with large area contact to casing at both ends shield contacts connected terminating resistor must be installed cable 3 x 2 x 0 14 mm2 shielded max length 1200 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 156 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691
8. Ensure that the cable is plugged in and the PLC is e The cable is defective e The PLC does not respond is defective etc e System overload operational Restart the system if the system alarm persists 200100 PLC user version alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 200100 Coordination is not executed because the Change the address or set up the address in the address configured in the PLC does not exist is PLC not set 200101 Coordination is canceled because the write Change the address or set the address in the PLC at access to the address configured in the PLC is an area which allows write access not possible 200102 Coordination is not carried out at the moment Internal error because the address format of the area pointer does not match the internal storage format 200103 Coordination can be executed again because the last error state is eliminated return to normal operation 200104 The coordination may not be executed 200105 No more data is read or written Possible Ensure that the cable is plugged in and the PLC is causes e The cable is defective e The PLC does not respond is defective etc e System overload operational Restart the system if the system alarm persists WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 373 Appendix 8 1 System alarms 210000 PLC job alarms Number 210000 Effect caus
9. Message output on the configuration computer after successful completion of the transfer Transfer completed successfully The start screen appears on the HMI device WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 TT Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 3 User data areas Interconnecting the PLC with the HMI device 1 Interconnect the PLC CPU or communication module with the HMI device using a suitable patch cable 2 The message Connection to PLC is established is output to the HMI device Note that users can edit the system alarm texts in WinCC flexible NOTICE Always observe the safety related information in the HMI device manual when commissioning the device RF radiation emitted from devices such as mobile phones may cause unwanted operating states 2 3 User data areas 2 3 1 Trend request and trend transfer Function A trend is a graphic representation of one or more values from the PLC The value is read either time or bit triggered depending on the configuration Time triggered trends The HMI device reads in the trend values cyclically at an interval specified in the configuration Time triggered trends are suitable for logging continuous processes such as the operating temperature of a motor Bit triggered trends By setting a trigger bit in the tag trend request the HMI device either reads in a trend value or an entire trend buff
10. 0 0 Off Off 0 1 Rapid flashing Flashing 1 0 Slow flashing Flashing 1 1 Permanent signal Permanent signal 166 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with LG controllers 4 3 User data areas 4 3 3 Area pointer 4 3 3 1 General information on area pointers LG GLOFA GM Introduction Area pointers are parameter fields WinCC flexible Runtime reads these parameter fields in order to obtain information about the location and size of data areas in the PLC The PLC and the HMI device interactively communicate read and write data for these data areas The PLC and the HMI device trigger defined interactions based on the evaluation of stored data The area pointers reside in PLC memory Their addresses are configured in the Area pointers dialog of the Connections editor Area pointers used in WinCC flexible Device dependency PLC job Project ID Screen number Data record Date time Date time PLC Coordination Availability of the area pointer depends on the HMI device used WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 195 Communication with LG controllers 4 3 User data areas Application Configure and enable the area pointer in Communication gt Connections before you put it into use Parameters Area pointer For all connections Fromection a lt undefined gt Date time PLC Cyclic con
11. 5 5 1 3 Connecting cable 6XV1440 2R RS 422 for Mitsubishi 5 5 2 Connecting cable for Mitsubishi protocol 4 o eee eeee cence eeeee cece eeeeeeeesneeeeesaeeesenaeeeeetnaeeeenieeed 242 5 5 2 1 Connecting cable PP1 RS 232 for MitSUDISNI 0 ececeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeetaeeeeeenaeeeeeaaes y 5 5 2 2 Connecting cable PP2 RS 232 for MitSUDISNI 0 ececeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeseaeeeeeenaeeeenaaes 5 5 2 3 Connecting cable PP3 RS 232 for MitSUDISNI ececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeeenaeeeenaaes 5 5 2 4 Connecting cable PP4 RS 232 for MitSUDISNI 0 eececeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeetenaeeeenaaes WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Table of contents 5 5 2 5 Connecting cable PP5 RS 232 for MitSubISHi cccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceaeeeeeeeeseeenaeeeeess 5 5 2 6 Connecting cable MP3 RS 232 over converter for Mitsubishi 5 5 2 7 Connecting cable MP2 RS 422 for Mitsubishi cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeesensnaeeeeess 6 Communication with Modicon Controllers cceccsceeeceeenceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeseaeeeeesaaeeesesaaeeseesaaeeeeeeeeeeaes 6 1 Communication with Modicon MODUS ccccccccceesecsecrecseeneenecnsecseseeseeecseseecseeseesesnisesaenee 249 6 1 1 Communication partner Modicon MOdbuS 2 ccccccceesceeeeeeeceeeeceaeeeeeeeseseeseeeeeseaeessaees
12. 60011 An attempt was made to copy a file to itself It is possible that the Windows user has no access rights to one of the two files Check the path of the source target file Using Windows NT XP with NTFS The user executing WinCC flexible Runtime must be granted access rights for the files 70000 Win32 function alarms Number 70010 Effect causes The application could not be started because it could not be found in the path specified or there is insufficient memory space Remedy Check whether the application exists in the specified path or close other applications WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 373 Appendix 8 1 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 70011 The system time could not be modified Check the time which is to be set The error alarm only appears in connection with Using Windows NT XP The user executing WinCC area pointer Date time PLC Possible causes flexible Runtime must be granted the right to change e An invalid time was transferred in the job the system time of the operating system mailbox e The Windows user has no right to modify the system time If the first parameter in the system alarm is displayed with the value 13 the second parameter indicates the byte containing the incorrect value 70012 An error occurred when executing the function Close all progra
13. Accessing data areas The table shows how the PLC and HMI device handle read R and write W access to the data areas Data area Required for HMI device PLC Screen number Evaluation by the PLC in order to determine the active W R screen Data record Transfer of data records with synchronization R W R W Date time Transfer of the date and time from the HMI device to the PLC W R Date time PLC Transfer of the date and time from the PLC to the HMI device R W Coordination Requesting the HMI device status in the control program W R Project ID Runtime checks consistency between the WinCC flexible R W project ID and the project in the PLC PLC job Triggering of HMI device functions by the control program R W R W The next sections describe the area pointers and their associated PLC jobs 6 4 3 2 Screen number area pointer Function The HMI device saves information about the screen called on the HMI device to the Screen number area pointer This allows the transfer of the current screen contents from the HMI device to the PLC The PLC can trigger specific reactions such as the call of a different screen Application 272 Configure and enable the area pointer in Communication gt Connections before you put it into use You can create only one instance of the Screen number area pointer and only on one PLC The screen number is transferred spontaneously to the PLC That is it is always transferred when a new screen is activated on the HMI devic
14. Multilink is selected in the Communication drivers column You can now enter or modify the protocol parameters in the Properties window Device dependent parameters e Interface Select the HMI interface to which the OMRON PLC is connected under Interface For more detailed information refer to the Manual of the HMI device e Type Here you can only select RS 232 e Baud rate Under Baud rate set the transmission rate between the HMI device and OMRON Communication is possible at a baud rate of 19200 9600 4800 2400 or 1200 baud Note In multipoint projects use baud rates of 9600 bauds and 19200 bauds At lower baud rates you may encounter breaks in communication Note The highest station address must be less than or equal to 63 if you set a transmission rate of 1 5 Mbaud at OP 73 or OP 77A If connecting a TP 170A to a SIMATIC S7 station at a transmision rate of 1 5 MBaud on PROFIBUS DP set a value less than or equal to 63 for the highest station address HSA e Data bits Select 7 bits or 8 bits under Databits e Parity Select None Even or Odd under Parity e Stop bits Select 1 or 2 Stop bits PLC dependent parameters e Station address Under Station address set the station number of the PLC WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 300 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Omron controllers 7 2 Configuring the communication driver Omron
15. The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed 5 The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers Writing to the PLC started by the operator in the recipe display Step Action Check Status word 0 1 Yes No The HMI device enters the recipe and data record number to be Abort with system written and the status Transfer active in the data record alarm 2 The HMI device writes the current values to the PLC If the recipes have synchronized tags the changed values are synchronized between the recipe display and tags and then written to the PLC 3 The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed If required the control program can now evaluate the transferred data 5 The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers Note The status word may only be set by the HMI device The PLC may only reset the status word to zero Note The PLC may only evaluate the recipe and data record numbers when data inconsistency is detected if one of the conditions outlined below has been met e The data mailbox status is set to Transfer completed e The data mailbox status is set to Transfer completed with error WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 232 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 4 User data areas 5 4 4 Ev
16. e Set date and time WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 4 User data areas Data structure The first word of the job mailbox contains the job number Depending on the job mailbox up to three parameters can be transferred Word Left byte Right byte n 0 0 Job number n 1 Parameter 1 n 2 Parameter 2 n 3 Parameter 3 The HMI device evaluates the job mailbox if the first word of this job is unequal to zero This means that the parameters must be entered in the job mailbox first followed by the job number When the HMI device accepts the job mailbox the first word is set to 0 again The execution of the job mailbox is generally not completed at this point in time Job mailboxes All job mailboxes and their parameters are listed below The No column contains the job number of the job mailbox Job mailboxes can only be triggered by the PLC when the HMI device is online Note Please note that not all HMI devices support job mailboxes TP 170A and Micro Panel do not support PLC jobs for example No Function 14 Setting the time BCD coded Parameter 1 Left byte Right byte hours 0 23 Parameter 2 Left byte minutes 0 59 Right byte seconds 0 59 Parameter 3 15 Setting the date BCD coded Parameter 1 Left byte Right byte weekday 1
17. lt D TxD RxD D GND SG lt CTS RTS lt D RTS CTS D Shield with large area contact to housing at both ends Cable 5 x 0 14 mm2 shielded max length 15 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 112 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 4 Connecting cables for Allen Bradley 2 4 10 Connecting cable PP4 RS 485 for Allen Bradley PP4 connecting cable For interconnecting the HMI device RS 485 9 pin sub D AIC AlIC Items to observe when defining the connection concept e Minimum cable length 1m e Maximum cable length 1220 m e Terminating resistance of 120 ohms between the data lines Data A and Data B only for longer cables Note The shield of the cable may not be connected to the HMI device housing HMI device Allen Bradley AIC AIC connector 1 connector 2 n 9 pin D Sub connector 6 pin Phoenix connector screw locking enclosure shield Data B Data B GND GND Data A Data A Cables 5 x 0 14 mm shielded min length 1m max bus length 1500 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 113 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 4 Connecting cables for Allen Bradley 2 4 11 Connecting cable MP1 RS 485 for Allen Bradley MP1 connecting cable For connection HMI device RS 485 9 pin sub D DH485 LAN AIC AIC When planning the network attachment remember the follo
18. 1 Interconnect the PLC with the HMI device using a suitable cable 2 The message Connection to PLC is established is output to the HMI device Note that users can edit the system alarm texts in WinCC flexible NOTICE Always observe the safety related information in the HMI device Manual when commissioning the device RF radiation emitted from devices such as mobile phones may cause unwanted operating states WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 330 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Omron controllers 7 5 Connecting cables for Omron Hostlink Multilink 7 5 Connecting cables for Omron Hostlink Multilink 7 5 1 Connecting cable 6XV1440 2X RS 232 for Omron 6XV1440 2X__ Length key see catalog ST 80 HMI device Omron connector 1 connector 2 15 pin D Sub connector 9 pin D Sub connector shift latch screw locking cable outlet for pin 1 cable outlet for pin 1 metal enclosure V 24 metal enclosure V 24 enclosure GND GND Shield with large area contact to casing Cable 5 x 0 14 mm2 shielded max length 15 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 331 Communication with Omron controllers 7 5 Connecting cables for Omron Hostlink Multilink 7 5 2 Connecting cable PP1 RS 232 for Omron Point to point cable PP1 PC TP OP PLC HMI device Omron connector 1 connector 2 9 pin D Sub female connector 9 pin D Sub co
19. 1 cable PP1 or cable PP2 for adapter HE693SNP232A 2 cable MP1 multipoint cable WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with GE Fanuc controllers RS 422 port Cables WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Master 1 cable MP2 multipoint cable Slave Slave 3 2 Configuring the communication driver for GE Fanuc Refer to the documentation of the PLC and the HMI device manual to determine which ports you should use Note Applies only to Mobile Panel 170 For a trouble free communication of the mobile panel 170 with GE Fanuc via RS422 the resistances contained in the multipoint cable MP2 are necessary As with mobile panel 170 the necessary signals 5V and GND are not available it is recommended that you use an adapter in accordance with the multipoint cable MP1 The following cables are available to connect the HMI device to the PLC Interface on the GE Fanuc PLC HMI device or adapter 9 pin 6 pin 8 pin 15 pin Sub D western RJ45 Sub D RS 232 9 pin PP1 PP3 PP5 RS 232 15 pin PP2 PP4 PP6 RS 232 with cable to MP1 adapter RS 422 9 pin MP2 The HMI device port to be used is defined in the corresponding Manual The pin assignment of the cables is described in the section Connecting cables for GE Fanuc 117 Communication with
20. 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 195 Communication with LG controllers 4 3 User data areas e Assign trigger tag In the Trigger tag column you link the configured alarm with the tag created in step 1 The selection list returns all tags with valid data type e Specify the bit number In the bit number column specify the relevant bit position in the created tag Remember that the way the bit positions are counted depends on the particular PLC With LG GLOFA controllers the bit positions are counted as follows How the bit positions are counted Left byte Right byte in LG GLOFA 15 8 7 0 controllers In the WinCC flexible you 15 8 7 0 configure the following Analog alarms The only difference between discrete alarms and analog alarms is that you configure a limit value rather than a bit number The alarm is triggered when this limit is exceeded The outgoing alarm is triggered when the low limit is violated making allowances for any configured hysteresis WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 186 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with LG controllers 4 3 4 4 Procedure 4 3 User data areas Step 3 Configure the acknowledgment Create suitable tags on the PLC to acknowledge an error alarm You assign these tags to an alarm in the Bit messages editor You make the assignment in Properties gt Acknowledgment The follow
21. 7 1 Communication with Omron Hostlink Multilink 7 1 1 Communication partner Omron Introduction This section describes communication between an HMI device and OMRON controllers of the SYSMAC C SYSMAC CV SYSMAC CS1 SYSMAC alpha and CP series With these PLCs the PLC s own protocol SYSMAC Way Hostlink Multilink protocol is used for the connection Released communication types The connection of an HMI device to an OMRON CPU of the OMRON SYSMAC C not CQM CPU11 21 SYSMAC CV SYSMAC CS1 and SYSMAC alpha series using the Hostlink Multilink protocol over RS232 has been system tested and released by Siemens AG A multipoint connection to up to 4 OMRON controllers in an RS422 four wire multidrop configuration can be implemented with communications adapters Note The HMI device can only be operated as a master 7 1 2 Communication between HMI device and controller Omron Communications principle The HMI device and the PLC communicate using tags and the user data areas Tags The PLC and the HMI device exchange data using process values In your configuration create tags that point to an address on the PLC The HMI device reads and displays the value from the defined address The operator can also make an entry on the HMI device that is then written to the address on the PLC WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 297 Communication with Omron controllers 7 2 Contigur
22. All definitions are coded in BCD format The HMI device reads the data cyclically within the configured acquisition cycle and synchronizes itself Note Set an acquisition cycle of sufficient length for the date time area pointer in order to avoid any negative impact on HMI device performance Recommended Acquisition cycle of 1 minute if your process can handle it The date time data area has the following structure DATE_AND_TIME format in BCD code Data word Left byte Right byte n 0 Year 80 to 99 0 to 29 Month 1 to 12 n 1 Day 1 to 31 Hour 0 to 23 n 2 Minute 0 to 59 Second 0 to 59 n 3 Reserved Reserved Weekday 1to7 1 Sunday n 4 1 Reserved Reserved n 5 1 Reserved Reserved 1 The two data words must be available in the data area in order to ensure compliance of the data format with WinCC flexible and to avoid the reading of incorrect information Note Note that when you enter the year values 80 99 result in years 1980 through 1999 and the values 0 29 result in the years 2000 through 2029 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 85 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 3 User data areas 2 3 3 5 Coordination area pointer Function Application The Coordination area pointer is used to implement the following functionality e detection in the control program of HMI device startup
23. Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 3 User data areas Writing to the PLC by means of configured function Step Action 1 Check Status word 0 Yes No 2 The HMI device enters the recipe and data record number Abort with system specified in the function and the status Transfer active in the alarm data record 3 The HMI device fetches the values of the data record specified in the function from the data medium and transfers the values to the PLC The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed 5 The control program can now evaluate the transferred data The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers Sequence of the transfer triggered by a job mailbox The transfer of data records between the HMI device and the PLC can be initiated by either one of these stations The two PLC jobs No 69 and No 70 are available for this type of transfer No 69 Read data record from PLC PLC gt DAT PLC job no 69 transfers data records from the PLC to the HMI device The PLC job is structured as follows Left byte LB Right byte RB Word 1 0 69 Word 2 Recipe number 1 999 Word 3 Data record number 1 to 65535 Word 4 Do not overwrite existing data record 0 Overwrite existing data record 1 No 70 Write data record to PLC DAT gt PLC PLC job No 70 transfers data records from the HMI device to the PLC
24. Date time 36 No No No Yes No No No Mobile Panel 170 Mobile Panel 177 DP Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes No No No Mobile Panel 177 PN Yes Yes Yes Mobile Panel 277 Yes Yes Yes Mobile Panel 277 IWLAN Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Working with connections 1 5 Device based dependency Mobile Panel 170 Mobile Panel 177 DP Mobile Panel 177 PN Mobile Panel 277 Mobile Panel 277 IWLAN Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Date time PLC Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Coordination Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Project ID Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Job mailbox Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Basic Panels KTP400 Basic KTP600 Basic KTP600 Basic KTP1000 KTP1000 TP1500 Basic PN PN DP Basic PN Basic DP PN Screen number Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Data record Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Date time Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Date time PLC Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Coordination Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Project ID Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Job mailbox Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Panels OP 73 OP77A OP77B TP170A TP170B TP177A TP 177B TP 270 TP 277 OP 170B OP 177B OP 270 OP 277 Screen number Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Data record No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Date time Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Date time PLC Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Coordination Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Project ID Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Job mailbox Yes Yes Yes No Yes Y
25. IF1B SIMATIC S7 IF1B IF1B PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC S7 Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet PROFINET SIMATIC S5 AS511 SIMATIC S5 PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC 500 505 NITP SIMATIC 500 505 PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC HMI HTTP Protocol OPC Allen Bradley DF1 IF1B 19 IF1B 19 Allen Bradley Z DH 485 Allen Bradley _ Ethernet IP GE Fanuc LG GLOFA GM Z Mitsubishi FX Mitsubishi P4 Modicon IF1B 5 IF1B 5 Modbus RTU Modicon Modbus TCP IP Omron Telemecanique Panels OP 73 OP77A OP77B TP170A TP170B TP177A TP177B TP270 TP 277 OP 170B OP 177B 8 OP270 OP 277 8 SIMATIC S7 PPI IF1B IF1B IF1B IF1B IF1B IF1B IF1B IF1B IF1B SIMATIC S7 MPI IF1B IF1B IF1B IF1B IF1B IF1B IF1B IF1B IF1B SIMATIC S7 IF1B IF1B IF1B IF1B IF1B IF1B IF1B IF1B IF1B PROFIBUS DP WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 32 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Working with connections SIMATIC S7 PROFINET SIMATIC S5 AS51141 SIMATIC S5 PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC 500 505 NITP SIMATIC 500 505 PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC HMI HTTP Protocol OPC Allen Bradley DF 1 Allen Bradley DH 485
26. Reading values Writing values 2 3 User data areas When a read job is triggered the values are read from the PLC addresses and transferred to the HMI device e Triggering by the operator in the recipe view The values are downloaded to the HMI device You can then process edit or save these values for example e Triggering by a function or PLC job The values are saved immediately to the data volume When a write job is triggered the values are written to the PLC addresses e Triggering by the operator in the recipe view The current values are written to the PLC e Triggering by a function or PLC job The current values are written to the PLC from the data medium Transfer with synchronization Allen Bradley Application Requirements If you select synchronous transfer both communication partners set status bits in the common data area You can use this mechanism to prevent uncontrolled overwriting of data in either direction in your control program Synchronous data record transfer can be a useful solution for example when e The PLC is the active partner in the transfer of data records e The PLC evaluates the information about the recipe number and data record number e The transfer of data records is triggered by means of a Job mailbox In order to synchronize transfer of data records between the HMI device and the PLC the following requirements must be met during configuration e An area pointer ha
27. User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 2 Contiguring the Allen Bradley communication driver 2 2 1 2 Installing the communication driver Driver for the HMI device The communication driver for Allen Bradley PLCs for which WinCC flexible supports connections over DF1 protocol is supplied with WinCC flexible and installed automatically It is not necessary to install special communication blocks in the PLC 2 2 1 3 Configuring the controller type and protocol Selecting the PLC Double click Communication gt Connections in the project window of the HMI device to configure a connection over DF1 protocol with an Allen Bradley PLC Select the Allen Bradley DF1 protocol from the Communication drivers column in the working area The properties dialog box displays the parameters of the selected protocol You can edit the parameters at any time by double clicking Communication gt Connections in the project window of the HMI device Select the connection and edit its parameters in the properties dialog box Note The HMI device and PLC settings must match 2 2 1 4 Configuring protocol parameters Parameters to be set Double click Communication gt Connections in the project window of the HMI device to configure the parameters Allen Bradley DF1 is selected in the Communication drivers column in the working area You can now enter or edit the protocol parameters i
28. e The PLC does not require information about the recipe number and data record number e The transfer of data records is triggered by the operator of the HMI device WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 176 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with LG controllers Reading values Writing values 4 3 User data areas When a read job is triggered the values are read from the PLC addresses and transferred to the HMI device e Triggering by the operator in the recipe view The values are downloaded to the HMI device You can then process edit or save these values for example e Triggering by a function or PLC job The values are saved immediately to the data volume When a write job is triggered the values are written to the PLC addresses e Triggering by the operator in the recipe view The current values are written to the PLC e Triggering by a function or PLC job The current values are written to the PLC from the data medium Transfer with synchronization LG GLOFA Application Requirements If you select synchronous transfer both communication partners set status bits in the common data area You can use this mechanism to prevent uncontrolled overwriting of data in either direction in your control program Synchronous data record transfer can be a useful solution for example when e The PLC is the active partner in the transfer of data records e The PLC evaluates the informa
29. establish the connection to the SMTP server and to send the remaining e mails Check the network connection to the SMTP server and re establish it if necessary 70034 Following a disruption the TCP IP connection to the SMTP server could be re established The queued e mails are then sent WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 373 Appendix 8 1 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 70036 No SMTP server for sending e mails is configured Configure an SMTP server An attempt to connect to an SMTP server has In WinCC flexible Engineering System failed and it is not possible to send e mails using Device settings gt Device settings WinCC flexible Runtime generates the system In the Windows CE operating system alarm after the first attempt to send an e mail Sa oa using Control Panel gt Internet Settings gt E mail gt SMTP Server 70037 An e mail cannot be sent for unknown reasons Check the e mail parameters recipient etc The contents of the e mail are lost 70038 The SMTP server has rejected sending or Check the domain of the recipient address or disable forwarding an e mail because the domain of the the authentication on the SMTP server if possible recipient is unknown to the server or because the SMTP authentication is currently not used in WinCC SMTP server requires authentication flexible Runtime T
30. see WinCC flexible Runtime is operating in demo Commissioning Instructions Software Protection mode 240005 The Automation License Manager has detected Reboot the HMI device or PC If this does not solve an internal system fault Possible causes e A corrupt file e A defective installation e No free space for the Automation License Manager etc the problem remove the Automation License Manager and install it again 250000 S7 Force alarms Number 250000 Effect causes The tag in the specified line in Status Force is not updated because the address configured for this tag is not available Remedy Check the set address and then verify that the address is set up in the PLC WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 373 Appendix 8 1 System alarms tags are not updated Number Effect causes Remedy 250001 The tag in the specified line in Status Force is Check the set address not updated because the PLC type configured for this tag does not exist 250002 The tag in the specified line in Status Force is Check the set address not updated because it is not possible to map the PLC type in the tag type 250003 An attempt to connect to the PLC failed The Check the connection to the PLC Check that the PLC is switched on and is online 260000 Password system alarms
31. you link the configured alarm with the tag created in step 1 The selection list returns all tags with valid data type e Specify the bit number In the bit number column specify the relevant bit position in the created tag Remember that the way the bit positions are counted depends on the particular PLC With Mitsubishi controllers the bit positions are counted as follows How the bit positions are counted Left byte Right byte In Mitsubishi 15 8 7 0 controllers In the WinCC flexible you 15 8 7 0 configure the following Analog alarms The only difference between discrete alarms and analog alarms is that you configure a limit value rather than a bit number The alarm is triggered when this limit is exceeded The outgoing alarm is triggered when the low limit is violated making allowances for any configured hysteresis WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 236 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 4 4 4 Procedure 5 4 User data areas Step 3 Configure the acknowledgment Create suitable tags on the PLC to acknowledge an error alarm You assign these tags to an alarm in the Bit messages editor You make the assignment in Properties gt Acknowledgment The following figure shows the dialog for configuring an acknowledgment Discrete Alarms n ei am DIS C528 j
32. 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 101 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 3 User data areas 2 3 4 4 Procedure Step 3 Configure the acknowledgment Create suitable tags on the PLC to acknowledge an error alarm You assign these tags to an alarm in the Bit messages editor You make the assignment in Properties gt Acknowledgment The following figure shows the dialog for configuring an acknowledgment Discrete Alarms DISCRETE ALARMS ngine overtemperature Errors a Temperature sensor M3 Me lt No group gt M m General b Frogatio CA KNOWledigement gt STI Acknowledgement PLC Acknowledgement HMI a Infotext m Process Tag Temperature sensor I Tag lt No n ad sho xp A gt Events Distinction in terms of acknowledgment e Acknowledgment on the HMI device e Acknowledgment by the PLC Acknowledgment by the PLC 102 In Acknowledgment PLC tag you configure the tag or the array tag and the bit number based on which the HMI device can recognize an acknowledgment by the PLC A bit set in the tag triggers acknowledgment of the assigned error alarm bit at the HMI device This tag bit returns a function similar to acknowledgment on the HMI device which is triggered by pressing the ACK button for example The acknowledgment bit must be located in the same tag as the bit for the error alarm WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s M
33. 2 1 Connector Cable Note The CPUs of the various series have different limits for the address areas and these can be found in the Mitsubishi Computerlink manuals In the Q series it is only possible to address up to 8191 in the M and D area Communication via PG protocol Requirements of communication The HMI device must be connected to the programming interface of the CPU RS 422 refer to the PLC documentation The connection between the HMI device and the Mitsubishi Electric PLC essentially involves setting the interface parameters and the bus address No special blocks are required on the PLC for the connection The following cables are available to connect the HMI device to the PLC Interface on the Mitsubishi Electric PLC using the PG protocol HMI device or adapter FX series D sub 25 pin FXO mini DIN 8 pin RS 232 9 pin Mitsubishi SC 08 1 Mitsubishi SC 07 1 RS 232 15 pin Adapter 6XV1440 2UE32 Adapter 6XV1440 2UE32 and and Mitsubishi cable SC 08 1 Mitsubishi cable SC 07 1 RS 422 9 pin 6XV1440 2R___ 6XV1440 2P___ Length key see catalog ST 80 1 Since the Mitsubishi controllers generally communicate via RS 422 the Mitsubishi programming cable SC 07 or SC 08 with integrated adjustment RS 422 RS 232 is required for the connection of an HMI device via RS 232 Note Applies only to RS 232 Restricted cable length of 0 32 m The HMI device port to be used is defin
34. 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Omron controllers Reading values Writing values 7 3 User data areas When a read job is triggered the values are read from the PLC addresses and transferred to the HMI device e Triggering by the operator in the recipe view The values are downloaded to the HMI device You can then process edit or save these values for example e Triggering by a function or PLC job The values are saved immediately to the data volume When a write job is triggered the values are written to the PLC addresses e Triggering by the operator in the recipe view The current values are written to the PLC e Triggering by a function or PLC job The current values are written to the PLC from the data medium Transfer with synchronization Omron Application Requirements If you select synchronous transfer both communication partners set status bits in the common data area You can use this mechanism to prevent uncontrolled overwriting of data in either direction in your control program Synchronous data record transfer can be a useful solution for example when e The PLC is the active partner in the transfer of data records e The PLC evaluates the information about the recipe number and data record number e The transfer of data records is triggered by means of a Job mailbox In order to synchronize transfer of data records between the HMI device and the PLC the following requirements m
35. 7 Sunday Saturday Parameter 2 Left byte day 1 31 Right byte month 1 12 Parameter 3 Left byte year 23 User logon Logs the user on with the name PLC user at the HMI device with the group number transferred in Parameter 1 The logon is possible only when the transferred group number exists in the project Parameter 1 Group number 1 to 255 224 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 4 User data areas No Function 14 Setting the time BCD coded Parameter 2 3 24 User logoff Logs off the current user The function corresponds to the logoff system function Parameter 1 2 3 40 Transfer date time to PLC in the S7 format DATE_AND_TIME An interval of at least 5 seconds must be maintained between two successive jobs to prevent overload of the HMI device Parameter 1 2 3 41 Transfer date time to PLC In OP MP format An interval of at least 5 seconds must be maintained between successive jobs in order to prevent overload of the HMI device Parameter 1 2 3 46 Update tags Causes the HMI device to read the current value of the PLC tags whose update ID matches the value transferred in Parameter 1 Function corresponds to the UpdateTag system function Parameter 1 1 100 49 Clear process alarm buffer Para
36. 7 1 Basics Communication drivers A communication driver is a software component that develops a connection between an automation system and an HMI device The communication driver hence enables the tags in WinCC flexible to be supplied with process values WinCC flexible supports the interconnection of different automation systems with various communication drivers Users can select the interface the profile and the transmission speed for each specific communication partner Communication between HMIs The SIMATIC HMI HTTP Protocol is available for the communication between HMls This protocol is a component of the Sm rtAccess option The protocol can be used on PCs with WinCC flexible Runtime and on Panels as of the 270 series For detailed information refer to the SIMATIC HMI HTTP Protocol documentation Communication via uniform and manufacturer independent interface WinCC flexible provides a uniform and manufacturer independent software interface using OPC OLE for Process Control This interface allows a standardized data exchange between applications for industry office and production For detailed information refer to the OPC documentation WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 17 Working with connections 7 2 Elements and basic settings 1 2 1 2 1 Introduction Open Structure Menu bar Toolbars 18 Elements and basic settings Connections E
37. 7 3 3 Area pointer 7 3 3 1 General information on area pointers Omron Hostlink Multilink Introduction Area pointers are parameter fields WinCC flexible Runtime reads these parameter fields in order to obtain information about the location and size of data areas in the PLC The PLC and the HMI device interactively communicate read and write data for these data areas The PLC and the HMI device trigger defined interactions based on the evaluation of stored data The area pointers reside in PLC memory Their addresses are configured in the Area pointers dialog of the Connections editor Area pointers used in WinCC flexible Device dependency PLC job Project ID Screen number Data record Date time Date time PLC Coordination Availability of the area pointer depends on the HMI device used WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 307 Communication with Omron controllers 7 3 User data areas Application Configure and enable the area pointer in Communication gt Connections before you put it into use Parameters Area pointer For all connections Fromection a a a lt undefined gt Date time PLC Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt lt undefined gt Screen number Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt lt undefined gt Project ID 1 Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt lt M J gt For each connection e Se ee v iData mailbox yclic continuous lt u
38. Allen Bradley Ethernet IP GE Fanuc LG GLOFA GM Mitsubishi FX Mitsubishi P4 Modicon Modbus RTU Modicon Modbus TCP IP Omron Telemecanique OP 73 OP 77A OP 77B IF1A IF1B IF1A IF1B IF1B IF1B 1 IF1A 8 IF1B 89 IF1A 8 IF1B 8 IF1A 8 IF1B 8 IF1A 8 IF1B 8 IF1A 8 IF1B 8 IF1A 8 IF1B 8 IF1B IF1A 8 IF1B 582 IF1A 8 IF1B 8 IF1B 8 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 TP 170A IF1A IF 1A IF1B IF1A 8 IF1B 89 IF1A 8 IF1B 8 IF1A 8 IF1B 8 IF1A 8 IF1B 8 IF1A 8 IF1B 8 IF1A IF1B 8 IF1A IF1B 9812 IF1A 8 IF1B 8 IF1B 8 TP 170B OP 170B Ethernet IF 1A IF2 IF1B IF1A IF 1B IF2 IF1B IF1A IF1B 9 IF2 8 IF1A IF1B IF2 8 IF1A IF1B IF2 8 IF1A IF1B IF2 8 IF1A IF 1B IF2 8 IF1A IF 1B IF2 8 IF1A IF1B 9 12 IF2 8 IF1A IF 1B IF2 8 IF1B TP 177A IF1B 11 IF1B 5 7 5 Device based dependency TP 177B OP 177B Ethernet IF1B IF1B IF1B Ethernet IF1B 811 IF1B 8 Ethernet IF1B 8 IF1B 8 IF1B 8 IF1B 8 IF1B 5 8 Ethernet IF1B 8 IF1B 8 TP 270 OP 270 Ethernet IF 1A IF2 IF1B IF1A IF1B IF2 IF1B Ethernet IF1A IF1B 19 IF2 8 IF1A IF1B IF2 8 IF1A IF1B IF2 8 IF1A IF1B IF2 8 IF1A
39. Bradley communication driver Optimizing the configuration Allen Bradley Ethernet IP Acquisition cycle and update time Discrete alarms Screens Trends PLC jobs 76 The acquisition cycles for the Area pointers and the acquisition cycles of the tags specified in the configuration software are decisive factors for the actual update times that can be achieved The update time is the sum of the acquisition cycle transmission time processing time To achieve optimum update times note the following during configuration e Optimize the maximum and minimum size of the data areas e Acquisition cycles which are too short lead to unnecessary load on overall performance Set the acquisition cycle according to the rate of change of the process values The rate of temperature changes at a furnace for example is significantly slower compared to the speed rate of an electrical drive A time of approx 1 second is a benchmark for the acquisition cycle e Changes in the PLC can only be detected reliably if these are available at least within the actual acquisition cycle Use arrays to handle discrete alarms and assign each alarm to one bit of the array tag instead of assigning these to any subelements Only tags of the data types Int and Int are valid for discrete alarms and arrays The refresh rate of screens is determined by the type and volume of data to be visualized Configure short acquisition cycles only for objects w
40. Configuring an alarm Procedure We differentiate between the following alarms e Discrete alarms e Analog alarms You create alarms in the Discrete alarms and Analog alarms editors Discrete alarms The editor is shown in the figure below DISCRETE e ALARMS a pe a a a x pe Engine overtemperature Temperature sensor M3 v 0 lt No group gt Errors Diagnosis Events Warnings System e Edit text Enter the text to display in runtime You can format the text characters The text may contain fields for the output of tags The text is output to the alarm view if this view was configured in the Screens editor e Specify number Every alarm has a number that must only occur once within the project It is used to uniquely identify the alarm and is indicated with the alarm in runtime The permitted range of values is 1 to 100 000 The WinCC flexible engineering system assigns consecutive numbers You can change these when assigning alarm numbers to groups for example e Specify the alarm class Available alarm classes Error alarms This class must be acknowledged Process events This class signals events with incoming and outgoing alarms WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 325 Communication with Omron controllers 7 3 User data areas e Assign trigger tag In the Trigger tag column you link the configured alarm with the tag
41. DATE_AND_TIME format in BCD code Data word Left byte Right byte n 0 Year 80 to 99 0 to 29 Month 1 to 12 n 1 Day 1 to 31 Hour 0 to 23 n 2 Minute 0 to 59 Second 0 to 59 n 3 Reserved Reserved Weekday 1to7 1 Sunday n 4 1 Reserved Reserved n 5 1 Reserved Reserved 1 The two data words must be available in the data area in order to ensure compliance of the data format with WinCC flexible and to avoid the reading of incorrect information Note Note that when you enter the year values 80 99 result in years 1980 through 1999 and the values 0 29 result in the years 2000 through 2029 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 129 Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 3 User data areas 3 3 3 5 Coordination area pointer Function Application The Coordination area pointer is used to implement the following functionality e detection in the control program of HMI device startup e detection in the control program of the current HMI device operating mode e detection in the control program of the HMI devices ready to communicate state The Coordination area pointer has a length of two words Note The HMI device always writes the entire coordination area when updating the area pointer The control program may not make changes to the coordination area for this reason Assignment of bits in the Coordination
42. DUPLEX driver in the CPU NO HANDSHAKING for Control line and AUTO DETECT for Embedded responses WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 2 Contiguring the Allen Bradley communication driver 2 2 1 5 Permitted data types Allen Bradley DF1 Permitted data types The table lists the user data types that can be used when configuring tags and area pointers Name File type Data type ASCII 1 A ASCII Binary B BIT UNSIGNED INT Counter C BIT SIGNED INT UNSIGNED INT BCD only PLC5 D BIT SIGNED INT UNSIGNED INT BCD4 BCD8 Float F REAL Digital input l BIT UNSIGNED INT Data register integer N BIT SIGNED INT UNSIGNED INT SIGNED LONG UNSIGNED LONG REAL Digital output O BIT UNSIGNED INT Control R BIT UNSIGNED INT Status S BIT UNSIGNED INT Timer T BIT SIGNED INT UNSIGNED INT 1 Applies to PLCs of the SLC503 SLC504 SLC505 and PLCS series Representation in WinCC flexible Short names of data type formats in WinCC flexible e UNSIGNED INT Ulnt e UNSIGNED LONG ULong e SIGNED INT Int e SIGNED LONG Long WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 53 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 2 Contiguring the Allen Bradley communication driver Special features of connections with Allen Bradle
43. For each connection table contains the area pointers you can set separately for each available connection Peremeters Area pointer For all connections 1 Date time PLC 08 1 DBW 0 Cyclic continuous aie E lt undefined gt Project ID l Cydic continuous undefined E lt undefined gt Screen number S Cyelic continuous lt undefined For each connection DB 1 DBW 12 x cyce continuous undefined sar ata malbo 5 Cyclic continuous undefined off Date time Cyclic continuous cundefined Off Job malbo 4 Cyclic continuous undefined The availability of the various area pointers is determined by the HMI device used For detailed information on area pointers and their configuration refer to the description of the supported protocols WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Working with connections 7 3 Contiguring the connection 1 3 Configuring the connection Introduction You create a new connection using the Connections editor Requirements A project is open Procedure In the project view open the Communication group 2 Select New connection from the Connections shortcut menu The Connections editor opens and shows a new connection 3 Rename the connection in the Name column as required 4 From the Communication driver column select a communication driver that is suitable for the PLC being used O 2S eel Connection_1 SIMATIC 57 300 400 X 4lle
44. Function You can check whether the HMI device is connected to the correct PLC at the start of runtime This check is important when operating with several HMI devices The HMI device compares a value stored on the PLC with the value specified in configuration data This ensures compatibility of configuration data with the control program If discrepancy is detected a system alarm is displayed on the HMI device and runtime is stopped Application Settings in configuration data required when using this area pointer e Define the version of configuration data Possible values between 1 and 255 Enter the version in the Device settings gt Device settings editor in Project ID e Data address of the value for the version that is stored in the PLC Enter the data address in the Communication gt Connections editor in Address Connection failure A connection failure to a device on which the project ID area pointer is configured results in all the other connections in the project being switched to offline This behavior has the following prerequisites e You have several configured connections in a project e You are using the project ID area pointer in at least one connection Causes which may set connections offline e The PLC is not available e The connection has been switched offline in the engineering system 2 3 3 7 Job mailbox area pointer Function The PLC can use the job mailbox to transfer jobs to the
45. H A1SJ71QC24 QnAS AJ71UC24 A AnU or AJ71QC24N Q QnA over RS 232 or RS 422 Cable The following cables are available to connect the HMI device to the PLC Interface Point to point cable Multipoint cable RS 232 9 9 pin PP1 connecting cable Connecting cable MP1 over converter RS 232 9 25 pin PP2 connecting cable RS 232 9 15 pin PP3 connecting cable RS 232 15 25 pin PP4 connecting cable RS 422 9 pin Connecting cable PP5 MP2 connecting cable The HMI device port to be used is defined in the corresponding Manual The pin assignment of the cables is described in the section Connecting cables for Mitsubishi WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 206 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 3 Communication via protocol 4 5 3 2 Installing the communication driver Driver for the HMI device The driver for connection to Mitsubishi controllers with protocol 4 is supplied with WinCC flexible and is installed automatically No special blocks are required in the PLC for the connection 5 3 3 Configuring the controller type and protocol Select the PLC For a connection to a Mitsubishi PLC via protocol 4 double click on Communication gt Connections in the project view of the HMI device Go to the Communication drivers column and select the Mitsubishi protocol 4 The property view displays the parameters of the selecte
46. HMI device and the selected interface Note Adapt the RS 485 RxD and RTS signal settings using the four DIP switches on the rear of the Multi Panel when operating with IF1B interface Baud rate Define the transmission rate between the HMI device and the PLC under Baud rate Note The highest station address must be less than or equal to 63 if you set a transmission rate of 1 5 Mbaud at OP 73 or OP 77A If connecting a TP 170A to a SIMATIC S7 station at a transmision rate of 1 5 MBaud on PROFIBUS DP set a value less than or equal to 63 for the highest station address HSA Data bits Select 7 bits or 8 bits under Databits Parity Select None Even or Odd under Parity Stop bits Select 1 or 2 Stop bits WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 2 Contiguring the Allen Bradley communication driver Network parameters e HMI address Set the HMI address at HMI Address You can select any address from 1 to 31 e Max bus address Set the highest bus address used at the Max Bus Address parameter The bus address is evaluated for token passing You can set addresses 2 through 31 PLC dependent parameters e Destination address Define the PLC address at the Destination address parameter e CPU type Set the PLC type to which the HMI device is connected at the CPU type parameter Select SLC50
47. IP Ethernet SIMATIC S5 e AS511 e PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC 500 505 e NITP e PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC HMI HTTP Protocol e HTTP HTTPS Ethernet SIMOTION e MPI e PROFIBUS DP e TCP IP Ethernet OPC e DCOM Allen Bradley PLC series SLC500 SLC501 SLC502 SLC503 SLC504 SLC505 MicroLogix and PLC5 11 PLC5 20 PLC5 30 PLC5 40 PLC5 60 PLC5 80 e DF1 2 e DH via KF2 module 3 e DH485 via KF3 module 4 e DH485 PLC series ControlLogix 5500 with 1756 ENBT and CompactLogix 5300 1769 L32E and 1769 L35E e Ethernet GE Fanuc Automation SPS series 90 30 90 70 VersaMax Micro e SNP LG Industrial Systems Lucky PLC series GLOFA GM GM4 GM6 and GM7 Series G4 G6 Goldstar IMO and G7 e Dedicated communication Mitsubishi Electric PLC series MELSEC FX and MELSEC FX0 e FX Mitsubishi PG Mitsubishi Electric PLC series MELSEC FXO FX1n FX2n AnA AnN AnS AnU QnA and QnAS e Protocol 4 OMRON PLC series SYSMAC C SYSMAC CV SYSMAC CS1 SYSMAC alpha CJ and CP e Hostlink Multilink SYSMAC Way Modicon PLC series Modicon 984 TSX Quantum and TSX Compact Schneider Automation e Modbus RTU SPS series Quantum Momentum Premium and Micro SPS series Compact and 984 via Ethernet bridge e Modbus TCP IP Ethernet WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 23 Working with connections 1 5 Device based dependency PLC
48. Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Allen Bradley DH485 Allen Bradley Ethernet IP GE Fanuc 11 LG GLOFA Mitsubishi PG 200 Modicon Pes per 4 ra Modicon Omron eee Eal nk Interface Assignment to protocols 29 Interface for the transfer of ae Device based dependency 4 L LED mapping 80 124 166 216 269 306 LG GLOFA Installing communication drivers LG GLOFA GM Creating tags LG GLOFA GM 157 Communication partners Connecting oe Connection Device BRM T raration Hed 160 Optimizing the configuration Tem Permitted data type 161 PLC dependent parameters 160 Protocol parameters Released communication Representation in WinCC flexible Select the PLC LG GLOFA GM Creating an array M Mitsubishi Electric Communication partners Connectable PLC Create tag Creating an array Released communication Mitsubishi PG Connector Device dependent parameters 201 Installing communication drivers 200 Optimizing the configuration Permitted data type 202 Protocol parameters 2 Select the PLC Mitsubishi protocol 4 377 Index Connector Device dependent parameters 208 Installing communication drivers 2 Optimizing the configuration Permitted data type 210 PLC dependent parameters Protocol parameters 208 Select the PLC Modicon Approved methods of communication with Modbus RTU cleared communication with Modbus TCP IP Communication partner 2 Configuring z apm Connecti
49. No No No No No No No No No No No WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Mobile Panel 277 IWLAN Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN No No No TP1500 Basic PN No No No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Working with connections Panels SIMATIC S7 PPI SIMATIC S7 MPI SIMATIC S7 PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC S7 PROFINET SIMATIC S5 AS511 SIMATIC S5 PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC 500 505 NITP SIMATIC 500 505 PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC HMI HTTP Protocol OPC SIMOTION Allen Bradley DF1 Allen Bradley DH 485 Allen Bradley Ethernet IP GE Fanuc LG GLOFA GM Mitsubishi FX Mitsubishi P4 Modicon Modbus RTU Modicon Modbus TCP IP Omron Telemecanique Multi Panels SIMATIC S7 PPI SIMATIC S7 MPI SIMATIC S7 PROFIBUS DP WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 OP 73 OP77A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes 19 No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes 9 No No No No No No MP 177 9 Yes Yes Yes OP 77B TP 170A 2 Yes 8 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No Yes 9 Yes 9 Yes 9 Yes 9 No No Yes 9 Yes 9 Yes 9 Yes 9 Yes 9 Yes 9 Yes 9 Yes 9 Yes 9 Yes 9 No No Yes 9 Yes 9 Yes 9 Yes 9 MP 270B Yes Yes Yes User s Ma
50. Parameters tab of the Connections editor to configure the properties of a connection between the HMI and the communication partner Structure The communication partners are visualized schematically on the Parameters tab This tab provides the HMI device Network and PLC areas where you can declare the parameters of the relevant interface used Parameters WinCC flexible RT Station Interface J a CEE HMI device Network PLC device T Baud rate aig Profile vp v Address 2 1 187500 v RS232 Highest station address HSA Expansion slot o RS422 Address m 31 Rack 0 RS485 Access point S7ONLINE Simatic Only master on the bus Number of masters t Cyclic operation The system sets default parameters Always ensure consistency on the network whenever you edit parameters For detailed information on configurable parameters refer to the description of the supported protocols WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 19 Working with connections 7 2 Elements and basic settings 1 2 3 Area pointers for connections Introduction Structure 20 Using the Area pointer tab of the Connections editor you can configure the usage of the available area pointers The Area pointer tab contains two tables of area pointers The For all connections table contains those area pointers which are created only once in the project and can be used for only one connection The
51. RS 422 for LG IMO Point to point cable 2 HMI device LG INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS IMO connector 1 connector 2 9 pin D Sub connector terminal strip TxD B TxD A RxD B RxD A GND screw locking enclosure RDA RDB SDA SDB S G F G Shield with large area contact to casing at both ends Cable 3 x 2 x 0 14 mm2 shielded max length 500 m 192 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with LG controllers 4 5 Connecting cables for LG GLOFA GM 4 5 3 Connecting cable PP3 RS 485 for LG IMO Point to point cable 3 HMI device LG INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS IMO connector 1 connector 2 9 pin D Sub connector terminal strip screw locking enclosure Data B RDA Data A RDB SDA SDB GND S G F G Shield with large area contact to casing at both ends Cable 2 x 2 x 0 14 mm2 shielded max length 500 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 195 Communication with LG controllers 4 5 Connecting cables tor LG GLOFA GM 4 5 4 Connecting cable PP4 RS 232 for LG IMO Point to point cable 4 HMI device LG INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS IMO connector 1 connector 2 15 pin D Sub connector 9 pin D Sub connector shift latch shift latch enclosure GND SG DSR RTS CTS Shield with large area contact to casing at both ends Cable 3 x 0 14 mm2 shielded max length 15 m WinCC flexible 2008 C
52. SLC5 02 SLC5 03 Micro Logix 1 MicroLogix ML1500 LRP also supports Channel 1 9 pin sub D WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 57 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 2 Contiguring the Allen Bradley communication driver Connecting cables HMI panel interface used Connection to Micro Logix SLC500 SLC5 01 SLC5 03 SLC5 04 SLC5 02 SLC5 03 SLC5 05 Micro Logix For RS 232 15 pin 6XV1440 2K _ _ PP1 RS 232 Micro Logix For RS 232 9 pin Allen Bradley cable Allen Bradley cable 1747 CP3 1761 CBL PM02 For RS 485 9 pin PP4 RS 485 AIC The pin assignment of the cables is described in the section Connecting cables for Allen Bradley Multipoint connection over DH485 protocol SLC500 SLC5 01 SLC5 03 SLC5 04 SLC5 02 SLC5 03 SLC5 05 Micro Logix Channel 1 8 Pin RJ45 Channel 0 Channel 0 Pi 8 Pin Mini DIN DH485 RS 232 RS 485 9 Pin Sub D 8 Pin Mini DIN 6 Pin 16 Pin Phoenix j Phoenix Le ee ee DH485 LAN RS 485 1 MicroLogix ML1500 LRP also supports Channel 1 9 pin sub D WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 58 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 2 Contiguring the Allen Bradley communication driver Connecting cables HMI panel interface used For connection to For connecti
53. SLC501 X X X SLC502 X X X SLC503 X X X X SLC504 X X X X X SLC505 X X X X MicroLogix X X X X PLC 5 1 X X X 1 Processors released for PLC 5 PLC 5 11 PLC 5 20 PLC 5 30 PLC 5 40 PLC 5 60 and PLC 5 80 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 46 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 1 Communication with Allen Bradley 2 1 3 Communication peer for the Allen Bradley E IP C Logix protocol Introduction This section describes communication between the HMI device and the Allen Bradley PLC These PLCs communicate by means of the following own protocols e Allen Bradley E IP C Logix Ethernet IP Connectable PLCs Connections can be implemented for the following Allen Bradley PLCs e Allen Bradley ControlLogix 5500 e Allen Bradley CompactLogix 5300 Types of communication released for Allen Bradley E IP C Logix Types of communication which have been tested and released e Point to point connection e Multipoint interconnection of an HMI device Allen Bradley Ethernet IP client with up to 4 PLCs each with different connections Connections supported Connection to the Ethernet CPU interface of CompactLogix Connection to ControlLogix via communication module for Ethernet 1756 ENBT WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 47 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 2 Configuring the All
54. Server only via a local user Check the licensing on the SIMATIC Logon Server 260040 The system attempts to access the SIMATIC Logon Server upon system start up or when trying to change the password If attempting to log on the new user is not logged in If a different user was logged on before then this user is logged off Check connection to the domain and its configuration in the Runtime security settings editor Or use a local user 270000 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 270000 A tag is not indicated in the alarm because it Check whether the data area for the tag exists in the attempts to access an invalid address in the PLC the configured address is correct and the value PLC range for the tag is correct 270001 There is a device specific limit as to how many _ alarms may be queued for output see the operating instructions This limit has been exceeded The view no longer contains all the alarms However all alarms are written to the alarm buffer 270002 The view shows alarms of a log for which there Delete older log data if necessary is no data in the current project Wildcards are output for the alarms 270003 The service cannot be set up because too Reduce the number of HMI devices which want to many devices want to use this service use the service A maximum of four devices may execute this action 270004 Access to persistent buffer is not possibl
55. Status word 0 Yes No 2 The HMI device enters the recipe number to be read and the status Abort with system Transfer active in the data record and sets the data record number alarm to 0 3 The HMI device reads the values from the PLC and displays them in the recipe display If the recipes have synchronized tags the values from the PLC are also written to the tags The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed 5 The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers Writing to the PLC started by the operator in the recipe display Step Action Check Status word 0 1 Yes No The HMI device enters the recipe and data record number to be Abort with system written and the status Transfer active in the data record alarm 2 The HMI device writes the current values to the PLC If the recipes have synchronized tags the changed values are synchronized between the recipe display and tags and then written to the PLC 3 The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed If required the control program can now evaluate the transferred data 5 The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers Note The status word may only be set by the HMI device The PLC may only reset the status word to zero Note The PLC may only evaluate the recipe and data record numbers when
56. USB S7Ethernet Basic Panels Serial KTP400 Basic WinCC flexible Runtime No No 1 5 Device based dependency Only available with TP 177B PN DP and OP 177B PN DP OP 73micro Yes 1 No No Yes 2 No Mobile Panel 170 Yes Yes No No No DP Yes 1 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 KTP600 Basic Mobile Panel 177 DP Yes 1 Yes No No No PN No KTP600 Basic TP 170micro Yes 1 No No No No Mobile Panel 177 PN Yes 1 No Yes No No Yes 1 KTP1000 Basic DP Device based dependency of interfaces for the project transfer TP 177micro Yes 1 No No Yes 2 No Mobile Panel 277 Mobile Panel 277 IWLAN Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Yes 1 No Yes No Yes 9 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes KTP1000 Basic 1TP1500 Basic PN PN No No 41 Working with connections 7 5 Device based dependency KTP400 Basic KTP600 Basic KTP600 Basic KTP1000 KTP1000 Basic 1TP1500 Basic PN DP PN Basic DP PN PN MPI PROFIBUS No Yes Yes Yes No No DP Ethernet Yes No No No Yes Yes USB Yes 2 Yes 2 Yes 2 Yes 2 No Yes 2 S7Ethernet No No No No No No Panels OP 73 OP77A OP77B TP170A 1TP170B TP177A TP177B TP270 TP 277 OP 170B OP 177B OP270 OP 277 Serial Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes Yes 1 MPI PROFIBUS DP Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Ethernet No No No No No No Yes 3 Yes 4 Yes USB Yes Yes 2 Yes No No Yes 2 Yes Yes Yes S7Etherne
57. WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 119 Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 2 Configuring the communication driver for GE Fanuc PLC dependent parameters e Bus address Under Bus address you set the bus address of the PLC Seven ASCII characters are permitted 0 9 _ underscore and A Z upper case 3 2 5 Permitted data types GE Fanuc Permitted data types The table lists the user data types that can be used when configuring tags and area pointers Name Operand Data type Analog IN Al Word Ulnt Int DWord Dint Real BCD 4 BCD 8 Analog OUT AQ Word Ulnt Int DWord Dint Real BCD 4 BCD 8 Binary M Bit Byte Word Ulnt Int DWord Dint Real BCD 4 BCD 8 Binary TorG Bit Word Ulnt Int DWord Dint Real BCD 4 BCD 8 Digital input l Bit word Digital output Q Bit word Data register integer R Word Ulnt Int DWord Dint Real BCD 4 BCD 8 Status S SA SB SC Bit word Program registers P Word Ulnt Int DWord Dint Real 90 70 CPU only BCD 4 BCD 8 Note Applies to the program registers data type The password for accessing program registers operand P is P_TASK This password is specified in the driver and cannot be changed by the user The password is included in the protocol when accessing program registers As a result the LM 90 project to be accessed must have the name P_TASK
58. a project e You are using the project ID area pointer in at least one connection Causes which may set connections offline e The PLC is not available e The connection has been switched offline in the engineering system 4 3 3 7 Job mailbox area pointer Function The PLC can use the job mailbox to transfer jobs to the HMI device to trigger corresponding actions on the HMI device These functions include for example e Display screen e Set date and time WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 195 Communication with LG controllers 4 3 User data areas Data structure The first word of the job mailbox contains the job number Depending on the job mailbox up to three parameters can be transferred Word Left byte Right byte n 0 0 Job number n 1 Parameter 1 n 2 Parameter 2 n 3 Parameter 3 The HMI device evaluates the job mailbox if the first word of this job is unequal to zero This means that the parameters must be entered in the job mailbox first followed by the job number When the HMI device accepts the job mailbox the first word is set to 0 again The execution of the job mailbox is generally not completed at this point in time Job mailboxes All job mailboxes and their parameters are listed below The No column contains the job number of the job mailbox Job mailboxes can only be triggered by the PLC when the HMI device is onlin
59. an area pointer based on the example of a SIMATIC S7 PLC e Active Enables the area pointer e Name Name of the area pointer defined by WinCC flexible e Address Tag address of the area pointer in the PLC e Length WinCC flexible defines the default length of the area pointer e Acquisition cycle Define an acquisition cycle in this field to allow cyclic reading of the area pointer in Runtime An extremely short acquisition time may have a negative impact on HMI device performance e Comment Save a comment for example to describe the purpose of the area pointer WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 218 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers Accessing data areas The table shows how the PLC and HMI device handle read R and write W access to the 5 4 User data areas data areas Data area Required for HMI device PLC Screen number Evaluation by the PLC in order to determine the active W R screen Data record Transfer of data records with synchronization R W R W Date time Transfer of the date and time from the HMI device to the PLC W R Date time PLC Transfer of the date and time from the PLC to the HMI device R W Coordination Requesting the HMI device status in the control program W R Project ID Runtime checks consistency between the WinCC flexible R W project ID and the project in the PLC PLC job Triggering of HMI device functions by the control program R W R W The next sect
60. area pointer Startup bit Operating mode Life bit 130 high order byte low order byte 15 8 7 2 4 0 1st word 2st word not assigned T E A EEEE L Startup bit Operation mode reserved fone a Life bit x assigned The startup bit is set briefly to 0 by the HMI device during startup It sets the bit permanently to 1 when startup is completed The operating mode bit is set to 1 as soon as the user switches the HMI device offline The state of the operating mode bit is 0 during normal operation of the HMI device You can determine the current operating mode of the HMI device by reading this bit The HMI device inverts the life bit at intervals of approximately one second You can check whether or not the connection to the HMI device is still up by querying this bit in the control program WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 3 User data areas 3 3 3 6 Project ID area pointer Function You can check whether the HMI device is connected to the correct PLC at the start of runtime This check is important when operating with several HMI devices The HMI device compares a value stored on the PLC with the value specified in configuration data This ensures compatibility of configuration data with the control program If discrepancy is detected a system alarm is displayed on the HMI device and runtime is stopped Applic
61. be write protected or for system use only Writing data to these special address areas gt 8191 can lead to malfunctions on the CPU The data types String and Real are not available on all CPUs Area pointers can only be created with the D operand The trigger tag for discrete alarms can only be tags of the D operand and the data types Word and Int Array tags may only be used for discrete alarms and trends Array tags only of the D operand and the data types Int and Word are permitted The CPUs of the various series have different limits for the address areas and these can be found in the MITSUBISHI Compterlink manuals Examples of the CPU dependent and communications format dependent limits of the address ranges Name Operand Max address Max address Max address FX2N AnU over AJ71UC24 Q series over AJ71QC24N or A1SJ71QC24 Output input YIX Octal X Y 0 267 HEX X Y 0 7FF HEX X Y 0 7FF Bit memory M MO M3071 and M L S 0 8191 M L S 0 8191 M8000 M8255 M9000 M9255 Data register D DO 7999 DO 8191 DO 8191 D8000 D8255 D9000 D9255 D9000 D9255 becomes SD1000 SD1255 Counter C CO 255 CO 1023 CO 1023 Timer T TO 255 TO 2047 TO 2047 Link register W Hex WO FFF Hex WO FFF Link bit memory B Hex BO FFF Hex BO FFF Error bit memory F FO 2047 FO 2047 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1C
62. catalog ST 80 For interconnecting the HMI device RS 422 9 pin sub D PLC5x KF2 KF3 You require an additional 25 pin female female adapter gender changer for interconnections with KF2 and KF3 HMI device Allen Bradley connector 1 connector 2 9 pin D Sub connector 25 pin D Sub connector screw locking screw locking cable outlet to the rear cable outlet to the rear enclosure TxD RxD TxD RxD RxD TxD RxD TxD GND GND Shield with large area contact to housing at both ends interconnected shield contacts Cable 3 x 2 x 0 14 mm2 shielded max length 60 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 107 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 4 Connecting cables for Allen Bradley 2 4 5 Connecting cable 1747 CP3 RS 232 for Allen Bradley Allen Bradley cable 1747 CP3 For interconnecting the HMI device RS 232 9 pin sub D SLC503 SLC504 SLC505 Channel 0 AIC HMI device Allen Bradley connector 1 connector 2 9 pin D Sub female connector 9 pin D Sub female connector screw locking screw locking cable outlet to the rear cable outlet to the rear enclosure DTR pep gt gt lt lt DSR psR gt e lt pep DTR lt lt RD TxD lt D TxD RD gt GND GND lt cTs RTS lt JD RTS cts gt gt Shield with large area contact to housing at both ends Cable 5 x 0 14 mm shielded max length 3 m WinCC flexible 2008 Commun
63. ccc csceceeeeeeeseeeeneeeeees 183 4 3 4 2 Step 1 Creating tags or AN ANAY eee eter cette eee etne ee ee ee ee ete ee ee taaeeeeraeee ee taeeee tee aaeeeereea 3 4 3 4 3 Step 2 Configuring an alani viccdecsicaceessedcee vanndares vacadeecadcagevvendevbvanaevesvantenvviaecdev inert anewamezedeid 3 4 3 4 4 Step 3 Configure the acknowledgmMent cece eters cette eset eete eee tne esse tneeee teases teeereae tea 8 4 4 COMMISSIONING COMPONSIUS wisi ssena aaa A A AAE E 8 4 4 1 Commissioning components communications modules ccceeseceeeseeeeeeeeteeeessteeeeeeseeeess 4 5 Connecting cables for LG GLOFA GM c ce ececeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeieeeeeeaeeeeesieeeeetaeeeetieeeertneeeetea 191 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 11 Table of contents 12 4 5 1 Connecting cable PP1 RS 232 for LG IMO 000 cc uinui anisina aaia aiai iaaa 191 4 5 2 Connecting cable PP2 RS 422 for LG IMO 0 cccecccceeeeceenneceeeeeeeeceaeaeeeeeeseceeaeeeeeesecseaeeneees 4 5 3 Connecting cable PP3 RS 485 for LG IMO 0 0 cc ceee cece eeeeccecceceeeeeeceaeeeeeeeesecaeaeeeeeeseesnaeeneees 4 5 4 Connecting cable PP4 RS 232 for LG IMO ccccecceeeeeeenneceeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeesececaeeeeeesecsnaeeneees 4 5 5 Connecting cable MP1 RS 485 for LG IMO cceeceeeeeeecneececeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeesecaeaeeeseesecsnneeeees 4 5 6 Connecting cable MP2 RS 422 for LG IMO
64. data inconsistency is detected if one of the conditions outlined below has been met e The data mailbox status is set to Transfer completed e The data mailbox status is set to Transfer completed with error WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 182 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with LG controllers 4 3 User data areas 4 3 4 Events alarms and acknowledgments 4 3 4 1 General information on events alarms and acknowledgments Function Messages return information about the PLC or HMI device operating states or problems to the user on the HMI device The message texts consist of configurable texts and or tags with actual values Operational messages and events must be distinguished The programmer defines what is an operational message and what is an error alarm Operational message An operational message indicates a state Example e Motor on e PLC in manual mode Alarm message An error alarm indicates a malfunction Example e Valve does not open e Excess motor temperature Alarms indicate exceptional operational states and must therefore be acknowledged Acknowledgment To acknowledge error alarms e Operator input on the HMI device e The PLC sets an acknowledgment bit Triggering alarms Triggering of an alarm in the PLC e Setting a tag bit e Measured value limits exceeded The location of tags or of the tag array is defined in WinCC flexible ES The tag or array must be s
65. data record from PLC PLC gt DAT PLC job no 69 transfers data records from the PLC to the HMI device The PLC job is structured as follows Left byte LB Right byte RB Word 1 0 69 Word 2 Recipe number 1 999 Word 3 Data record number 1 to 65535 Word 4 Do not overwrite existing data record 0 Overwrite existing data record 1 No 70 Write data record to PLC DAT gt PLC PLC job No 70 transfers data records from the HMI device to the PLC The PLC job is structured as follows Left byte LB Right byte RB Word 1 0 70 Word 2 Recipe number 1 999 Word 3 Data record number 1 to 65535 Word 4 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 94 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 3 User data areas Sequence when reading from the PLC with PLC job PLC gt DAT no 69 Step Action 1 Check Status word 0 Yes No 2 The HMI device enters the recipe and data record number specified in Abort without the job and the status Transfer active in the data record return message 3 The HMI device reads the values from the PLC and saves these to the data record defined in the PLC job 4 e If Overwrite was selected in the job an existing data record is overwritten without any prompt for confirmation The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed e If Do not overwrite was selected in the j
66. defined in the PLC job 4 e If Overwrite was selected in the job an existing data record is overwritten without any prompt for confirmation The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed e If Do not overwrite was selected in the job and the data record already exists the HMI device aborts the job and enters 0000 1100 in the status word of the data record 5 The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers Sequence of writing to the PLC using PLC job DAT gt PLC no 70 Step Action 1 Check Status word 0 Yes No 2 The HMI device enters the recipe and data record number specified in Abort without the job and the status Transfer active in the data record return message 3 The HMI device fetches the values of the data record specified in the function from the data medium and writes the values to the PLC The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed 5 The control program can now evaluate the transferred data The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 195 Communication with LG controllers 4 3 User data areas Sequence of a transfer started by the operator in the recipe display Reading from the PLC started by the operator in the recipe display Step Action 1 Check
67. entering the alarm or screen tags in a data area Changes in the PLC can only be detected reliably if these are available at least within the actual acquisition cycle Set a maximum possible transmission rate WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 2 Contiguring the Allen Bradley communication driver Discrete alarms Use arrays to handle discrete alarms and assign each alarm to one bit of the array tag instead of assigning these to any subelements You may only use tags of the N O I S and B file type and Int and UInt data type in discrete alarms and arrays Screens The refresh rate of screens is determined by the type and volume of data to be visualized Only configure short acquisition cycles for objects which actually require shorter refresh cycles This procedure reduces update times Trends The HMI device always updates all bit triggered trends whose group bit is set in the Trend transfer area It resets the bits in the next cycle The group bit in the PLC program can only be set again after the HMI device has reset all bits PLC jobs A high rate and volume of PLC jobs transferred may lead to overload in communication between the HMI device and the PLC The HMI device confirms acceptance of the PLC job by entering the value zero in the first data word of the job mailbox The HMI device now processes the job for wh
68. for GE Fanuc 3 5 3 Connecting cable PP3 RS 232 for GE Fanuc Connecting cable PP3 with Western connector HMI device GE Fanuc connector 1 connector 2 9 pin D Sub female connector 6 pin RJ11 connector screw locking V 24 enclosure GND GND TxD RxD RTS CTS YAY4 Pin 1 is at the bottom when looking at the controller RJ11 Shield with large area contact to casing at both ends Cable 5 x 0 14 mm2 shielded max length 15 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 151 Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 5 Connecting cables for GE Fanuc 3 5 4 Connecting cable PP4 RS 232 for GE Fanuc Connecting cable PP4 with Western connector HMI device GE Fanuc connector 1 connector 2 15 pin D Sub connector 6 pin RJ11 connector screw locking cable outlet for pin 1 metal enclosure V 24 enclosure GND GND TxD lt RD De lt gt RTS CTS Pin 1 is at the bottom when looking at the controller RJ11 Shield with large area contact to casing at both ends Cable 5 x 0 14 mm2 shielded max length 15 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 152 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 5 Connecting cables for GE Fanuc 3 5 5 Connecting cable PP5 RS 232 for GE Fanuc Connecting cable PP5 with RJ 45 connector HMI device GE Fanuc connector 1 connector 2 9 pin D Sub female c
69. for multiplexed tags WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 2 Contiguring the Allen Bradley communication driver Examples of addressing with Allen Bradley E IP C Logix Example of a table for addressing The table below defines the basic variants for addressing PLC tags Other addressing variants are possible by means of combination Type Type Address General PLC tag Tag name Program tag Program tagname Array Access to an element ofa 2 Arraytag Dim1 Dim2 dimensional array Element of structure array Arraytag Dim1 structureelement 1 dimensional Bit in element basic type Arraytag Dim1 Dim2 Bit array 2 dimensional Structure Array in structure Structuretag arraytag Bit in the element of an array Structuretag structure2 arraytag in the substructure element bit Note Program tags are addressed by leading the address with the program name derived from the PLC with colon delimiter Example Programname arraytag Dim1 Dim2 Access to array elements Type Address PLC tag Arraytag Dim 1 Arraytag Dim1 Dim2 Arraytag Dim1 Dim2 Dim3 Program tag Programname arraytag Dim1 Programname arraytag Dim1 Dim2 Programname arraytag Dim1 Dim2 Dim3 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 75 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 2 Contiguring the Allen
70. installed Therefore no Rebuild your project with Project gt Generator gt scripts can be executed Generate and transfer the project to the HMI device 20014 The system function returns a value that is not Select the specified script in the configuration written in any return tag Check whether the script name has been assigned a value 20015 Too many successive scripts have been triggered Find what is triggering the scripts Extend the times in short intervals When more than 20 scripts are e g the polling time of the tags which trigger the queued for processing any subsequent scripts are scripts rejected In this case the script indicated in the alarm is not executed 30000 Alarms for IFwSetValue SetValue Number Effect causes Remedy 30010 The tag could not accept the function result e g Check the tag type of the system function parameter when it has exceeded the value range 30011 A system function could not be executed because Check the parameter value and tag type of the invalid the function was assigned an invalid value or type parameter If a tag is used as a parameter check its in the parameter value 30012 A system function could not be executed because Check the parameter value and tag type of the invalid the function was assigned an invalid value or type parameter If a tag is used as a parameter check its in the parameter value 338 WinCC flexible 2008 Communicat
71. next job mailbox will only be accepted when there is processing capacity available 4 3 User data areas 4 3 1 Trend request and trend transfer Function A trend is the graphic visualization of one or more values from the PLC The value is read either time or bit triggered depending on the configuration Time triggered trends The HMI device reads in the trend values cyclically at an interval specified in the configuration Time triggered trends are suitable for continuous processes for example the operating temperature of a motor Bit triggered trends By setting a trigger bit in the trend request tag the HMI device either reads in a trend value or an entire trend buffer This setting is defined in configuration data Bit triggered trends are normally used to visualize rapidly changing values One example might be the injection pressure in the production of plastic parts To trigger bit triggered trends create suitable external tags in the Tags editor of WinCC flexible The tags must be linked with the trend areas The HMI device and PLC then communicate with each other over these trend areas The following areas are available for trends e Trend request area e Trend transfer area 1 e Trend transfer area 2 required only with switch buffers Tags of the M Area are permitted They must be of the data type Word or an array tag of the data type Word During configuration you assign a bit to a trend This sets a unique b
72. obtain information about the location and size of data areas in the PLC The PLC and the HMI device interactively communicate read and write data for these data areas The PLC and the HMI device trigger defined interactions based on the evaluation of stored data The area pointers reside in PLC memory Their addresses are configured in the Area pointers dialog of the Connections editor Area pointers used in WinCC flexible Device dependency PLC job Project ID Screen number Data record Date time Date time PLC Coordination Availability of the area pointer depends on the HMI device used WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 4 User data areas Application Configure and enable the area pointer in Communication gt Connections before you put it into use Parameters Area pointer For all connections ae a e lt undefined gt v Date time PLC Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt lt undefined gt Screen number 5 Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt lt undefined gt Project ID 1 Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt o wat til gt For each connection a pem formase eerie fome bd Data mailbox Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt Tob mailbox 4 Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt Coordination 1 Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt Date time 6 Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt il I gt Enabling
73. of data records is specified in the recipe Recipes editor properties view of the recipe Properties group in Transfer WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 4 User data areas Structure of the data area The data area has a fixed length of 5 words Structure of the data area 15 0 1 Word Current recipe number 1 999 2 Word Current data record number 0 65535 3 Word Reserved 4 Word Status 0 2 4 12 5 Word Reserved e Status The status word word 4 can adopt the following values Value Meaning Decimal Binary 0 0000 0000 Transfer permitted data record free 2 0000 0010 Transfer is busy 4 0000 0100 Transfer completed without error 12 0000 1100 Transfer completed with error Possible causes of error when transferring data records Possible causes of error 228 The section below shows possible error causes which lead to the cancellation of data record transfer Tag address not set up on the PLC Overwriting data records not possible Recipe number does not exist Data record number does not exist Note The status word may only be set by the HMI device The PLC may only reset the status word to zero Note The PLC may only evaluate the recipe and data record numbers when data inconsistency is detected if one of the conditions outlined belo
74. of the M area and the data types Word are permitted WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 195 Communication with LG controllers 4 2 Configuring the LG GLOFA GM communication driver Representation in WinCC flexible It is essential that these data areas are also set up for the CPU with GMWIN For symbolic tags the exact name used on the PLC must be entered To be able to write to a symbolic tag in the access tag area of the PLC in GMWIN it must be registered as READ_WRITE READ_ONLY is only adequate for output fields Note Symbolic tags Named area can be used for communication with GM7 over the Cnet module and cannot be used directly on GM6 CPU B You cannot use the data type Bool directly on GM6 CPU B Note Only the data type Word can be used for area pointers arrays and discrete alarms For internal memory M area you have the following options for the data type Bool when entering the address e MX bit e MB bits in byte e MW bits in word e MD bits in double word You cannot use the data type Bool in the upper memory areas Values are not read and written correctly for addresses greater than e MX9999 e MB1249 7 e MW624 15 e MD312 15 Only tags of the data type string up to 4 ASCII characters long can be read by the Lucky Goldstar communications software and they cannot be written WinCC flexible 2008 Communic
75. overwrite existing data record 1 Overwrite existing data record 70 Write data record to PLC Parameter 1 Recipe number 1 999 Parameter 2 Data record number 1 65535 Parameter 3 1 OP 73 OP 77A and TP 177A HMI devices also execute the Screen selection job mailbox if the on screen keyboard is active WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 133 Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 3 User data areas 3 3 3 8 Data mailbox area pointer Data mailbox area pointer Function When data records are transferred between the HMI device and PLC both partners access common communications areas on the PLC Data transfer types There are two ways of transferring data records between the HMI device and PLC e Transfer without synchronization e Transfer with synchronization over the data record Data records are always transferred directly That is the tag values are read from an address or written to an address configured for this tag directly without redirecting the values by means of interim memory Initiating the transfer of data records There are three ways of triggering the transfer e Operator input in the recipe view e PLC jobs The transfer of data records can also be triggered by the PLC e Triggering by configured functions If the transfer of data records is triggered by a configured function or by a PLC job the recipe di
76. own purposes could violate the rights of the owner Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described Since variance cannot be precluded entirely we cannot guarantee full consistency However the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions Siemens AG Ordernumber 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Copyright Siemens AG 2008 Industry Sector 07 2008 Technical data subject to change Postfach 48 48 90327 N RNBERG GERMANY Preface Purpose of this manual This user manual is part of the WinCC flexible documentation The purpose of the WinCC flexible Communication user manual is to explain which communications protocols can be used for communication between a SIEMENS HMI device and a controller e which SIEMENS HMI devices can be used for communication e which controllers can be connected to a selected SIEMENS HMI device e which settings are required in the controller program for the connection and e which user data areas must be set up for communication Separate sections therefore explain the size structure and function of the user data areas and the assigned area pointers The manual is intended for newcomers operators and configuration engineers involved in configuration commissioning installation and service with WinCC flexible The help integrated in WinCC
77. parameters double click Communication gt Connections in the project window of the HMI device In the project window of the HMI device Mitsubishi FX is selected in the Communication drivers column You can now enter or modify the protocol parameters in the Properties window Device dependent parameters e Interface Select the HMI port to which the Mitsubishi PLC is connected under Interface For more detailed information refer to the Manual of the HMI device e Type Depending on the selected interface RS 232 RS 422 or RS 485 is selected here Note If you use the IF1B interface you must also switch over the RS 422 received data and the RTS signal using 4 DIP switches on the back of the Multi Panel e Baud rate Define the transmission rate between the HMI device and the PLC under Baud rate Note The highest station address must be less than or equal to 63 if you set a transmission rate of 1 5 Mbaud at OP 73 or OP 77A If connecting a TP 170A to a SIMATIC S7 station at a transmision rate of 1 5 MBaud on PROFIBUS DP set a value less than or equal to 63 for the highest station address HSA e Data bits Select 7 bits or 8 bits under Databits e Parity Select None Even or Odd under Parity e Stop bits Select 1 or 2 Stop bits WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 2 Communication v
78. pin D Sub connector enclosure RxD D TxD lt DTR GND SG DSR CD RTS CTS Y 4 Shield with large area contact to casing at both ends Cable 5 x 0 14 mmz2 shielded max length 15 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 244 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 5 Connecting cables for Mitsubishi 5 5 2 4 Connecting cable PP4 RS 232 for Mitsubishi PP4 connecting cable HMI device Mitsubishi connector 1 connector 2 15 pin D Sub connector 25 pin D Sub connector enclosure RxD D TD lt DTR GND SG DSR CD RTS CTS a Shield with large area contact to casing at both ends Cable 5 x 0 14 mmz2 shielded max length 300 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 295 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 5 Connecting cables for Mitsubishi 5 5 2 5 Connecting cable PP5 RS 232 for Mitsubishi Connecting cable PP5 HMI device Mitsubishi connector 1 connector 2 9 pin D Sub connector 6 pin screw terminal enclosure FG TxD RDA TxD RDB RxD TDA RxD TDB Terminating resistor R 330 Ohm Shield with large area contact to casing at both ends Cable 5 x 0 14 mm shielded max length 500 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 246 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 5 Connecting cables for Mitsubishi 5 5 2 6 Co
79. program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers Sequence of writing to the PLC using PLC job DAT gt PLC no 70 Step Action 1 Check Status word 0 Yes No 2 The HMI device enters the recipe and data record number specified in Abort without the job and the status Transfer active in the data record return message 3 The HMI device fetches the values of the data record specified in the function from the data medium and writes the values to the PLC The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed 5 The control program can now evaluate the transferred data The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 4 User data areas Sequence of a transfer started by the operator in the recipe display Reading from the PLC started by the operator in the recipe display Step Action 1 Check Status word 0 Yes No 2 The HMI device enters the recipe number to be read and the status Abort with system Transfer active in the data record and sets the data record number alarm to 0 3 The HMI device reads the values from the PLC and displays them in the recipe display If the recipes have synchronized tags the values from the PLC are also written to the tags
80. properties view The bit number bit identifies the first of two consecutive bits that control the following LED states LED function all Mobile Panels Operator Panels Bint 1 Bit n and Multi Panels Panel PCs 0 0 Off Off 0 1 Rapid flashing Flashing 1 0 Slow flashing Flashing 1 1 Permanent signal Permanent signal WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Modicon controllers 6 4 User data areas 6 4 3 Area pointer 6 4 3 1 General information on area pointers Modicon Modbus Introduction Area pointers are parameter fields WinCC flexible Runtime reads these parameter fields in order to obtain information about the location and size of data areas in the PLC The PLC and the HMI device interactively communicate read and write data for these data areas The PLC and the HMI device trigger defined interactions based on the evaluation of stored data The area pointers reside in PLC memory Their addresses are configured in the Area pointers dialog of the Connections editor Area pointers used in WinCC flexible e PLC job e Project ID e Screen number e Data record e Date time e Date time PLC e Coordination Device dependency Availability of the area pointer depends on the HMI device used WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 270 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Modicon c
81. recognized reliably they must be available at least during the actual acquisition cycle e Set the transmission rate to the highest possible value For discrete alarms use arrays and assign the individual alarms to one bit of the array tags themselves and not to the individual subelements Only tags in the areas 4x 6x and MW and only the data types Int and Int are permitted as discrete alarms and arrays WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with Modicon controllers Screens Trends Job mailboxes 6 3 Communication via Modbus TCP IP protocol With screens the update rate that can actually be achieved depends on the type and amount of data to be displayed Configure short acquisition cycles only for objects which actually require shorter refresh cycles When using bit triggered trends if the group bit is set in the Trend transfer area the HMI device always updates all the trends whose bit is set in this area It then resets the bits The group bit in the PLC program can only be set again after all bits have been reset by the HMI device If large numbers of job mailboxes are sent in quick succession this can lead to overload in the communication between the HMI device and PLC The HMI device confirms acceptance of the job mailbox by entering the value zero in the first data word of the job mailbox The HMI device now processes the job for whic
82. specified is assigned its start value Insert the specified data recipe tag in the source structure 290008 There is a difference between the source and target structure of the recipe currently being processed The source structure contains an additional data recipe tag which is not available in the target structure and therefore cannot be assigned The value is rejected Remove the specified data recipe tag in the specified recipe from the project 290010 The storage location configured for the recipe is not permitted Possible causes Illegal characters write protection data carrier out of space or does not exist Check the configured storage location 290011 The record with the specified number does not exist Check the source for the number constant or tag value 362 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Appendix 8 1 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 290012 The recipe with the specified number does not Check the source for the number constant or tag exist value 290013 An attempt was made to save a record under a The following remedies are available record number which already exists e Check the source for the number constant or tag The action is not executed value e First delete the record e Change the Overwrite function parameter 290014 The file spec
83. sufficient intervals between successive print jobs e g alarms Up to 1000 lines are buffered 10005 Text lines can now be buffered again 10006 The Windows printing system reports an error Repeat the action if necessary Refer to the output text and the error ID to determine the possible causes Nothing is printed or the print is faulty 20000 Global script alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 20010 An error has occurred in the specified script line Select the specified script line in the configuration Execution of the script was therefore aborted Note Ensure that the tags used are of the allowed types the system alarm that may have occurred prior to Check system functions for the correct number and this types of parameters 20011 An error has occurred in a script that was called by In the configuration select the script that has been the specified script called directly or indirectly by the specified script Execution of the script was therefore aborted in the Ensure that the tags used are of the allowed types called script Check system functions for the correct number and Note the system alarm that may have occurred types of parameters prior to this 20012 The configuration data is inconsistent The script Recompile the configuration could therefore not be generated 20013 The scripting component of WinCC flexible Reinstall WinCC flexible Runtime on your PC Runtime is not correctly
84. system function in the project if copying when the target log already contains data necessary Before you initiate the system function Mode parameter The log is not copied delete the destination log file 80025 You have canceled the copy operation Data written up to this point are retained The destination log file if configured is not deleted The cancellation is reported by an error entry RT_ERR at the end of the destination log WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 373 Appendix 8 1 System alarms exporting the log Number Effect causes Remedy 80026 This alarm is output after all logs are initialized Values are written to the logs from then on Prior to this no entries are written to the logs irrespective whether WinCC flexible Runtime is active or not 80027 The internal Flash memory has been specified as Configure Storage Card or a network path as the the storage location for a log This is not storage location permissible No values are written to this log and the log file is not created 80028 The alarm returns a status report indicating that the logs are currently being initialized No values are logged until the alarm 80026 is output 80029 The number of logs specified in the alarm could not Evaluate the additional system alarms related to this be initialized The logs are in
85. the data record specified in the function from the data medium and transfers the values to the PLC The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed The control program can now evaluate the transferred data The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers Sequence of the transfer triggered by a PLC job The transfer of data records between the HMI device and the PLC can be initiated by either one of these stations The two PLC jobs No 69 and No 70 are available for this type of transfer No 69 Read data record from PLC PLC gt DAT PLC job no 69 transfers data records from the PLC to the HMI device The PLC job is structured as follows Left byte LB Right byte RB Word 1 0 69 Word 2 Recipe number 1 999 Word 3 Data record number 1 to 65535 Word 4 Do not overwrite existing data record 0 Overwrite existing data record 1 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 295 Communication with Modicon controllers 6 4 User data areas No 70 Write data record to PLC DAT gt PLC PLC job No 70 transfers data records from the HMI device to the PLC The PLC job is structured as follows Left byte LB Right byte RB Word 1 0 70 Word 2 Recipe number 1 999 Word 3 Data record number 1 to 65535 Word 4 Sequence when reading from the PLC wit
86. to casing at both ends Cable 5 x 0 14 mm2 shielded max length 15 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 5 Connecting cables for Mitsubishi 5 5 2 Connecting cable for Mitsubishi protocol 4 5 5 2 1 Connecting cable PP1 RS 232 for Mitsubishi PP1 connecting cable HMI device Mitsubishi connector 1 connector 2 9 pin D Sub female connector 9 pin D Sub connector enclosure Shield with large area contact to casing at both ends Cable 3 x 2 x 0 14 mm2 shielded max length 1200 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 242 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 5 Connecting cables for Mitsubishi 5 5 2 2 Connecting cable PP2 RS 232 for Mitsubishi PP2 connecting cable HMI device Mitsubishi connector 1 connector 2 9 pin D Sub female connector 25 pin D Sub connector enclosure RxD D TD lt DTR GND SG DSR CD RTS CTS a Shield with large area contact to casing at both ends Cable 5 x 0 14 mmz2 shielded max length 15 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 295 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 5 Connecting cables for Mitsubishi 5 5 2 3 Connecting cable PP3 RS 232 for Mitsubishi PP3 connecting cable HMI device Mitsubishi connector 1 connector 2 15 pin D Sub connector 9
87. to the SIMATIC Logon Server when trying to change the password of a and its configuration for example SIMATIC log on user the system attempts to 4 Port number access the SIMATIC Logon Server 2 IP address If attempting to log on the new user is not 3 8 logged in If a different user was logged on i ne name before then this user is logged off 4 Functional transfer cable Or use a local user 260029 The SIMATIC Logon user is not associated to Check the user data on the SIMATIC Logon Server any or several groups and the configuration in your WinCC flexible project The new user is not logged in If a different user A user may only be assigned to one group was logged on before then this user is logged off 260030 The SIMATIC Logon user could not change his Log in again and choose a different password password on the SIMATIC Logon Server The Check the password rules on the SIMATIC Logon new password may not comply with the Server password regulations on the server or the user does not have the right to change his password The old password remains and the user is logged off 260031 It was not possible to log the user on to the Try again If necessary check the password data on SIMATIC Logon Server The user name or the the SIMATIC Logon Server password could be incorrect or the user does not have sufficient rights to log on The new user is not logged in If a different user was logged on before then this user is logged o
88. transfer Tag address not set up on the PLC Overwriting data records not possible Recipe number does not exist Data record number does not exist Note The status word may only be set by the HMI device The PLC may only reset the status word to zero Note The PLC may only evaluate the recipe and data record numbers when data inconsistency is detected if one of the conditions outlined below has been met e The data mailbox status is set to Transfer completed e The data mailbox status is set to Transfer completed with error WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with LG controllers 4 3 User data areas Reaction to an aborted transfer due to errors If the transfer of data records is aborted due to errors the HMI device reacts as follows e Triggering by the operator in the recipe display Information in the status bar of the recipe view and output of system alarms e Triggered by function Output of system alarms e Triggering by PLC job No feedback message on the HMI device You can nonetheless evaluate the status of the transfer by querying the status word in the data record Sequence of the transfer when triggered by a configured function Reading from the PLC using a configured function Step Action 1 Check Status word 0 Yes No 2 The HMI device enters the recipe and data record number Abort with system specified in
89. triggered by pressing the ACK button for example The acknowledgment bit must be located in the same tag as the bit for the error alarm WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Modicon controllers 6 4 User data areas Reset the acknowledgment bit before setting the bit in the alarm area again The figure below shows the pulse diagram Error alarm Acknowledgment PLC HMI device Arrival of the POE Reset a New error alarm via PLC I acknowledgm bit l error alarm gt l Acknowledgment on the HMI device In Ack read tag you configure the tag or the array tag and the bit number that is written to the PLC after acknowledgment from the HMI device Make sure when you use an array tag that it is not longer than 6 words In order to ensure that a signal transition is generated as soon as the acknowledgment bit is set the HMI device first resets the acknowledgment bit assigned to an error alarm There is a certain time based offset between these two operations due to the processing time of the HMI device Note The reset includes all alarm bits acknowledged since the last restart of Runtime The PLC may only read this area once If the alarm is acknowledged on the HMI device the bit is then set in the assigned acknowledgment tag on the PLC This allows the PLC to recognize that the error alarm has been acknowledged The
90. using an HMI device this includes machines processing centers systems plants and processes Transfer mode Mode on the HMI device in which data is transferred from the configuration computer to the HMI device WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 373 Appendix 8 3 Glossary WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 374 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Index A Acknowledgement 97 141 183 233 286 Addressing Allen Bradley Ethernet IP 70 Alarm Device based dependency Alarm message 97 141 233 Acknowledgment by the PLC 102 290 Acknowledgment on the HMI device 103 146 188 238 291 Configuring the acknowledgment 102 145 187 237 290 4 amp 7 Allen Bradley Allen Bradley DF1 communication driver 46 Allen Bradley DH485 communication driver 46 Allen Bradley Ethernet IP communication driver communication over Allen Bradley Ethernet IP Communication peer 46 4 Configuring an alarm Creating a tag 9 Creating an array 9 Allen Bradley DF 1 Connection Device dependent parameters Installing communication drivers Multipoint connection KF2 module on DH LAN 49 Multipoint connection KF23 module on DH485 LAN Network parameters Permitted data type PLC dependent parameters Point to point connection Protocol parameters Selecting the PLC Allen Bradley DH485 Connection 5 Device dependent parameters S Installing co
91. was selected in the job and the data record already exists the HMI device aborts the job and enters 0000 1100 in the status word of the data record 5 The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers Sequence of writing to the PLC using PLC job DAT gt PLC no 70 Step 1 Action Check Status word 0 Yes No 2 The HMI device enters the recipe and data record number specified in the job and the status Transfer active in the data record Abort without return message 3 The HMI device fetches the values of the data record specified in the function from the data medium and writes the values to the PLC The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed 5 The control program can now evaluate the transferred data The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 321 Communication with Omron controllers 7 3 User data areas Sequence of a transfer started by the operator in the recipe display Reading from the PLC started by the operator in the recipe display Step Action 1 Check Status word 0 Yes No 2 The HMI device enters the recipe number to be read and the status Abort with system Transfer active in the data record and sets the data record number alarm to 0 3
92. with WinCC flexible and is installed automatically No special blocks are required in the PLC for the connection 6 2 3 Configuring the PLC type and protocol Select the PLC For a connection to a Modicon PLC double click on Communication gt Connections in the project view of the HMI device Go to the Communication drivers column and select the protocol Modicon Modbus RTU The property view displays the protocol parameters You can edit the parameters at any time by double clicking Communication gt Connections in the project view of the HMI device Select the connection and edit its parameters in the properties dialog box Note The settings on the HMI device and on the PLC must match WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Modicon controllers 6 2 Communication via Modbus RTU protocol 6 2 4 Configuring protocol parameters Parameters to be set To edit the parameters double click Communication gt Connections in the project window of the HMI device Select Modicon Modbus RTU from the Communications driver column in the work area You can now enter or modify the protocol parameters in the Properties window Device dependent parameters e Interface Select the HMI interface to which the Modicon PLC is connected under Interface For more detailed information refer to the Manual of the HMI device e Type Only RS 232 has been system
93. x Area PONE ssai iiaiai iana aaa apaadi a a Riada 3 3 3 8 Data mailbox area pointer cccccccececeeeeceeeeeeceeceeeeeeceeaaeceeeeeececaaeaeeeeeeseccaeeeeeeeeeseceeseeseaeees 3 3 4 Events alarms and acknowledgment c ceeeceeceeeeeeeeecaeceeeeeeeseaeaeeeeeeesecieaeeeeeeesesesaeess 3 3 4 1 General information on events alarms and acknowledgments 3 3 4 2 Step 1 Creating tags OF an ANAY oe eee eee eneeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseeaaeeeeeeaeeeseenaeeessieeeeeeeeneaaes 142 33493 Step 2 Configuring amalan civic ccacostacceetiveevecevend A 143 3 3 4 4 Step 3 Configure the ACKNOWIEdQMENK ee eeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseenaeeeseaeeeseetaeeeseneeeaes 3 4 Commissioning COMpONENS senesini nie ee eee 147 3 4 1 COMMISSIONING COMPONENKS ceeececeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeseeaaeeeecaaeeeseeaaeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeseeneeeaaes 3 5 Connecting cables for GE Fanue masieri iar nie elie a ieee ene 149 3 5 1 Connecting cable PP1 RS 232 for GE Fanuc ecccceceeeeeneeeeeeeeeseneeaeeeeeeeeesenaeaeeeeeeeeees 149 3 5 2 Connecting cable PP2 RS 232 for GE Fanuc ecccceceeeeeeecceeeeeeeseseaeeeeeeeeesenieeeeeeeeneees 3 5 3 Connecting cable PP3 RS 232 for GE Fanuc ecccccceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseseeaeceeeeesesenieeeeeeeeeeees 3 5 4 Connecting cable PP4 RS 232 for GE Fanuc c ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeaeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeeees 3 5 5 Connecting cable PP5 R
94. 0 The numbers are assigned consecutively in the engineering system You can change the alarm numbers when assigning these to groups for example e Specify the alarm class Available alarm classes Error alarms This class must be acknowledged Operational message This class signals events with incoming and outgoing alarms WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 3 User data areas e Assign trigger tag In the Trigger tag column you link the configured alarm with the tag created in step 1 The selection list returns all tags with valid data type e Specify the bit number In the bit number column specify the relevant bit position in the created tag Remember that the way the bit positions are counted depends on the particular PLC With Allen Bradley PLCs the bit positions are counted as follows How the bit positions are counted left byte right byte In Allen Bradley PLCs 1 8 7 0 5 Configurations in WinCC flexible 1 8 7 0 5 Analog alarms The only difference between analog messages and bit messages is that you configure a limit rather than a bit number The alarm is triggered when this limit is exceeded The outgoing alarm is triggered when the low limit is violated making allowances for any configured hysteresis WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part
95. 0 Alarm_S alarms Number 300000 Effect causes Faulty configuration of process monitoring e g using PDiag or S7 Graph More alarms are queued than specified in the specifications of the CPU No further ALARM_S alarms can be managed by the PLC and reported to the HMI devices Remedy Change the PLC configuration 300001 ALARM_S is not registered on this PLC Select a controller that supports the ALARM_S service 310000 Report system alarms report is either not printed or printed with errors Number Effect causes Remedy 310000 An attempt is being made to print too many Wait until the previous active log was printed reports in parallel Repeat the print job if necessary Only one log file can be output to the printer at a given time the print job is therefore rejected 310001 An error occurred on triggering the printer The Evaluate the additional system alarms related to this alarm Repeat the print job if necessary 320000 Alarms the networks ProAgent cannot indicate any faulty addresses Number Effect causes Remedy 320000 The movements have already been indicated Deselect the movements on the other display units by another device and select the motion control screen on the required The movements can no longer be controlled display unit 320001 The network is too complex View the network in STL The faulty addresses cannot b
96. 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 2 Contiguring the Allen Bradley communication driver Addressing types in Allen Bradley E IP C Logix Arrays Array elements Bits and bit tags Structures An array is a data structure that includes a number of data of the same type WinCC flexible only supports one dimensional arrays In the address column of the tag editor enter the array name possibly by specifying a start element The length is defined in the Array Elements input box of the tag editor Any violation of array limits in the PLC leads to addressing errors Example faulty indexing These arrays must be declared in the PLC as controller or program tags Two or three dimensional arrays in the PLC can only be addressed in WinCC flexible if these can be formed in each area on one dimensional arrays Note Read and write operations always include all array tag elements The contents of an array tag which is interconnected with a PLC are always transferred whenever there is a change The HMI device and the PLC cannot concurrently write data to the same array tag for this reason Instead of writing data only to a single element the program writes the entire array to the PLC Elements of one dimensional two dimensional and three dimensional arrays in the PLC are indexed by setting an index and the corresponding notation in the tag editor Array addressing starts at element 0 with a
97. 1 to 31 Month 1 to 12 Date n 5 Year 80 to 99 0 to 29 Reserved Note The entry of values from 80 to 99 in the Year data area returns the years 1980 through 1999 values from 0 to 29 return the years 2000 through 2029 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 295 Communication with Modicon controllers 6 4 User data areas 6 4 3 4 Date time controller area pointer Function This area pointer is used to transfer the date and time from the PLC to the HMI device Use this area pointer if the PLC is the time master The PLC loads the data area of the area pointer All definitions are coded in BCD format The HMI device reads the data cyclically within the configured acquisition cycle and synchronizes itself Note Set an acquisition cycle of sufficient length for the date time area pointer in order to avoid any negative impact on HMI device performance Recommended Acquisition cycle of 1 minute if your process can handle it The date time data area has the following structure DATE_AND_TIME format in BCD code Data word Left byte Right byte n 0 Year 80 to 99 0 to 29 Month 1 to 12 n 1 Day 1 to 31 Hour 0 to 23 n 2 Minute 0 to 59 Second 0 to 59 n 3 Reserved Reserved Weekday 1to7 1 Sunday n 4 1 Reserved Reserved n 5 1 Reserved Reserved 1 The two data words must be available in the data area in order t
98. 1CA01 3ABO Communication with LG controllers 4 4 1 Communication with LG GLOFA GM 4 1 1 Communication partner LG GLOFA Introduction This section describes the communication between an HMI device and an LG Industrial Systems Lucky Goldstar PLC of the GLOFA GM GM4 GM6 and GM7 series resp IMO PLC of the G4 G6 and G7 series simply called LG controllers below Communication between one or more LG controllers and the HMI device is implemented over a Cnet communication module for example G4L CUEA or G6L CUEC with an RS 232 RS 485 RS 422 interface With this PLC the PLC s own protocol is used for a dedicated connection Released communication types The following types of physical connection have been released for LG controllers e RS 232 e RS 422 Note The HMI device can only be operated as a master SIMATIC HMI WinCC flexible 2008 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 157 Communication with LG controllers 4 2 Configuring the LG GLOFA GM communication driver 4 1 2 Communication between HMI device and controller LG GLOFA Communications principle Tags User data areas The HMI device and the PLC communicate using tags and the user data areas The PLC and the HMI device exchange data using process values In your configuration create tags that point to an address on the PLC The HMI device reads and displays the value from the defined address The oper
99. 2 9 pin PP2 connecting cable MP2 connecting cable RS 485 9 pin PP3 connecting cable MP1 connecting cable The HMI device port to be used is defined in the corresponding manual The pin assignments of the cables are described in the section Connecting cables for LG Setting the operating mode switch on the Cnet module The operating mode switch must be set to dedicated e g on the G4L CUEA to setting 3 4 2 2 Installing the communication driver Driver for the HMI device The driver for connection to LG INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS IMO controllers is supplied with WinCC flexible and is installed automatically No special blocks are required in the PLC for the connection 4 2 3 Configuring the controller type and protocol Select the PLC For a connection to an LG IMO PLC using dedicated communication double click on Communication gt Connections in the project view of the HMI device Go to the Communication drivers column and select the protocol LG GLOFA GM The property view displays the parameters of the selected protocol Note The settings on the HMI device and on the PLC must match You can check and set the PLC parameters for the Cnet module using the LG program Cnet Frame Editor CnetEdit exe Settings on the Cnet module become effective only after the voltage returns The parameters for GM6 CPU B and GM7 are set with GMWIN You can edit the parameters at any time by double clicking Communicatio
100. 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Omron controllers 7 2 Configuring the communication driver Omron Hostlink Muttilink 7 2 2 Installing the communication driver Driver for the HMI device The driver for connection to OMRON controllers is supplied with WinCC flexible and is installed automatically No special blocks are required in the PLC for the connection 7 2 3 Configuring the controller type and protocol Omron Select the PLC For a connection to an Omron PLC double click on Communication gt Connections in the project view of the HMI device Go to the Communication drivers column and select the protocol Omron Hostlink Multilink The property view displays the protocol parameters You can edit the parameters at any time by double clicking Communication gt Connections in the project view of the HMI device Select the connection and edit its parameters in the properties dialog box Note The settings on the HMI device and on the PLC must match WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 299 Communication with Omron controllers 7 2 Contiguring the communication driver Omron Hostlink Multilink 7 2 4 Configuring protocol parameters Omron Parameters to be set To edit the parameters double click Communication gt Connections in the project window of the HMI device In the project window of the HMI device Omron Hostlink
101. 2 shielded max length 15 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 110 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 4 Connecting cables for Allen Bradley 2 4 8 Connecting cable PP2 RS 232 for Allen Bradley PP2 connecting cable For interconnecting the HMI device RS 232 15 pin sub D AlC Advanced Interface Converter HMI device Allen Bradley connector 1 connector 2 15 pin D Sub connector 9 pin D Sub female connector metal enclosure V 24 metal enclosure V 24 PS ee ee oe enclosure a Ka I i I l DCD D l l i l i l DSR D l l DTR lt l l lt RxD 3 TxD lt D TxD 4 RxD D GND 12 GND l l I lt cts 5 l l RTS lt l I l D RTS 10 CTS D K Keo N Shield with large area contact to housing at both ends Cable 5 x 0 14 mm2 shielded max length 15 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 111 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 4 Connecting cables for Allen Bradley 2 4 9 Connecting cable PP3 RS 232 for Allen Bradley PP3 connecting cable For interconnecting the HMI device RS 232 15 pin sub D AlC HMI device Allen Bradley AlC connector 1 connector 2 15 pin D Sub connector 8 pin mini DIN connector shift latch cable outlet to the rear cable outlet to the rear enclosure lt RxD TxD
102. 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 195 Communication with LG controllers 4 4 Commissioning components Interconnecting the PLC with the HMI device 1 Interconnect the PLC CPU or communication module with the HMI device using a suitable patch cable 2 The message Connection to PLC is established is output to the HMI device Note that users can edit the system alarm texts in WinCC flexible NOTICE Always observe the safety related information in the HMI device manual when commissioning the device RF radiation emitted from devices such as mobile phones may cause unwanted operating states WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 190 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with LG controllers 4 5 Connecting cables for LG GLOFA GM 4 5 Connecting cables for LG GLOFA GM 4 5 1 Connecting cable PP1 RS 232 for LG IMO Point to point cable 1 HMI device LG INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS IMO connector 1 connector 2 9 pin D Sub female connector 9 pin D Sub connector screw locking screw locking enclosure TxD RxD RxD TxD GND SG DTR DSR CD RTS CTS Shield with large area contact to casing at both ends Cable 3 x 0 14 mm2 shielded max length 15 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 195 Communication with LG controllers 4 5 Connecting cables for LG GLOFA GM 4 5 2 Connecting cable PP2
103. 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Modicon controllers 6 3 Communication via Modbus TCP IP protocol 6 3 4 Configuring protocol parameters Parameters to be set To edit the parameters double click Communication gt Connections in the project window of the HMI device Select Modicon MODBUS TCP IP from the Communications driver column in the work area You can now enter or modify the protocol parameters in the properties view Device specific parameters Interface Under Interface select the HMI interface with which the HMI device is connected to the network In this case set Ethernet For more detailed information refer to the Manual of the HMI device Type The protocol type IP is set as default Note The ISO protocol is not cleared with the current WinCC flexible version Note You hence need to configure the IP address and the subnet mask manually on the HMI device PLC specific parameters 262 CPU type Set to which Modicon PLC the HMI device is connected under CPU type You can choose between the following CPUs 984 Use this CPU type for the CPU 984 except for CPU 984A 984B and 984X Compact Quantum Momentum Premium Micro Server Under Server you set the IP address or host name for the PLC Port Under Port set the port that is to be used for the TCP IP connection The port used by the Modicon con
104. 29 Backup of the RAM file system has failed No backup copy of the RAM file system has been made Check the settings in the Control Panel gt OP dialog and save the RAM file system using the Save Files button in the Persistent Storage tab 70030 The parameters configured for the system function are faulty The connection to the new PLC was not established Compare the parameters configured for the system function with the parameters configured for the PLCs and correct them as necessary 70031 The PLC configured in the system function is not an S7 PLC The connection to the new PLC was not established Compare the S7 PLC name parameter configured for the system function with the parameters configured for the PLC and correct them as necessary 70032 The object configured with this number in the tab order is not available in the selected screen The screen changes but the focus is set to the first object Check the number of the tab order and correct it if necessary 70033 An e mail cannot be sent because a TCP IP connection to the SMTP server no longer exists This system alarm is generated only at the first attempt All subsequent unsuccessful attempts to send an e mail will no longer generate a system alarm The event is regenerated when an e mail has been successfully sent in the meantime The central e mail component in WinCC flexible Runtime attempts in regular intervals 1 minute to
105. 290072 290073 When editing record values a value was entered which exceeds the high limit of the recipe tag The entry is discarded An action e g saving a record failed due to an unknown error The error corresponds to the status alarm IDS_OUT_CMD_EXE_ERR in the large recipe view Enter a value within the limits of the recipe tag 290074 While saving it was detected that a record with the specified number already exists but under another name Overwrite the record change the record number or cancel the action 290075 A record with this name already exists The record is not saved Please select a different record name 290110 The default values could not be set due to an error 290111 The Recipes subsystem cannot be used Recipe views have no content and recipe specific functions will not be performed Possible causes e Anerror occurred while transferring the recipes e The recipe structure was changed in ES When the project was downloaded again the recipes were not transferred with it This means that the new configuration data is not being transferred to the old recipes on the device Transfer the project to the device again together with the recipes the corresponding check box in the Transfer dialog must be checked WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 373 Appendix 8 1 System alarms 30000
106. 317 E 79 baa pea Bia 379 Index Without synchronization 90 134 176 226 279 V Valid data type Allen Bradley Ethernet IP 69 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 380 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO
107. 6 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Appendix 8 1 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 230305 The authentication has failed because the Configure the correct password password is incorrect The attempt to connect failed 230306 Error in the connection to the remote server Check whether This may occur as a result of network problems e The bus cable is plugged in The attempt to connect failed e There are network problems 230307 The connection to the remote server was shut _ down because e The remote server was shut down or e The user instructed the server to close all connections The connection is closed 230308 This alarm provides information on the connection status An attempt is made to connect 240000 Authorization alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 240000 WinCC flexible Runtime is operating in demo Install the authorization mode You have no authorization or your authorization is corrupted 240001 WinCC flexible Runtime is operating in demo Load an adequate authorization powerpack mode Too many tags are configured for the installed version 240002 WinCC flexible Runtime is operating with a Restore the full authorization time limited emergency authorization 240004 Error while reading the emergency Restart WinCC flexible Runtime install the authorization authorization or repair the authorization
108. 6 6 4 3 8 Data mailbox area pointer cccccecececeeeeceeeceeeaececeeeeceeaaeceeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeesencaeeeeeeseeseneeesesnaeess 6 4 4 Events alarms and acknowledgment ce eceeceeeeeeeeeneceeeeeeeseaeaeeeeeeesecasaeeeeeeeeeeeaees 8 6 4 4 1 General information on operational messages alarm messages and acknowledgments 286 6 4 4 2 Step 1 Creating tags OF an ANAY eee cee eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeesesaaeeesesaeeeseeaeeeeenaeeeeeeesenaes 28 6 4 4 3 Step 2 Configuring an alarm 0 2 eee eee eeeee eee ee eneeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeesesaeeeseeaaeeeseaeeeseeaeeeessaeeeaeeeseeaes 288 6 4 4 4 Step 3 Configuring the acknowledgment eee cee eee eeeeeeeeeceeaeeeeeeaeeeseeaaeeeeteaeeeseenaeeeeniaeeeess 6 5 Connecting cables for Modicon MODUS ccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeetaeeeeeeaeeeetiaeeeeetneeeeeed 6 5 1 Communication cables for Modbus RTU protocol ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeseneeeesnaeeeeee 6 5 1 1 Connecting cable 6XV1440 1K RS 232 for Modicon ccccceeeeeceeceeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeteesnaeeeeess 292 6 5 1 2 Connecting cable PP1 RS 232 for Modicon cccceceeeececeeeeeeeeeeaeceeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeteesiaeeeeess j 6 5 1 3 Connecting cable PP2 RS 232 for Modicon cccceeeeeeececeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeseeecaaeeeeeeeeeennnaeeeeess 294 6 5 1 4 Connecting cable PP3 RS 232 for Modicon cccceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeceeeesesecnaeeeeeeeeeenseaeeeees
109. 8 Communication Part 2 96 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 3 User data areas 2 3 4 Events alarms and acknowledgments 2 3 4 1 General information on events alarms and acknowledgments Function Messages return information about the PLC or HMI device operating states or problems to the user on the HMI device The message texts consist of configurable texts and or tags with actual values Operational messages and events must be distinguished The programmer defines what is an operational message and what is an error alarm Operational message An operational message indicates a state Example e Motor on e PLC in manual mode Alarm message An error alarm indicates a malfunction Example e Valve does not open e Excess motor temperature Alarms indicate exceptional operational states and must therefore be acknowledged Acknowledgment To acknowledge error alarms e Operator input on the HMI device e The PLC sets an acknowledgment bit Triggering alarms Triggering of an alarm in the PLC e Setting a tag bit e Measured value limits exceeded The location of tags or of the tag array is defined in WinCC flexible ES The tag or array must be set up on the PLC WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 97 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 3 User data areas 2 3 4 2 Step 1 Creating tags or an array Pro
110. 85 GE Fanuc LG GLOFA GM 161 Mitsubishi PG 202 Mitsubishi protocol 4 Modicon 257 Omron Hostlink Multilink Pin assignment 6XV1440 2L 1 6XV1440 2P for Mitsubishi PG protocol 240 6XV1440 2R for Mitsubishi PG protocol 241 6XV1440 2UE32 for Mitsubishi PG protocol 239 6XV1440 1K 292 6XV1440 2K 104 6XV1440 2V 107 6XV1440 2X___ 331 Allen Bradley cable 1747 CP3 1 Allen Bradley cable 1761 CBL PMO2 1 Allen Bradley cable 1784 CP10 1 Connecting cable PP5 with RJ 45 connector Connecting cable PP6 with RJ 45 connector 154 MP1 connecting cable WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Index MP1 for Mitsubishi protocol 4 247 MP2 for Mitsubishi Tii 4 248 Multipoint cable 1 195 Multipoint cable 1 MP TP PC 3 Multipoint cable 2 Multipoint cable 2 RS422 MP TP PC Multipoint cable MP1 154 Multipoint cable MP8 156 Point to point cable 1 191 Point to point cable 2 192 Point to point cable 3 Point to point cable 4 Point to point cable PP1 for Omron 332 Point to point cable PP2 for Omron 333 PP1 connecting cable PP1 for adapter HE693SNP232A 149 PP1 for Mitsubishi protocol 4 242 PP2 connecting cable 150 PP2 for Allen Bradley 111 PP4 for Mitsubishi protocol 4 PP5 for Mitsubishi protocol 4 PLC GE Fanuc 118 PLC job Transferring data 94 138 180 230 283 320 PLC specific parameters Allen Bradley Ethernet IP PLC dependent paramet
111. A01 3AB0 Appendix 8 1 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 140013 The MPI cable is disconnected and thus there is Check the connections no power supply 140014 The configured bus address is in already in use by Edit the HMI device address in the PLC configuration another application 140015 Wrong transmission rate Correct the relevant parameters Or Faulty bus parameters e g HSA Or OP address gt HSA or Wrong interrupt vector interrupt does not arrive at the driver 140016 The hardware does not support the configured Change the interrupt number interrupt 140017 The set interrupt is in use by another driver Change the interrupt number 140018 The consistency check was disabled by Enable the consistency check with SIMOTION Scout SIMOTION Scout Only a corresponding note and once again download the project to the PLC appears 140019 SIMOTION Scout is downloading a new project to Wait until the end of the reconfiguration the PLC Connection to the PLC is canceled 140020 The version in the PLC and that of the project The following remedies are available FWX file do not match Connection to the PLC is canceled Download the current version to the PLC using SIMOTION Scout Regenerate the project using WinCC flexible ES close WinCC flexible Runtime and restart with a new configuration 150000 Connection alarms chnAS511 Connection Number Effect ca
112. A01 3ABO 295 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 3 Communication via protocol 4 5 3 6 Optimizing the configuration Acquisition cycle and update time Discrete alarms Screens Trends Job mailboxes 212 The acquisition cycles for the Area pointers and the acquisition cycles of the tags specified in the configuration software are decisive factors for the actual update times that can be achieved The update time is the sum of the acquisition cycle transmission time processing time To achieve optimum update times remember the following points during configuration e Keep the individual data areas as small as possible and as large as necessary e Define data areas that belong together as belonging together You can improve the update time by setting up one large data area instead of several small areas e If the acquisition cycles you select are too short this is detrimental to the overall performance Set the acquisition cycle to suit the rate of change of the process values The rate of temperature changes at a furnace for example is significantly slower compared to the speed rate of an electrical drive As a general guideline the acquisition cycle should be approx 1 second e Put the tags of an alarm or a screen in one data area without gaps e To allow changes in the PLC to be recognized reliably these must be available at least during the actual acquisition cycle e Set the transmission rate to
113. C flexible Describes how to migrate ProTool projects with an HMI migration from OP3 to OP 73 or OP 73 micro Describes how to migrate ProTool projects with an HMI migration from OP7 to OP 77B or OP 77A Describes how to migrate ProTool projects with an HMI migration from OP17 to OP 177B describes how to migrate ProTool projects with HMI migration from RMOS graphic devices to Windows CE devices Communication Communication Part 1 describes the connection of the HMI device to SIMATIC PLCs Communication Part 2 describes the connection of the HMI device to third party PLCs Operating Instructions Operating instructions for SIMATIC HMI devices OP 73 OP 77A OP 77B TP 170micro TP 170A TP 170B OP 170B OP 73micro TP 177micro TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B TP 270 OP 270 MP 270B MP 370 Operating instructions for mobile SIMATIC HMI devices Mobile Panel 170 Operating instructions compact for SIMATIC HMI devices OP77B Mobile Panel 170 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Preface Guide Getting Started e WinCC flexible for first time users Based on a sample project this is a step by step introduction to the basics of configuring screens alarms and recipes and screen navigation e WinCC flexible for advanced users Based on a sample project this is a step by step introduction to the basic
114. C tags whose update ID matches the value transferred in Parameter 1 Function corresponds to the UpdateTag system function Parameter 1 1 100 49 Clear process alarm buffer Parameter 1 2 3 50 Clear alarm buffer Parameter 1 2 3 51 Screen selection Parameter 1 Screen number Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Field number 69 Read data record from PLC Parameter 1 Recipe number 1 999 Parameter 2 Data record number 1 65535 Parameter 3 0 Do not overwrite existing data record 1 Overwrite existing data record 70 Write data record to PLC Parameter 1 Recipe number 1 999 Parameter 2 Data record number 1 65535 Parameter 3 1 OP 73 OP 77A and TP 177A HMI devices also execute the Screen selection job mailbox if the on screen keyboard is active WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 315 Communication with Omron controllers 7 3 User data areas 7 3 3 8 Data mailbox area pointer Data mailbox area pointer Function When data records are transferred between the HMI device and PLC both partners access common communications areas on the PLC Data transfer types There are two ways of transferring data records between the HMI device and PLC e Transfer without synchronization e Transfer with synchronization over the data record Data records are alw
115. CC flexible Runtime The Control Panel is used to configure the port for connections over DH485 in the PC operating system e Set automatic activation of the DH485 driver at the start of Windows XP e Open the Status tab to check the driver version and status The SIMATIC HMI DH485 Control Panel is available in the Windows Control Panel WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 60 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 2 Contiguring the Allen Bradley communication driver Using DH485 on a Windows Vista computer Install the DH485 protocol driver to enable DH485 coupling on a Windows Vista computer 1 Open the Explorer 2 Select Properties in the shortcut menu of Computer Note You must be logged on with administrator privileges to carry out all further actions 3 Click on Device Manager 4 Use to expand the Ports COM amp LPT category on the left pane 5 Click on Update driver software in the shortcut menu of Communications Port COM 1 A new dialog box opens 6 Answer the question with Search for driver software on the computer 7 Select Select from a list of device drivers on the computer 8 Click on Data volume enter the path C Program Files Common Files Siemens FWDH485 and then confirm your entries 9 Select the DH485 inf file 10 Click Next 11 Confirm the next prompt to install the driver 2 2 2 3 Configurin
116. DB RDA TDB TDA 1 Inrush current max 0 8 A Cables 5 x 0 14 mm2 shielded max length 500 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 334 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Omron controllers 7 5 Connecting cables for Omron Hostlink Multilink 7 5 5 Connecting cable MP2 RS 422 for Omron Multipoint cable 2 RS422 MP TP PC gt SPS_ HMI device Omron 9 pin D Sub connector 9 pin D Sub connector or 6 pin screw terminal RDB RDA TDB TDA TxD TxD RxD RxD RDB RDA TDB TDA My my RDB RDA TDB TDA IA mu aM RDB RDA TDB TDA Cables 5 x 0 14 mm2 shielded max length 500 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 335 Communication with Omron controllers 7 5 Connecting cables for Omron Hostlink Multilink WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 336 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Appendix 8 1 System alarms Introduction System alarms on the HMI device provide information about internal states of the HMI device and PLC The following overview shows the causes of system alarms and how to eliminate the cause of error Some of the system alarms described in this section are relevant to individual HMI devices based on their range of features Note System alarms are only indicated if an alarm window was configured System alarms are output in the language currently set on your HMI dev
117. E AE a AE ERE BEA RARE rene 325 7 3 4 4 Step 3 Configure the acknowledgment 0 0 0 ee cee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeseeeeeeseeaeeeeeeaeeneeees 3 7 4 COMMISSIONING compone asese aa vied can A SS ES A k 7 4 1 Commissioning COMPONENES cece eeeee ee eee eette ee ee ene teeta ee setae eee eaeee ee taee ee eeeeeeeaeeeee ented 7 5 Connecting cables for Omron Hostlink MUItilink 2 0 c eee eeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeenaeeeeseaas 7 5 1 Connecting cable 6XV1440 2X RS 232 for OMrOn ccccceeeeeeeeecceeeeeeesenneaeeeeeeeeensnaeeeeees k 7 5 2 Connecting cable PP1 RS 232 for OMION ccccccceceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeccaeaeeeeeeseesenaneeeess K 7 5 3 Connecting cable PP2 RS 422 for OMION ccccccceceeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeesecacaeeeeeesecsenaeeeeess i 7 5 4 Connecting cable MP1 RS 232 over converter for OMON 2 cccceceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeteeneeeees i 7 5 5 Connecting cable MP2 RS 422 for OMON ccccccceeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeseceaeaeeeeeeeecsncaeeeeess 8 APPNO isi ii E en E AA E eae eeeusunesus cesecrateandes cage 8 1 SYSTSM alame eaa a a A ade et aheae taeda rakes 8 2 ADDIGVIALIONS icicscetivecite el adie A dui nih add a ivi ene ees 8 3 GIOSSANY seusis vere usd ceca shlveda EE eahdeataas etd sd databace de lee ee ne INdOX sis si eters dn nti nn ee E in eee WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 14 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO W
118. FXO or SC 08 FX to be connected HMI device Mitsubishi connector 1 connector 2 15 pin D Sub connector 9 pin D Sub connector shift latch Distance bolt cable outlet for pin 1 cable outlet to the rear enclosure RxD TxD GND RTS CTS YQ YA YQ Ya Shield with large area contact to casing at both ends Cable 5 x 0 14 mm2 shielded length 32 cm WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 5 Connecting cables for Mitsubishi 5 5 1 2 Connecting cable 6XV1440 2P RS 422 for Mitsubishi 6XV1440 2P HMI device Mitsubishi connector 1 connector 2 9 pin D Sub connector 8 pin mini DIN connector screw locking screw locking cable outlet to the rear cable outlet to the rear enclosure TxD RxD TxD RxD GND GND RxD TxD RxD TxD Shield with large area contact to casing at both ends Cable 3 x 2 x 0 14 mm2 shielded max length 500 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 240 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 5 Connecting cables for Mitsubishi 5 5 1 3 Connecting cable 6XV1440 2R RS 422 for Mitsubishi 6XV1440 2R HMI device Mitsubishi connector 1 connector 2 9 pin D Sub connector 25 pin D Sub connector screw locking screw locking enclosure TxD RxD TxD RxD GND GND 5V RxD TxD RxD TxD DSR DSR Shield with large area contact
119. GE Fanuc controllers 3 2 Configuring the communication driver for GE Fanuc 3 2 2 Installing the communication driver Driver for the HMI device The driver for connection to GE Fanuc controllers is supplied with WinCC flexible and is installed automatically No special blocks are required on the PLC for the connection 3 2 3 Configuring the controller type and protocol Select the PLC For a connection to a GE Fanuc PLC over SNP double click on Communication gt Connections in the project view of the HMI device Go to the Communication drivers column and select the protocol GE Fanuc SNP The property view displays the parameters of the selected protocol You can edit the parameters at any time by double clicking Communication gt Connections in the project view of the HMI device Select the connection and edit its parameters in the properties dialog box Note The settings on the HMI device and on the PLC must match 3 2 4 Configuring protocol parameters Parameters to be set 118 To edit the parameters double click Communication gt Connections in the project window of the HMI device In the work area of the HMI device GE Fanuc SNP is selected in the Communication drivers column You can now enter or modify the protocol parameters in the Properties window WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 2 Configu
120. HMI device to trigger corresponding actions on the HMI device These functions include for example e Display screen e Set date and time WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 87 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 3 User data areas Data structure The first word of the job mailbox contains the job number Depending on the job mailbox up to three parameters can be transferred Word Left byte Right byte n 0 0 Job number n 1 Parameter 1 n 2 Parameter 2 n 3 Parameter 3 The HMI device evaluates the job mailbox if the first word of this job is unequal to zero This means that the parameters must be entered in the job mailbox first followed by the job number When the HMI device accepts the job mailbox the first word is set to 0 again The execution of the job mailbox is generally not completed at this point in time Job mailboxes All job mailboxes and their parameters are listed below The No column contains the job number of the job mailbox Job mailboxes can only be triggered by the PLC when the HMI device is online Note Please note that not all HMI devices support job mailboxes TP 170A and Micro Panel do not support PLC jobs for example No Function 14 Setting the time BCD coded Parameter 1 Left byte Right byte hours 0 23 Parameter 2 Left byte minutes 0 59 Rig
121. Hostlink Muttilink 7 2 5 Permitted data types Omron Permitted data types The table lists the user data types that can be used when configuring tags and area pointers Name Range Data type Status CPU status BIN Input output words 1 0 BIN DEC DEC Memory words HR BIN 1 DEC DEC LDC LDC IEEE ASCII Auxiliary memory words AR BIN DEC DEC LDC LDC ASCII Link memory words LR BIN 1 DEC DEC LDC LDC ASCII Data memory words DM BIN 1 DEC DEC LDC LDC IEEE ASCII Timer counter status T C BIN BIN Timer counter actual values T C VAL DEC DEC PLC type CPU type BYTE 1 In the case of write accesses note With the BIN data type in the I O HR AR LR and DM areas after changing the specified bit the entire word is written back to the PLC There is no check to determine whether any other bits in the word have changed As a result the PLC only has read access to the specified word Note All data areas on the OMRON PLC can only be read or written reliably in the STOP or MONITOR modes I O indicates either the IR SR or the CIO area depending on the PLC series The LR HR and AR areas are not available in all the PLC series WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 301 Communication with Omron controllers 7 2 Contigurin
122. I devices ready to communicate state The Coordination area pointer has a length of two words Note The HMI device always writes the entire coordination area when updating the area pointer The control program may not make changes to the coordination area for this reason Assignment of bits in the Coordination area pointer Startup bit Operating mode Life bit 222 high order byte low order byte 15 8 7 2 4 0 1st word 2st word not assigned T E A EEEE L Startup bit Operation mode reserved fone a Life bit x assigned The startup bit is set briefly to 0 by the HMI device during startup It sets the bit permanently to 1 when startup is completed The operating mode bit is set to 1 as soon as the user switches the HMI device offline The state of the operating mode bit is 0 during normal operation of the HMI device You can determine the current operating mode of the HMI device by reading this bit The HMI device inverts the life bit at intervals of approximately one second You can check whether or not the connection to the HMI device is still up by querying this bit in the control program WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 4 User data areas 5 4 3 6 User version area pointer Function You can check whether the HMI device is connected to the correct PLC at the start of runtime This check is
123. IC HMI HTTP Protocol Ethernet Ethernet OPC Ethernet Ethernet Allen Bradley DF1 COM1 to COM4 1 COM1 through COM4 depending on arrangement Allen Bradley DH 485 COM1 to COM4 1 COM1 through COM4 depending on arrangement Allen Bradley Ethernet IP Ethernet Ethernet GE Fanuc COM1 to COM4 10 COM1 through COM4 depending on arrangement LG GLOFA GM COM1 to COM4 10 COM1 through COM4 depending on arrangement Mitsubishi FX COM1 to COM4 10 COM1 through COM4 depending on arrangement Mitsubishi P4 COM1 to COM4 10 COM1 through COM4 depending on arrangement Modicon Modbus RTU COM1 to COM4 1 COM1 through COM4 depending on arrangement Modicon Modbus TCP IP Ethernet Ethernet Omron COM1 to COM4 1 COM1 through COM4 depending on arrangement Telemecanique 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 not supported only with SIMATIC S7 200 only MP 270B only with RS 232 TTY adapter 6ES5 734 1BD20 option Depends on which connection box is used only with converter RS 422 RS 232 6AV6 671 8XE00 0AX0 option not cleared for TP 177B DP OP 177B DP WinCC flexible Runtime must be installed on the devices For a series communication in the menu File gt Transfer gt Options clear Remote Control from Channel 1 Only with PLC5 and KF2 module COM2 is locked for PC 477 Direct communication with PLC5 or KF2 module otherwise approved only with converter RS422 RS232 6AV6 671 8XE00 0AX0 op
124. IF1B IF2 8 IF1A IF1B IF2 8 IF1A IF1B 9 12 IF2 8 Ethernet IF1A IF1B IF2 8 IF1B TP 277 OP 277 Ethernet 6 IF1B IF1B IF1B Ethernet IF1B 8 11 IF1B 8 Ethernet IF1B 8 IF1B 8 IF1B 8 IF1B 8 IF1B 58 Ethernet IF1B 8 IF1B 8 33 Working with connections 1 5 Device based dependency Multi Panels SIMATIC S7 PPI SIMATIC S7 MPI SIMATIC S7 PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC S7 PROFINET SIMATIC S5 AS511 SIMATIC S5 PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC 500 505 NITP SIMATIC 500 505 PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC HMI HTTP Protocol OPC Allen Bradley DF 1 Allen Bradley DH 485 Allen Bradley Ethernet IP GE Fanuc LG GLOFA GM Mitsubishi FX Mitsubishi P4 Modicon Modbus RTU Modicon Modbus TCP IP Omron Telemecanique WinCC flexible Runtime SIMATIC S7 PPI SIMATIC S7 MPI MP 177 IF1B IF1B IF1B Ethernet IF1B IF1B IF1B Ethernet IF1B 8 1 IF1B 8 Ethernet IF1B IF 1B 8 IF1B 8 IF1B IF1B 5 8 Ethernet IF1B 8 IF1B SIMATIC S7 PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC S7 PROFINET SIMATIC S5 AS511 SIMATIC S5 PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC 500 505 NITP 34 MP 270B IF1B IF1B IF1B Ethernet IF1A IF2 IF1B IF1A IF1B IF2 IF1B Ethernet OPC IF1A IF1B 9 IF2 8 IF1A IF1B IF2 8 Ethernet IF1A IF1B IF2 IF1A IF1B IF2 8 IF1A IF1B IF2 8 IF1A IF1B IF2 8 IF1A IF1B 12
125. IF2 8 Ethernet IF1A IF1B IF2 8 IF1B MP 277 IF1B IF1B IF1B Ethernet IF1B IF1B IF1B Ethernet OPC IF1B 8 1 IF1B 8 Ethernet IF1B 8 IF1B 8 IF1B 8 IF1B 8 IF1B 5 8 Ethernet IF1B 8 IF1B 8 WinCC flexible Runtime on Panel PC MPI PROFIBUS DP MPI PROFIBUS DP MPI PROFIBUS DP Ethernet COM1 to COM4 10 MPI PROFIBUS DP COM1 to COM4 10 MP 370 IF1B IF1B IF1B Ethernet IF 1A IF2 IF1B IF 1A IF 1B IF2 IF1B Ethernet OPC IF1A IF1B 9 IF2 8 IF1A IF 1B IF2 8 Ethernet IF1A IF 1B IF2 IF 1A IF 1B IF2 8 IF 1A IF 1B IF2 8 IF1A IF 1B IF2 IF1A IF1B 12 IF2 8 Ethernet IF 1A IF 1B IF2 8 IF1B MP 377 IF1B IF1B IF1B Ethernet IF1B IF1B IF1B Ethernet OPC IF1B 811 IF1B 8 Ethernet IF1B 8 IF1B 8 IF1B 8 IF1B 8 IF1B 5 8 Ethernet IF1B 8 IF1B 8 WinCC flexible Runtime on PC PROFIBUS DP card e g CP5611 PROFIBUS DP card e g CP5611 PROFIBUS DP card e g CP5611 Ethernet COM1 through COM4 depending on arrangement PROFIBUS DP card e g CP5611 COM1 through COM4 depending on arrangement WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Working with connections 1 5 Device based dependency WinCC flexible Runtime on Panel PC WinCC flexible Runtime on PC SIMATIC 500 505 MPI PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS DP card e g CP5611 PROFIBUS DP SIMAT
126. MI device can process the next job mailbox The next job mailbox will only be accepted when there is computing capacity available WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 2 Communication via PG protocol 5 2 7 Commissioning components Transferring the PLC program to the PLC 1 Interconnect the PC with the CPU using the appropriate cable 2 Download the program files to the CPU 3 Then set the CPU to RUN Transferring project data to the HMI device 1 The HMI device must be in transfer mode in order to accept the project transfer Possible scenarios Initial startup The HMI device does not yet contain any configuration data in the initial startup phase The project data and runtime software required for operation must be transferred from the configuration computer to the device The HMI device automatically changes to transfer mode The transfer dialog box opens with a connection message on the HMI device Recommissioning Recommissioning means that you overwrite existing project data on the HMI device For corresponding detailed instructions refer to the HMI device manual 2 Check whether the alarm settings meet requirements of your WinCC flexible project 3 Select Project gt Transfer gt Transfer settings to configure the transfer parameters before you transfer project data to the HMI device Select the used port
127. MI device is reading Buffer 2 This prevents the PLC from overwriting trend values while the trend is being read on the HMI device 2 3 2 LED mapping Function The function keys of the keyboard units of the Operator Panel OP Multi Panel MP and Panel PC are equipped with LEDs These LEDs can be controlled by the PLC This functionality can be used to activate an LED in order to tell the operator which key to press in a specific situation for example Requirements In order to enable control of an LED you must set up an LED tag or array tag in the PLC and declare this as the LED tag in the configuration data LED assignment Assign the LEDs to the LED tag bits when you configure the function keys Define the LED tag and the corresponding bit for each function key in the General group of the properties view The bit number bit identifies the first of two consecutive bits that control the following LED states LED function A all Mobile Panels Operator Panels Bit n 1 Bit n and Multi Panels Panel PCs 0 0 Off Off 0 1 Rapid flashing Flashing 1 0 Slow flashing Flashing 1 1 Permanent signal Permanent signal WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 80 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 3 User data areas 2 3 3 Area pointer 2 3 3 1 General information on area pointers Allen Bradley Introduction Area pointers are p
128. Note The PLC may only evaluate the recipe and data record numbers when data inconsistency is detected if one of the conditions outlined below has been met e The data mailbox status is set to Transfer completed e The data mailbox status is set to Transfer completed with error WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 3 User data areas Reaction to an aborted transfer due to errors If the transfer of data records is aborted due to errors the HMI device reacts as follows e Triggering by the operator in the recipe display Information in the status bar of the recipe view and output of system alarms e Triggered by function Output of system alarms e Triggering by PLC job No feedback message on the HMI device You can nonetheless evaluate the status of the transfer by querying the status word in the data record Sequence of the transfer when triggered by a configured function Reading from the PLC using a configured function Step Action 1 Check Status word 0 Yes No 2 The HMI device enters the recipe and data record number Abort with system specified in the function and the status Transfer active in the alarm data record 3 The HMI device reads the values from the PLC and stores them in the data record specified in the function 4 e If Yes was selected for the Overwrite function an existing data record is o
129. S 232 for GE Fanuc c ccccceceeeeeneeeeeeeeeesesneaeeeeeeesesenieeeeeeeeteees 3 5 6 Connecting cable PP6 RS 232 for GE Fanuc ccccceceeeeeeneaeeeeeeesesneaeeeeeeeseseneeeeeeeeneees 3 5 7 Connection cable MP1 RS 422 for GE Fanuc cccccecccccececeeaeeesececeeeeeeeeaeeaseeseeeeeeeeeanaaaees 3 5 8 Connection cable MP2 RS 422 for GE Fanuc ceccecececececeeaeeeseceeeeeeeeeeaueaseeseeeeeeeeeaneaeees 4 Communication with LG Controllers ccccccceeeeeece cee eeeeeeeeecaeee eee aaeeeesgaeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeesesaee caeeeeenees 4 1 Communication with LG GLOFA GM ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeecceeeeeeeseeaeaeeeeeeeseanaaeseeeeesesenneeeeeeeteeea 157 4 1 1 Communication partner LG GLOFA ccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeceaeaeeeseesenacaeeeeeeeesenaeeeeeeeeeeea 157 4 1 2 Communication between HMI device and controller LG GLOFA 4 2 Configuring the LG GLOFA GM communication driver 4 2 1 Requirements of COMMUNICATION i us ninaninata a aaan a aa a A a a aaa 4 2 2 Installing the communication CLIVEF cecccceec cee ceeecteeeeeeeeeeceecseeeeecaeeseeneeneetseeeeeesneneieaeeaeel 159 4 2 3 Configuring the controller type ANd protocol ee eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeseeeeeeeetaeeeeenaeeeees 4 2 4 Configuring protocol parameters sessies aa EA 160 4 2 5 Permitted data types LG GLOFA 2 ccccccceeeeeceeeeeeeceaeeeceeeeceeeseeeeeceeeesaeeesaeseaeeseeeeesei
130. SIEMENS SIMATIC HMI WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual This user manual is part of the documentation package with the order number 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 07 2008 A5E01067260 02 5 T D D O o orking with connections ommunication with Allen Bradley controllers N ommunication with E Fanuc controllers Q ommunication with A Q Q fe 5 gt o 7 ommunication with Mitsubishi controllers O1 ommunication with Modicon controllers O ommunication with Omron controllers 5 O e gt Q x lt 0 Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety as well as to prevent damage to property The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken CAUTION with a safety alert symbol indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken CAUTION without a safety alert symbol indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken
131. Set the transfer parameters Select the target storage location 4 Initiate the transfer of project data by clicking Transfer The project is compiled automatically All compilation and transfer steps are logged to a message window Message output on the configuration computer on successful completion of the transfer Transfer completed successfully The start screen appears on the HMI device WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 3 Communication via protocol 4 Interconnecting the PLC with the HMI device 1 Interconnect the PLC with the HMI device using a suitable cable 2 The message Connection to PLC is established is output to the HMI device Note that users can edit the system alarm texts in WinCC flexible NOTICE Always observe the safety related information in the HMI device Manual when commissioning the device RF radiation emitted from devices such as mobile phones may cause unwanted operating states 5 3 Communication via protocol 4 5 3 1 Requirements of communication Connector The HMI device must be connected to one or more PLCs of the FX series over the multifunction serial interface with a RS 232 or RS 422 communications module for example FX2N 232 BD or to PLCs of the series A AnN AnA AnU AnS Q and QnA QnAS over interface modules for example A1SJ71UC24 R2 R4 AnS
132. System e Edit text Enter the text to display in runtime You can format the text characters The text may contain fields for the output of tags The text is output to the alarm view if this view was configured in the Screens editor e Specify number Every alarm has a number that must be unique within the project It is used to uniquely identify the alarm and is indicated with the alarm in runtime The permitted values are between 1 and 100 000 The WinCC flexible engineering system assigns consecutive numbers You can change the alarm numbers when assigning these to groups for example e Specify the alarm class Possible alarm classes are Fault alarms This class must be acknowledged Operation alarms This class signals events with incoming and outgoing alarms WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 143 Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 3 User data areas e Assign trigger tag In the Trigger tag column you link the configured alarm with the tag created in step 1 The selection list returns all tags with valid data type e Specify the bit number In the bit number column you specify the relevant bit position in the created tag Remember that the way the bit positions are counted depends on the particular PLC With GE Fanuc controllers the bit positions are counted as follows How the bit positions are counted Left byte Right byte in GE Fan
133. Telemecanique Protocol PLC series TSX 7 with P47 411 TSX 7 with P47 67 87 107 420 TSX 7 with P47 67 87 107 425 module TSX SCM 21 6 with the specified TSX 7 CPUs TSX 17 with module SCG 1161 TSX 37 Micro TSX 57 Premium e Uni Telway 1 Not possible when connected to S7 212 2 Applies to controllers SLC503 SLC504 SLC505 PLC5 MicroLogix 3 Applies to controllers SLC504 PLC5 over DF1 4 Applies to controllers SLC500 to SLC 505 and MicroLogix 1 5 Device based dependency 1 5 1 Device dependency of the protocols Availability of the communication protocols Communication between the HMI and the PLC is controlled using a network specific protocol The following tables show the availability of the communication protocols on the HMI devices Overview Micro Panels SIMATIC S7 PPI SIMATIC S7 MPI SIMATIC S7 PROFIBUS DP 1 SIMATIC S7 PROFINET SIMATIC S5 AS511 SIMATIC S5 PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC 500 505 NITP SIMATIC 500 505 PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC HMI HTTP Protocol OPC SIMOTION 24 OP 73micro Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No TP 170micro Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No TP 177micro Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Working with connections Allen Bradley DF 1 Allen Bradley DH 485 Allen Bradley Ethernet IP GE Fan
134. The HMI device reads the values from the PLC and displays them in the recipe display If the recipes have synchronized tags the values from the PLC are also written to the tags The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed 5 The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers Writing to the PLC started by the operator in the recipe display Step Action Check Status word 0 1 Yes No The HMI device enters the recipe and data record number to be Abort with system written and the status Transfer active in the data record alarm 2 The HMI device writes the current values to the PLC If the recipes have synchronized tags the changed values are synchronized between the recipe display and tags and then written to the PLC 3 The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed If required the control program can now evaluate the transferred data 5 The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers Note The status word may only be set by the HMI device The PLC may only reset the status word to zero Note The PLC may only evaluate the recipe and data record numbers when data inconsistency is detected if one of the conditions outlined below has been met e The data mailbox status is set to Transfer completed e The data mailbox status is set to Transfer completed wi
135. The PLC can use the job mailbox to transfer jobs to the HMI device to trigger corresponding actions on the HMI device These functions include for example e Display screen e Set date and time WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 313 Communication with Omron controllers 7 3 User data areas Data structure The first word of the job mailbox contains the job number Depending on the job mailbox up to three parameters can be transferred Word Left byte Right byte n 0 0 Job number n 1 Parameter 1 n 2 Parameter 2 n 3 Parameter 3 The HMI device evaluates the job mailbox if the first word of this job is unequal to zero This means that the parameters must be entered in the job mailbox first followed by the job number When the HMI device accepts the job mailbox the first word is set to 0 again The execution of the job mailbox is generally not completed at this point in time Job mailboxes All job mailboxes and their parameters are listed below The No column contains the job number of the job mailbox Job device is online mailboxes can only be triggered by the PLC when the HMI Note Please note that not all HMI devices support job mailboxes TP 170A and Micro Panel do not support PLC jobs for example No Function 14 Parameter 1 Setting the time BCD coded Left byte Right byte hours 0 23 Parameter 2 L
136. The PLC job is structured as follows Left byte LB Right byte RB Word 1 0 70 Word 2 Recipe number 1 999 Word 3 Data record number 1 to 65535 Word 4 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 138 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 3 User data areas Sequence when reading from the PLC with PLC job PLC gt DAT no 69 Step Action 1 Check Status word 0 Yes No 2 The HMI device enters the recipe and data record number specified in Abort without the job and the status Transfer active in the data record return message 3 The HMI device reads the values from the PLC and saves these to the data record defined in the PLC job 4 e If Overwrite was selected in the job an existing data record is overwritten without any prompt for confirmation The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed e If Do not overwrite was selected in the job and the data record already exists the HMI device aborts the job and enters 0000 1100 in the status word of the data record 5 The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers Sequence of writing to the PLC using PLC job DAT gt PLC no 70 Step Action 1 Check Status word 0 Yes No 2 The HMI device enters the recipe and data record number specified in Abort without the job and the status Transfer act
137. User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Modicon controllers 6 7 Communication with Modicon Modbus Communication with Modicon controllers 6 6 1 Communication with Modicon Modbus 6 1 1 Communication partner Modicon Modbus Introduction This section describes the communication between HMI devices and Schneider automation Modicon controllers These PLCs communicate by means of the following PLC specific protocols e Modbus RTU e Modbus TCP IP Connectable controllers Connections can be realized for the following Modicon controllers Modicon PLC Supported protocol Modbus RTU Modbus TCP IP Modicon 984 J s 1 TSX Compact J v TSX Quantum J J Momentum E J Premium J Micro J 1 Only via Ethernet TCP IP Modbus Plus Bridge WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Modicon controllers 6 7 Communication with Modicon Modbus Cleared methods of communication with Modbus RTU The following types of communication have been system tested and approved 250 Point to point connection only via the RS 232 port Multipoint connection from an HMI device Modbus master with up to 4 controllers The HMI device must be connected with a Modbus Plus Bridge or a Modicon 984 CPU or TSX Quantum CPU that is configured as a Modbus Plus Bridge Connect the other PLCs via the Modbus plus connection to the first PLC The PLCs can be reached unde
138. Yes 9 Ethernet IP GE Fanuc Yes 9 Yes Yes 9 Yes Yes 79 LG GLOFA GM Yes 7 9 Yes Yes 7 9 Yes Yes 7 9 Mitsubishi FX Yes 79 Yes Yes 9 Yes Yes 79 Mitsubishi P4 Yes 7 9 Yes Yes 7 9 Yes Yes 7 9 Modicon Yes 5 7 9 Yes Yes 5 7 9 Yes Yes 5 7 9 Modbus RTU Modicon Yes 19 Yes Yes 9 Yes Yes 7 9 Modbus TCP IP Omron Yes 9 Yes Yes 9 Yes Yes 79 Telemecanique Yes 7 9 Yes Yes 7 9 Yes Yes 7 9 WinCC flexible Runtime WinCC flexible Runtime SIMATIC S7 PPI 1 Yes SIMATIC S7 MPI Yes SIMATIC S7 PROFIBUS DP Yes SIMATIC S7 PROFINET Yes SIMATIC S5 AS511 Yes SIMATIC S5 PROFIBUS DP Yes SIMATIC 500 505 NITP Yes SIMATIC 500 505 Yes PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC HMI HTTP Protocol Yes OPC Yes SIMOTION Yes WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 28 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Working with connections 1 5 Device based dependency WinCC flexible Runtime Allen Bradley DF 1 Allen Bradley DH 485 Allen Bradley Ethernet IP GE Fanuc LG GLOFA GM Mitsubishi FX Mitsubishi P4 Modicon Modbus RTU Modicon Modbus TCP IP Omron Telemecanique 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 5 2 Introduction Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No only with SIMATIC S7 200 only MP 270B only with RS 232 TTY adapter 6ES5 734 1BD20 option Depends on which connection box is used only with converter RS 422 RS 232 6AV6 671 8XE00 0AX0 option Applies o
139. a must not be modified by the PLC program until the trend group bit has been reset Trend transfer area 2 Trend transfer area 2 is required for trends configured with a switch buffer The trend transfer areas 1 and 2 have a similar structure Switch buffers The switch buffer is a second buffer for the same trend that can be set up during configuration While the HMI device reads the values from buffer 1 the PLC writes to buffer 2 If the HMI device is reading buffer 2 the PLC writes to buffer 1 This prevents the trend values being overwritten by the PLC while the trend is being read out by the HMI device WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 268 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Modicon controllers 6 4 User data areas 6 4 2 LED mapping Function The function keys of the keyboard units of the Operator Panel OP Multi Panel MP and Panel PC are equipped with LEDs These LEDs can be controlled by the PLC This functionality can be used to activate an LED in order to tell the operator which key to press in a specific situation for example Requirements In order to enable control of an LED you must set up an LED tag or array tag in the PLC and declare this as the LED tag in the configuration data LED assignment Assign the LEDs to the LED tag bits when you configure the function keys Define the LED tag and the corresponding bit for each function key in the General group of the
140. address set in the PLC is either not available or has not been set up 70018 Acknowledgment that the password list has been successfully imported 70019 Acknowledgment that the password list has been successfully exported 70020 Acknowledgment for activation of alarm reporting 70021 Acknowledgment for deactivation of alarm reporting 70022 Acknowledgment to starting the Import Password List action 70023 Acknowledgment to starting the Export Password List action 340 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Appendix 8 1 System alarms Number 70024 Effect causes The value range of the tag has been exceeded in the system function The calculation of the system function is not performed Remedy Check the desired calculation and correct it if necessary 70025 The value range of the tag has been exceeded in the system function The calculation of the system function is not performed Check the desired calculation and correct it if necessary 70026 No other screens are stored in the internal screen memory No other screens can be selected 70027 The backup of the RAM file system has been started 70028 The files from the RAM have been copied in the Flash memory The files from the RAM have been copied in the Flash memory Following a restart these saved files are copied back to the RAM file system 700
141. ailure 90032 Running out of space on the storage medium for Make more space available by inserting an empty log storage medium or swapping out the log files on the server using ExportLog 90033 No more space on the storage medium for log As Make more space available by inserting an empty of now no more operator actions requiring logging storage medium or swapping out the log files on the will be executed server using ExportLog 90039 You do not have the necessary authorization to Adapt or upgrade your authorizations perform this action 90040 Audit Trail is switched off because of a forced user Activate the Audit Trail again using the system action function StartLog 90041 A user action which has to be logged has been A user action requiring logging should only be possible executed without a logged on user with permission Change the configuration by setting a required permission for the input object 90044 A user action which has to be confirmed was Repeat the user action if necessary blocked because there is another user action pending WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 373 Appendix 8 1 System alarms 110000 Offline function alarms does not match the user version configured in WinCC flexible WinCC flexible Runtime is therefore closed Number Effect causes Remedy 110000 The operating mode was changed Offli
142. and area pointers Name Area Data type Coil Ox Bit discrete output 16 bit group Discrete input 1x Bit 16 bit group Input register 3x Bit Int Int Holding register 4x Bit 9 output Int Int Double Double Float ASCII Extended memory 6x Bit Only available with the TSX Quantum CPU Int Int Double Double Float ASCII In the case of write accesses note With the bit data type in the 4x and 6x areas after changing the specified bit the entire word is written back to the PLC There is no check to determine whether any other bits in the word have changed As a result the PLC only has read access to the specified word The standard bit counting method 16 LSB 1 MSB used with controllers of the 984 Compact and Quantum series will only be used in the Tags editor with selected data type bit The following bit location assignment applies Counting with tags Left byte 4 5 6 7 89 10 Right byte 11 12 13 1415 16 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 295 Communication with Modicon controllers 6 2 Communication via Modbus RTU protocol When you enter bit numbers elsewhere in WinCC flexible for example discrete alarms LED mapping SetBitIlnTag system function graphics lists the bit assignment of WinCC flexible 0 LSB 15 MSB applies How the bit positions are Left
143. anism to prevent uncontrolled overwriting of data in either direction in your control program Application Synchronous data record transfer can be a useful solution for example when e The PLC is the active partner in the transfer of data records e The PLC evaluates the information about the recipe number and data record number e The transfer of data records is triggered by means of a Job mailbox Requirements In order to synchronize transfer of data records between the HMI device and the PLC the following requirements must be met during configuration e An area pointer has been set up Communication gt Connections editor in Area pointer e The PLC with which the HMI device synchronizes transfer of data records is specified in the recipe Recipes editor properties view of the recipe Properties group in Transfer WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 280 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Modicon controllers Structure of the data area 6 4 User data areas The data area has a fixed length of 5 words Structure of the data area 15 0 1 Word Current recipe number 1 999 2 Word Current data record number 0 65535 3 Word Reserved 4 Word Status 0 2 4 12 5 Word Reserved e Status The status word word 4 can adopt the following values Value Meaning Decimal Binary 0 0000 0000 Transfer permitted data record fre
144. anual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 3 User data areas Reset the acknowledgment bit before setting the bit in the alarm area again The figure below shows the pulse diagram Error alarm Acknowledgment PLC HMI device Arrival of the POE Reset a New error alarm via PLC I acknowledgm bit l error alarm gt l Acknowledgment on the HMI device In Ack read tag you configure the tag or the array tag and the bit number that is written to the PLC after acknowledgment from the HMI device Make sure when you use an array tag that it is not longer than 6 words In order to ensure that a signal transition is generated as soon as the acknowledgment bit is set the HMI device first resets the acknowledgment bit assigned to an error alarm There is a certain time based offset between these two operations due to the processing time of the HMI device Note The reset includes all alarm bits acknowledged since the last restart of Runtime The PLC may only read this area once If the alarm is acknowledged on the HMI device the bit is then set in the assigned acknowledgment tag on the PLC This allows the PLC to recognize that the error alarm has been acknowledged The figure below shows the pulse diagram Error alarm g I I I a AL Acknowledgment l HMI device gt PLC l Arrival of the Reset of ie I New error alarm acknowledgm b
145. anuencdcavacaddias cncccaadacadtewed ex tee aaaadesaedadeencadaancd 1 5 Device based dC penG Gn Cy access coccs since cid sciee cue sand cden ch agate anh sudan saad cdenapidesnanicederenttaenaddesenig ceneaendeed 1 5 1 Device dependency of the protocols cccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeaeceeeeseeacaeeeeeeseeeceaeaeeeeeeeeeeeees i 1 5 2 Device based dependency of the interfaces 0 0 0 0 ceeeeceneeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeesieeeeesieeeetiaeeed y 1 5 3 Device based dependency of area pointers eceeeeeccececeeeeeeeeaeceeeeeeeseaaeceeeeeeesenueaeeeeeeeeetsaeess 1 5 4 Device based dependency Of alarmS ceceeeeeeeee ee eene eee ette ee ee tne eee tieee ee eeeeeeieeeeeneeeeenae eed 8 1 5 5 Device based dependency of direct KEYS ssssssssssrssesrnesssnneesnnenrennaaeennanannaattnnatannaaeennnananaann aa 1 5 6 Device based dependency of interfaces for the project transfer cccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeteeeees 1 6 Conversion when changing Controllers 0 cccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeeeene es 2 Communication with Allen Bradley Controllers ccseceesscesseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaneeesaeeseaneeseeeeeeneeesieeeeeeeeees 2 1 Communication with Allen Bradley isses a iS 2 1 1 Communication between the HMI device and the PLC Allen Bradley ccccseeeeeeerees 2 1 2 Communication peers for the DF1 and DH485 Protocol Allen Bradley ceece
146. arameter fields WinCC flexible Runtime reads these parameter fields in order to obtain information about the location and size of data areas in the PLC The PLC and the HMI device interactively communicate read and write data for these data areas The PLC and the HMI device trigger defined interactions based on the evaluation of stored data The area pointers reside in PLC memory Their addresses are configured in the Area pointers dialog of the Connections editor Area pointers used in WinCC flexible Device dependency PLC job Project ID Screen number Data record Date time Date time PLC Coordination Availability of the area pointer depends on the HMI device used WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 81 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 3 User data areas Application 82 Configure and enable the area pointer in Communication gt Connections before you put it into use Parameters Area pointer For all connections 9 an eS e E lt undefined gt Date time PLC Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt lt undefined gt Screen number 5 Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt lt undefined gt Project ID 1 Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt M 2 2 For each connection E ES a rae ma E aeaa a foams H Data mailbox Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt Off Tob mailbox 4 Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt off Coordination 1 Cyclic
147. areas 7 3 3 6 Project ID area pointer Omron Function You can check whether the HMI device is connected to the correct PLC at the start of runtime This check is important when operating with several HMI devices The HMI device compares a value stored on the PLC with the value specified in configuration data This ensures compatibility of configuration data with the control program If discrepancy is detected a system alarm is displayed on the HMI device and runtime is stopped Application Settings in configuration data required when using this area pointer e Define the version of configuration data Possible values between 1 and 255 Enter the version in the Device settings gt Device settings editor in Project ID e Data address of the value for the version that is stored in the PLC Enter the data address in the Communication gt Connections editor in Address Connection failure A connection failure to a device on which the project ID area pointer is configured results in all the other connections in the project being switched to offline This behavior has the following prerequisites e You have several configured connections in a project e You are using the project ID area pointer in at least one connection Causes which may set connections offline e The PLC is not available e The connection has been switched offline in the engineering system 7 3 3 7 Job mailbox area pointer Function
148. as cacy tsncdexsanseeecees bn cads A A tees 120 3 2 6 Optimizing the CONTIQUIATION 2 0ccc0scccceeceeeisacececetessceeeesseceessarecetsssecenessiccenssiecenseicccevesnedes eeewensns 3 3 User data areas casivs seas devia cectehs sch cs ecu aa ia a aE E suas adsaeeaeey E ROE aE E ENR 3 3 1 Trend request and trend transfer sissies aia aa a eR A aae 122 3 3 2 ED AWAD PUING ogo caspases eae aes tec ce cosas dbs dona stucetoncactcsees tara catecpaa dh ctpanseatedan aaugesi aaa AEAEE 3 3 3 Area POUND cece cece ceecee cee ceeeeeeeeeacee eects ceee ea eeaaanaeeeeeesaaaaeaeceeeesgaaaaeeeeeesgeceaeeeceeeteeeeeeeeesesenseeeess 3 3 3 1 General information on area pointers GE FANUC eee ceeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeaas 3 3 3 2 Screen number area Poite 0 004 2cs2ese cosas eee ae ieina eda eai 127 3 3 3 3 Datestime area POmUntenssccceracisvusscteessaecdectas sadideasagadadeanadcedsabdedsaddsctanagadcanadadedsavaaceesabeasndcdenieees WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Table of contents 3 3 3 4 Date time controller area pointer sxxin ustucsacuniasinhiuunnattnaueentden haan mecnasuet dontaissanddshuannaguncletnerudtled 129 3 3 3 0 C ofdination area POME cssiigs ssia dy a aa a a E a a a aa a a 3 3 3 6 Project ID area POmnter c0sscecse csnteesceeciencseersgennecsttncesateatenstendaneesedneesdiedassttueanecseeteuttaset 131 3 3 37 Jo bmailb
149. ast restart of Runtime The PLC may only read this area once If the alarm is acknowledged on the HMI device the bit is then set in the assigned acknowledgment tag on the PLC This allows the PLC to recognize that the error alarm has been acknowledged The figure below shows the pulse diagram Error alarm S I I I AL Acknowledgment l HMI device gt PLC l Arrival of the Reset of _ New error alarm acknowledgm bit via HMI device l error alarm WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 146 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 4 Commissioning components 3 4 Commissioning components 3 4 1 Commissioning components Transferring the PLC program to the PLC 1 Interconnect the PC with the CPU using the appropriate cable 2 Download the program files to the CPU 3 Then set the CPU to RUN Transferring project data to the HMI device 1 The HMI device must be in transfer mode in order to accept the project transfer Possible scenarios Initial startup The HMI device does not yet contain any configuration data in the initial startup phase The project data and runtime software required for operation must be transferred from the configuration computer to the device The HMI device automatically changes to transfer mode The transfer dialog box opens with a connection message on the HMI device Recommissioning Recommissioning m
150. ation Settings in configuration data required when using this area pointer e Define the version of configuration data Possible values between 1 and 255 Enter the version in the Device settings gt Device settings editor in Project ID e Data address of the value for the version that is stored in the PLC Enter the data address in the Communication gt Connections editor in Address Connection failure A connection failure to a device on which the project ID area pointer is configured results in all the other connections in the project being switched to offline This behavior has the following prerequisites e You have several configured connections in a project e You are using the project ID area pointer in at least one connection Causes which may set connections offline e The PLC is not available e The connection has been switched offline in the engineering system 3 3 3 7 Job mailbox area pointer Function The PLC can use the job mailbox to transfer jobs to the HMI device to trigger corresponding actions on the HMI device These functions include for example e Display screen e Set date and time WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 131 Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 3 User data areas Data structure The first word of the job mailbox contains the job number Depending on the job mailbox up to three parameters can be transferred
151. ation Part 2 162 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with LG controllers 4 2 Configuring the LG GLOFA GM communication driver 4 2 6 Optimizing the configuration Acquisition cycle and update time Discrete alarms Screens Trends The acquisition cycles for the Area pointers and the acquisition cycles of the tags specified in the configuration software are decisive factors for the update times that can actually be achieved The update time is the sum of the acquisition cycle transmission time processing time To achieve optimum update times remember the following points during configuration e Keep the individual data areas as small as possible and as large as necessary e Define data areas that belong together as belonging together You can improve the update time by setting up one large data area instead of several small areas e If the acquisition cycles you select are too short this is detrimental to the overall performance Set the acquisition cycle according to the rate of change of the process values The rate of temperature changes at a furnace for example is significantly slower compared to the speed rate of an electrical drive As a general guideline the acquisition cycle should be approx 1 second e Put the tags of an alarm or a screen in one data area without gaps e To allow changes in the PLC to be recognized reliably these must be available at least during the actual acquisition c
152. ator can also make an entry on the HMI device that is then written to the address on the PLC User data areas are intended for the exchange of special data and are set up only when such data is used Data for which user data areas are required for example e Job mailboxes e Transfer of data records e Date time synchronization e Sign of life monitoring The user data areas are created while configuring in WinCC flexible You assign the corresponding addresses in the PLC 4 2 Configuring the LG GLOFA GM communication driver 4 2 1 Requirements of communication Connector 158 The HMI device must be connected to the Cnet module for example G4L CUEA or G6L CUEC over RS 232 RS 422 or RS 485 For the RS 232 interface operation is supported only with a null modem cable With the implemented dedicated protocol it is also possible to connect directly to the GM6 CPU B without a computer link module Cnet G6L This GM6 CPU communication however does not support symbolic tags named2 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with LG controllers 4 2 Configuring the LG GLOFA GM communication driver Cables The following cables are available to connect the HMI device to the PLC Interface on the LG GLOFA GM PLC HMI device or adapter Point to point cable Multipoint cable RS 232 9 pin PP1 connecting cable RS 232 15 pin PP4 connecting cable RS 42
153. ay tag longer than 6 words when you configure an acknowledgment on the HMI device using Acknowledgment HMI WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 373 Appendix 8 1 System alarms Number 190011 Effect causes Possible cause 1 The value entered could not be written to the configured PLC tag because the high or low limit was exceeded The system discards the entry and restores the original value Possible cause 2 The connection to the PLC was interrupted Remedy Make sure that the value entered lies within the range of values of the control tags Check the connection to the PLC 190012 It is not possible to convert a value from a source format to a target format for example An attempt is being made to assign a value to a counter that is outside the valid PLC specific value range A tag of the type Integer should be assigned a value of the type String Check the range of values or the data type of the tags 190013 The user has entered a string that is longer than the tag The string is automatically shortened to the permitted length Only enter strings that do not exceed the permitted tag length 190100 Area pointer alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 190100 The area pointer is not updated because the Check the configuration address configured for this pointer does not exist Type 1 Warning
154. ays only tags in the DM I O HR AR and LR areas are permitted and only of the DEC and DEC data types With screens the update rate that can actually be achieved depends on the type and amount of data to be displayed During configuration make sure that you only configure short acquisition cycles for objects that actually need to be updated quickly This reduces the update times When using bit triggered trends if the group bit is set in the Trend transfer area the HMI device always updates all the trends whose bit is set in this area It then resets the bits The group bit in the PLC program can only be set again after all bits have been reset by the HMI device WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 303 Communication with Omron controllers 7 3 User data areas Job mailboxes The HMI device confirms acceptance of the job mailbox by entering the value zero in the first data word of the job mailbox The HMI device now processes the job for which it requires time If a new job mailbox is entered again immediately in the job mailbox it may take some time before the HMI device can process the next job mailbox The next job mailbox will only be accepted when there is computing capacity available 7 3 User data areas 7 3 1 Trend request and trend transfer Function A trend is a graphic representation of one or more values from the PLC The value is read out time or
155. ays transferred directly That is the tag values are read from an address or written to an address configured for this tag directly without redirecting the values by means of interim memory Initiating the transfer of data records There are three ways of triggering the transfer e Operator input in the recipe view e PLC jobs The transfer of data records can also be triggered by the PLC e Triggering by configured functions If the transfer of data records is triggered by a configured function or by a PLC job the recipe display on the HMI device remains operable The data records are transferred in the background Simultaneous processing of several transfer requests is however not possible In this case the HMI device rejects the other transfer requests with a system alarm Transfer without synchronization If you select asynchronous transfer of data records between the HMI device and PLC there is no coordination over the common data areas It is therefore unnecessary to set up a data area during configuration Asynchronous data record transfer can be a useful alternative for example when e The system is capable of excluding the risk of uncontrolled overwriting of data by the communication peer e The PLC does not require information about the recipe number and data record number e The transfer of data records is triggered by the operator of the HMI device WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 316 User s Manual 07 2008
156. based on which the HMI device can recognize an acknowledgment by the PLC A bit set in the tag triggers acknowledgment of the assigned error alarm bit at the HMI device This tag bit returns a function similar to acknowledgment on the HMI device which is triggered by pressing the ACK button for example The acknowledgment bit must be located in the same tag as the bit for the error alarm WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 145 Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 3 User data areas Reset the acknowledgment bit before setting the bit in the alarm area again The figure below shows the pulse diagram Error alarm Acknowledgment PLC HMI device Arrival of the TO Reset Al New error alarm via PLC I acknowledgm bit l error alarm gt Acknowledgment on the HMI device In Ack read tag you configure the tag or the array tag and the bit number that is written to the PLC after acknowledgment from the HMI device Make sure when you use an array tag that it is not longer than 6 words In order to ensure that a signal transition is generated as soon as the acknowledgment bit is set the HMI device first resets the acknowledgment bit assigned to an error alarm There is a certain time based offset between these two operations due to the processing time of the HMI device Note The reset includes all alarm bits acknowledged since the l
157. because Check the connection and if the PLC is switched on baud rate is incorrect The following parameters Check the parameter definitions in the Control Panel could not be written to the registry using Set PG PC interface 0 General error Restart the system 1 Wrong version 2 Profile cannot be written to the registry 3 The subnet type cannot be written to the registry 4 The Target Rotation Time cannot be written to the registry 5 Faulty Highest Address HSA 140009 Tags are not updated or written because the Reinstall the module in the Control Panel using Set module for S7 communication was not found PG PC interface 140010 No S7 communication partner found because the Switch the PLC on PLC is shut down DP T DP T If only one master is connected to the network disable The option PG PC is the only master is not setin PG PC is the only master in Set PG PC interface the Control Panel under Set PG PC interface If several masters are connected to the network enable these Do not change any settings for this will cause bus errors 140011 No tag updating or writing is executed because Check the connection and that the communication communication is down partner is switched on 140012 There is an initialization problem e g when Restart the HMI device Or Run WinCC flexible Runtime then start your other applications 348 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1C
158. bit in the PLC program can only be set again after the HMI device has reset all bits PLC jobs A high rate and volume of PLC jobs transferred may lead to overload in communication between the HMI device and the PLC The HMI device confirms acceptance of the PLC job by entering the value Zero in the first data word of the job mailbox The HMI device now processes the job for which it requires a certain time slice It may take the HMI device some time to process a new PLC job which is transferred in immediate succession to the job mailbox The next PLC job is only accepted if sufficient computing resources are available 2 2 1 7 Commissioning components Allen Bradley DF 1 Transferring the PLC program to the PLC 1 Interconnect the PC with the CPU using the appropriate cable 2 Download the program files to the CPU 3 Then set the CPU to RUN WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 55 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 2 Contiguring the Allen Bradley communication driver Transferring project data to the HMI device 1 The HMI device must be in transfer mode in order to accept the project transfer Possible scenarios Initial startup The HMI device does not yet contain any configuration data in the initial startup phase The project data and runtime software required for operation must be transferred from the configuration computer to the device The HMI device automati
159. bit triggered depending on the configuration Time triggered trends The HMI device reads in the trend values cyclically at an interval specified in the configuration Time triggered trends are suitable for continuous processes for example the operating temperature of a motor Bit triggered trends By setting a trigger bit in the tag trend request the HMI device either reads in a trend value or an entire trend buffer Bit triggered trends are used to represent fast changing values One example might be the injection pressure in the production of plastic parts To trigger bit triggered trends create suitable external tags in the Tags editor of WinCC flexible The tags must be linked with the trend areas The HMI device and PLC then communicate with each other via these trend areas The following areas are available for trends e Trend request area e Trend transfer area 1 e Trend transfer area 2 only required with switch buffers Variables of the area DM I O HR AR or LR are permitted They must be of the data type DEC DEC or an array tag of the data type DEC DEC During configuration you assign a bit to a trend This sets a unique bit assignment for all areas WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 304 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Omron controllers 7 3 User data areas Trend request area The HMI device sets corresponding bits in the trend request area when you ope
160. bits in the trend request area Using the trend request area the PLC can recognize which trend is currently displayed on the HMI device Trends can also be triggered without evaluation of the trend request area Trend transfer area 1 This area is used to trigger trends In your control program you set the bit assigned to the trend in the trend transfer area and set the trend group bit The trend group bit is the last bit in the trend transfer area The HMI device detects the trigger The HMI device reads either a value or the entire buffer from the PLC It then resets the trend bit and the trend group bit The following picture shows the structure of a trend transfer area high order byte low order byte 15 alle Bit number 1st word nth word Trend group bit The trend transfer area must not be modified by the control program until the trend group bit has been reset Trend transfer area 2 Trend transfer area 2 is required for trends configured with a switch buffer The trend transfer areas 1 and 2 have a similar structure WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 79 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 3 User data areas Switch buffers The switch buffer is a second buffer for the same trend that can be set up during configuration The PLC writes to Buffer 2 while the HMI device reads the values from Buffer 1 and writes to Buffer 1 when the H
161. ble 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 59 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 2 Contiguring the Allen Bradley communication driver Using DH485 on a Windows XP computer Connections over DH485 a Windows XP computer require installation of the DH485 protocol driver 1 Select the Device Manager option from the My Computer gt Properties gt Hardware shortcut menu 2 Under Ports select the required communications port for example COM1 3 Click the Properties toolbar button The Communications Port COM1 Properties dialog box opens 4 Select Update driver in the toolbar The Hardware Update Wizard opens 5 Select the Install from a list or specific location Advanced option and then click Next 6 Select the option Don t search let me select the installable driver and confirm with Continue 7 Click Have Disk button to open the Install From Disk dialog box 8 Click the Browse button 9 Select the fWDH485 inf file from the Common Files Siemens F WDH485 directory and confirm with OK 10 Confirm the message DH485 has not passed the Windows Logo test with Continue installation 11 Complete the driver installation and restart your computer Control Panel SIMATIC HMI DH485 DH485 protocol driver configuration The control panel SIMATIC HMI DH485 DH485 protocol driver configuration is automatically installed when you install Win
162. ble in the Discrete alarms and Analog alarms editors The following data types are supported for GE Fanuc controllers PLC Permitted data types Discrete alarms Analog alarms Series 90 30 90 70 and Int Word Byte Int Ulnt Word VersaMax Micro DInt DWord Bit Real e Enter an address The tag addressed here contains the bit that triggers the alarm As soon as the bit of the tag is set on the PLC and is transferred to the HMI device in the configured acquisition cycle the HMI device recognizes the alarm as incoming After the same bit is reset on the PLC the HMI device recognizes the alarm as outgoing e Select the array elements If the number of array elements is increased you can select more bit numbers in the Discrete alarms editor An array with a length of three words provides 48 alarm bits for example WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 142 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 3 User data areas 3 3 4 3 Step 2 Configuring an alarm Procedure Alarms fall into the following categories e Discrete alarms e Analog alarms You create alarms in the Discrete alarms and Analog alarms editors Discrete alarms The editor is shown in the following figure DISCRETE e ALARMS a pe a a a x pe Engine overtemperature Temperature sensor M3 v 0 lt No group gt Errors Diagnosis Events Warnings
163. block 28 bit block 32 bit block Link bit memory B Bit 4 bit block 8 bit block 12 bit block 16 bit block 20 bit block 24 bit block 28 bit block 32 bit block Timer T Word Counter C Word DWord Data register D Bit 1 Word DWord Int Dint Real String Link register W Word DWord Int Dint Real Error bit F Bit memory 4 bit block 8 bit block 12 bit block 16 bit block 20 bit block 24 bit block 28 bit block 32 bit block In the case of write accesses note With the bit data type in the D operand after changing the specified bit the entire word is written back to the PLC There is no check to determine whether any other bits in the word have changed As a result the PLC only has read access to the specified word WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 3 Communication via protocol 4 Special features of connections with protocol 4 NOTICE If the CPU type is changed for a configured connection tags with the following characteristics must be revised e Operands that do not exist for the new CPU type such as W B F e Inputs and outputs with different addressing hexadecimal octal e Addresses higher than the permitted address range of the new CPU type Protected areas Write disable during RUN can only be read and not written depending on the CPU type Special relays registers can
164. byte Right byte counted In the WinCC flexible 15 1 1 1 engineering system you 4 3 2 11 0 configure the following Format for Signed The placeholder stands for the data types Signed Int and Signed Double Special features of a connection with Modicon Modbus 6 2 6 Area pointers can only be used in the areas 4x and 6x Only tags in the areas 4x and 6x and only the data types Int and Int are permitted as trigger tags for discrete alarms Array tags may only be used for discrete alarms and trends Array tags only of the 4x and 6x areas and data types Int and Int are permitted Optimizing the configuration Acquisition cycle and update time 258 The acquisition cycles for the Area pointers and the acquisition cycles of the tags specified in the configuration software are decisive factors for the actual update times that can be achieved The update time is the sum of the acquisition cycle transmission time processing time To achieve optimum update times remember the following points during configuration e Keep the individual data areas as small as possible and as large as necessary e Define data areas that belong together as belonging together You can improve the update time by setting up one large data area instead of several small areas e If the acquisition cycles you select are too short this is detrimental to the overall performance Set the acquisitio
165. cally changes to transfer mode The transfer dialog box opens with a connection message on the HMI device Recommissioning Recommissioning means that you overwrite existing project data on the HMI device For corresponding detailed instructions refer to the HMI device manual 2 Check whether the alarm settings meet requirements of your WinCC flexible project 3 Select Project gt Transfer gt Transfer settings to configure the transfer parameters before you transfer project data to the HMI device Select the used port Set the transfer parameters Select the target storage location Initiate the transfer of project data by clicking Transfer The project is compiled automatically All compilation and transfer steps are logged to a message window Message output on the configuration computer on successful completion of the transfer Transfer completed successfully The start screen appears on the HMI device Interconnecting the PLC with the HMI device 1 2 56 Interconnect the PLC with the HMI device using a suitable cable The message Connection to PLC is established is output to the HMI device Note that users can edit the system alarm texts in WinCC flexible NOTICE Always observe the safety related information in the HMI device Manual when commissioning the device RF radiation emitted from devices such as mobile phones may cause unwanted operating state
166. cation is now enabled 280003 The connection used requires a function block Check whether in the PLC e The cable is plugged in The function block has not responded e The PLC is OK e The correct port is used Restart the system if the system alarm persists Remedy depends on the error code 1 The function block must set the COM bit in the response container 2 The function block must not set the ERROR bit in the response container 3 The function block must respond within the specified time timeout 4 Go online to the PLC 280004 The connection to the PLC is interrupted There Check the connection parameters in WinCC flexible is no data exchange at present Ensure that the cable is plugged in the PLC is operational the correct port is being used Restart the system if the system alarm persists WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 373 Appendix 8 1 System alarms 290000 Recipe system alarms Number 290000 Effect causes The recipe tag could not be read or written It is assigned the start value The alarm can be entered in the alarm buffer for up to four more failed tags if necessary After that alarm 290003 is output Remedy Check in the configuration that the address has been set up in the PLC 290001 An attempt has been made to assign a value to a recipe tag which is outside the value range permitted for this type The alarm ca
167. cations areas on the PLC Data transfer types There are two ways of transferring data records between the HMI device and PLC e Transfer without synchronization e Transfer with synchronization over the data record Data records are always transferred directly That is the tag values are read from an address or written to an address configured for this tag directly without redirecting the values by means of interim memory Initiating the transfer of data records There are three ways of triggering the transfer e Operator input in the recipe view e PLC jobs The transfer of data records can also be triggered by the PLC e Triggering by configured functions If the transfer of data records is triggered by a configured function or by a PLC job the recipe display on the HMI device remains operable The data records are transferred in the background Simultaneous processing of several transfer requests is however not possible In this case the HMI device rejects the other transfer requests with a system alarm Transfer without synchronization If you select asynchronous transfer of data records between the HMI device and PLC there is no coordination over the common data areas It is therefore unnecessary to set up a data area during configuration Asynchronous data record transfer can be a useful alternative for example when e The system is capable of excluding the risk of uncontrolled overwriting of data by the communication peer
168. ccceceeeeeeecneeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseceueaeeeeeeeecsnnaeeeeees Communication with Mitsubishi Controllers eeecceessceeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeaeeseaeeesaeeesaneeesseeseeneeseaaaeeeaas 5 1 Communication with Mitsubishi MELSEC cc cccccceecetecnee cee ce eee caecaeeeeeecaeeaeeseenesnseenaens 197 5 1 1 Communication partner Mitsubishi MELSEC cece cence cece ee eeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeseaas 197 5 1 2 Communication between the HMI device and controller Mitsubishi 5 2 Communication via PG protocol ccccccce sete cctecneecseenecnsenaeeseenecnsecseceeneeesecseceeeeseestaeaees 199 5 2 1 Requirements Of COMMUNICATION ccceeeceseese ects cneeeeceecsecseeceeesecsaesascseenectsetseceseeseeeeeaeee 199 5 2 2 Installing the COMMUNICATION CLIVEL ccc cece ec ceee ene ceeeseetecnseeseeseeneeesecsaseesceseseeaeeseeseeneaeeas 200 5 2 3 Configuring the controller type and protocol 0 0 2 eee eee cence ee eeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeesaeeeetteeeeesnaeeeeniaeeed 200 5 2 4 Configuring protocol parameters a a S A A Sa 201 5 2 5 Permitted data types Mitsubishi PG c ccecceceeecceeeee cece cesses eeeeeeeeeeeseaeeesaeeeseeeseeneesieeeenees 202 5 2 6 Optimizing the configuration 0 0 2 eee cette ee etee cette eente eter teeter tenets ee taeee ee taaeeeeeaaeeeeesaeeeeenaeeeaeeeeneaa 203 5 2 7 COMMISSIONING COMPONGMS saccesccccecensecte ca apecedes ginsddecenagsdeceagetecnesad dese ane desenapicacndetesae
169. ceaaaeceeeesesecaaeaeeeeeesecaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeess 2 2 3 6 Valid data types and ACCESSING 0 0 eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeteeeeeeseeeeeenaeees 2 3 User data area ieni onii ive ese Seka E EE E a ANAS 18 2 3 1 Trend request and trend transfer ccccccecceceeeeeeeneeeceeeeeeeeaeaeceseeseeeenaeeeeeeeeeensaeeeeeeeseeeneeseeees 2 3 2 EDAD DUNG srini ea a a cers a aA E peated S a E 2 3 3 Area pointel arrason E E G A texeaaaeouareans 2 3 3 1 General information on area pointers Allen Bradley sssseessseeseesresseeresrrrsseirresrrssrerrssennne 81 2 3 3 2 Screen number area POinter 2 0 0 ceeececcce cece cece eeeeee eee ceeeeeeeeecaececeeeeeeceaaeeeeeesesescacaeeeeeseeeeeees 2 3 3 3 Dateftime area POUMEN siie a aaa enaa saaad A Ganda E vanes dev antacea saa a a 8 2 3 3 4 Date time controller area pointer ccccceccececeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeceaaeceeeeecesecaaceeeeeeesecsneeeeeaneeeeeeess 85 2 3 3 5 Coordination area pointer cc cccescsceecseenecneceeeeeecesecseeseeeesesecsaecescaeesecsaeeaseseesesesaeesaenes 86 23 36 Project ID area POINTEN saien aiea ae Slee einen See AS REEE ASAE ee 87 23 9 Jobimailbox ar a PONTET srriesiieradesnsaisiiinidadi iis eiia iaeaea AEAEE E aa 8 2 3 3 8 Data mailbox area POINTED seisseen iieii ea aa aai aa SEA aa RE A 90 2 3 4 Events alarms and acknowledgment 2 cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeaeeeeeesecceeaeceeeesesen
170. cedure Create the tags or arrays in the Tags editor The dialog box is shown below DF1 protocol and DH 485 EEE TA Cj Ga mA e e am paa a proram aee Temperature sensor M3 TET mE an 0 v Cyclic continuous Fie Type v mE _ E IP C Logix TA mh Cys ot ri ee menon paaie pearen fonono rooe mode Temperature sensor M3 Allen Bracley Int v Programneme T vii Cyclic continuous Address 123 Programname Tagname Als e Define the tag and array names e Select a PLC connection The connection must already be configured in the Connections editor e Select a data type The available data types depend on the PLC being used If you select an illegal data type the tag will not be available in the Discrete alarms and Analog alarms editors WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 98 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 3 User data areas The following data types are supported by Allen Bradley PLCs Communication driver PLC Valid data types Discrete alarms Analog alarms DF1 and DH485 SLC500 SLC501 Int Ulnt Int UInt Long SLC502 SLC503 ULong Bit Real SLC504 SLC505 PLC5 MicroLogix E IP C Logix ControlLogix Int Ulnt Sint USInt Int Ulnt CompactLogix DInt UDInt Bool Real e Enter an address The addressed tag contains the alarm triggering bit As soon as the bit of the tag is set o
171. cific reactions such as the call of a different screen Application Configure and enable the area pointer in Communication gt Connections before you put it into use You can create only one instance of the Screen number area pointer and only on one PLC The screen number is transferred spontaneously to the PLC That is it is always transferred when a new screen is activated on the HMI device It is therefore unnecessary to configure an acquisition cycle WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 127 Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 3 User data areas Structure The area pointer is a data area in the memory of the PLC with a fixed length of 5 words 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 40 1st word Current screen type 2nd word Current screen number 3rd word Reserved 4th word Current field number 5th word Reserved e Current screen type 1 for the root screen or 4 for the permanent window e Current screen number 1 to 32767 e Current field number 1 to 32767 3 3 3 3 Date time area pointer Function This area pointer is used to transfer the date and time from the HMI device to the PLC The PLC writes control job 41 to the job mailbox When it evaluating the control job the HMI device saves its current date and time to the data area configured in the Date time area pointer All defin
172. cle in this field to allow cyclic reading of the area pointer in Runtime An extremely short acquisition time may have a negative impact on HMI device performance e Comment Save a comment for example to describe the purpose of the area pointer WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 126 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with GE Fanuc controllers Accessing data areas The table shows how the PLC and HMI device handle read R and write W access to the 3 3 User data areas data areas Data area Required for HMI device PLC Screen number Evaluation by the PLC in order to determine the active W R screen Data record Transfer of data records with synchronization R W R W Date time Transfer of the date and time from the HMI device to the PLC W R Date time PLC Transfer of the date and time from the PLC to the HMI device R W Coordination Requesting the HMI device status in the control program W R Project ID Runtime checks consistency between the WinCC flexible R W project ID and the project in the PLC PLC job Triggering of HMI device functions by the control program R W R W The next sections describe the area pointers and their associated PLC jobs 3 3 3 2 Screen number area pointer Function The HMI device saves information about the screen called on the HMI device to the Screen number area pointer This allows the transfer of the current screen contents from the HMI device to the PLC The PLC can trigger spe
173. cnae cae caeeneenseeseeseeeesesesaetaeeseeeeaeens 221 5 4 3 5 Coordination area POInter eee ccce cee cenecneeeeeenececaeceeenecnecnsecseseeesseesecsaeesaeseeecisaeenseeieens 222 9 4 3 6 User v rsion area POUMGM sic222c 20es3 oiuessdeeleeveddctlaeseccisln cases Acbece Bidz geile 2h E Eaa aan 223 5 4 3 7 Job mailbox area Pointer 0 cece inesse eae eane o naaa a TERS 223 5 4 3 8 Data mailbox area pointer sssssinenicsiiirrninninariiuninian niniin ninnan aana enan nE daat in ainan ari 226 5 4 4 Events alarms and acknowledgments ccccccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeccaeeeeeeseeecaeeeeeeeeseesacaeeeees 233 5 4 4 1 General information on events alarms and acknowledgments cccceseseteeeeeeeeeeeeetees 233 5 4 4 2 Step 1 Creating tags or an array seessseeericcerrreseerresrunestinaeetnnnatinnaettnnastnaddtnandatdanatannaaanaaeann 234 5 4 4 3 Step 2 Configuring AN Aar suissa aAa AAA AAAA RRAN DAANA ANA 235 5 4 4 4 Step 3 Configure the acknowledgment eee eeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeteneeeeseeaeeeteeeeenteees 2 5 5 Connecting cables for MitSUbDISHI 0 0 0 0 eee eee eter teeter ee anana EAA NRA KAA A 239 5 5 1 Connecting cables for Mitsubishi PG protocol ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeesaaes 239 5 5 1 1 Adapter 6XV1440 2UE32 RS 232 for MitSUDISNI cece eeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeaes 5 5 1 2 Connecting cable 6XV1440 2P RS 422 for Mitsubishi
174. col 4 PP5 for Mitsubishi protocol 4 Connections editor Connector GE Fanuc Mitsubishi PG Mitsubishi protocol 4 Create tag GE Fanuc Mitsubishi Electric Modicon Omron Hostlink Multilink Creating a tag Allen Bradley Creating an array Allen Bradley 98 GE Fanuc LG GLOFA GM Mitsubishi Electric 234 Modicon Omron Hostlink Multilink Creating tags LG GLOFA GM 184 D Data exchange Device based dependency Alarm 38 Direct key Interface for the transfer of projects WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Index Protocol 2 Device dependent a Allen Bradley DF1 52 52 Allen HT puss BA 62 GE Fanuc 119 LG OLOFA GN Mitsubishi PG 0 Mitsubishi 36 ped 4 208 Modicon 2 Omron a a Device specific parameters Allen Bradley Ethernet IP Direct key Device based dependency 40 E Ethernet G GE Fanuc Communication partners Connecting cables Connection Create tag Creating an array Data type Device dependent parameters Installing communication drivers 118 Network parameters PLC dependent parameters Protocol parameters Select the PLC H HMI device Available area AZN 36 available prota pA someone Ck Fa lB EB connecting with the ri 1 Bid 260 be B60 266 609 project a PLC men 66 148 206 260 330 Installing communication drivers Allen Bradley DF1 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s
175. connection was created The connection parameters are configured 1 4 Connections and protocols HMI functionality Data exchange The HMI is used to read save and record alarms and tags In addition the HMI can be used to intervene in the process caution Ethernet communication In Ethernet based communication such as PROFINET IO HTTP Sm rtAccess Sm rtService and OPC it is the end user who is responsible for the security of his data network The proper functioning of the device cannot be guaranteed in all circumstances targeted attacks for example can lead to an overloading of the device The prerequisite for the operating and monitoring functions is the connection of the HMI device to a PLC Data exchange between the HMI and the PLC is controlled by a connection specific protocol Each connection requires a separate protocol Criteria for selecting the connection 22 Criteria for selecting the connection between the HMI and the PLC are for example e PLC type e CPU in the PLC e HMI device type e Number of HMI devices per PLC e Structure and any bus systems of an existing plant e Amount of components additionally required WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Working with connections 1 4 Connections and protocols Protocols Protocols are available for the following PLCs PLC Protocol SIMATIC S7 e PPI e MPI e PROFIBUS DP e TCP
176. continuous lt undefined gt off Date time 6 Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt il gt Enabling an area pointer based on the example of a SIMATIC S7 PLC e Active Enables the area pointer e Name Name of the area pointer defined by WinCC flexible e Address Tag address of the area pointer in the PLC e Length WinCC flexible defines the default length of the area pointer e Acquisition cycle Define an acquisition cycle in this field to allow cyclic reading of the area pointer in Runtime An extremely short acquisition time may have a negative impact on HMI device performance e Comment Save a comment for example to describe the purpose of the area pointer WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers Accessing data areas The table shows how the PLC and HMI device handle read R and write W access to the 2 3 User data areas data areas Data area Required for HMI device PLC Screen number Evaluation by the PLC in order to determine the active W R screen Data record Transfer of data records with synchronization R W R W Date time Transfer of the date and time from the HMI device to the PLC W R Date time PLC Transfer of the date and time from the PLC to the HMI device R W Coordination Requesting the HMI device status in the control program W R Project ID Runtime checks consistency between the WinCC flexible R W project ID an
177. created in step 1 All tags with the permitted data type are shown in the selection list e Specify the bit number In the bit number column specify the relevant bit position in the created tag Remember that the way the bit positions are counted depends on the particular PLC With Omron controllers the bit positions are counted as follows How the bit positions are counted Left byte Right byte In Omron 15 8 7 0 controllers In the WinCC flexible you 15 8 7 0 configure the following Analog alarms The only difference between discrete alarms and analog alarms is that you configure a limit value rather than a bit number The alarm is triggered when this limit is exceeded The outgoing alarm is triggered when the low limit is violated making allowances for any configured hysteresis WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 326 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Omron controllers 7 3 4 4 Procedure 7 3 User data areas Step 3 Configure the acknowledgment Create suitable tags on the PLC to acknowledge an error alarm You assign these tags to an alarm in the Bit messages editor You make the assignment in Properties gt Acknowledgment The following figure shows the dialog for configuring an acknowledgment Discrete Alarms z ol j DISCRETE ALARMS ngine overtemperature Errors a Temperature sen
178. d As a result the PLC only has read access to the specified word The standard bit counting method 16 LSB 1 MSB used with controllers of the 984 Compact Quantum and Momentum series will only be used for these CPUs in the Tags editor with selected data type bit The following bit location assignment applies Left byte Right byte Counting with tags 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 When you enter bit numbers elsewhere in WinCC flexible for example discrete alarms LED mapping SetBitIlnTag system function graphics lists the bit assignment of WinCC flexible 0 LSB 15 MSB applies How the bit positions are Left byte Right byte counted In the WinCC flexible 15 1 1 1 engineering system you 4 3 2 1 configure the following This bit counting method also applies to Premium and Micro controllers WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Modicon controllers 6 3 Communication via Modbus TCP IP protocol Format for Signed The placeholder stands for the data types Signed Int and Signed Double Points to note when connecting via Modbus TCP IP protocol Area pointers can only be used in the areas 4x 6x and MW Only tags in the areas 4x 6x and MW and only the data types Int and Int are permitted as trigger tags for discrete alarms Array tags may only be used
179. d Check the network connection and eliminate the cause Records cannot be saved or read over the network of error connection 130008 The storage card is not available Insert the storage card Records cannot be saved to read from the storage card 130009 The specified folder does not exist on the storage Insert the storage card card Any files saved to this directory are not backed up when you switch off the HMI device 130010 The maximum nesting depth can be exhausted Check the configuration when for example a value change in a script results in the call of another script and the second script in turn has a value change that results in the call of yet a further script etc The configured functionality is not supported 140000 Connection alarms chns7 Connection device Number Effect causes Remedy 140000 An online connection to the PLC is established 140001 The online connection to the PLC was shut down 140003 No tag updating or writing is executed Check the connection and if the PLC is switched on Check the parameter definitions in the Control Panel using Set PG PC interface Restart the system 140004 No tag update or write operations are executed Verify the connection and check whether the PLC is because the access point or the module configuration is faulty switched on Check the access point or the module configuration MPI PPI PROFIBUS in the Control Panel wit
180. d protocol You can edit the parameters at any time by double clicking Communication Connections in the project view of the HMI device Select the connection and edit its parameters in the properties dialog box Note The settings on the HMI device and on the PLC must match WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 3 Communication via protocol 4 5 3 4 Configuring protocol parameters Parameters to be set To edit the parameters double click Communication gt Connections in the project window of the HMI device In the project window of the HMI device Mitsubishi Protocol 4 is selected in the Communication drivers column You can now enter or modify the protocol parameters in the Properties window Device dependent parameters Interface Select the HMI port to which the Mitsubishi PLC is connected under Interface For more detailed information refer to the HMI device manual Type Here you select the interface of the HMI device you want to use You can choose between RS 232 or RS 422 If the HMI device is a PC you can only use RS 232 Note If you use the IF1B interface you must also switch over the RS 422 received data and the RTS signal using 4 DIP switches on the back of the Multi Panel Baud rate Define the transmission rate between the HMI device and the PLC under Baud rate Note The high
181. d runtime software required for operation must be transferred from the configuration computer to the device The HMI device automatically changes to transfer mode The transfer dialog box opens with a connection message on the HMI device Recommissioning Recommissioning means that you overwrite existing project data on the HMI device For corresponding detailed instructions refer to the HMI device manual 2 Check whether the alarm settings meet requirements of your WinCC flexible project 3 Select Project gt Transfer gt Transfer settings to configure the transfer parameters before you transfer project data to the HMI device Select the used port Set the transfer parameters Select the target storage location Initiate the transfer of project data by clicking Transfer The project is compiled automatically All compilation and transfer steps are logged to a message window Message output on the configuration computer on successful completion of the transfer Transfer completed successfully The start screen appears on the HMI device Interconnecting the PLC with the HMI device 1 2 66 Interconnect the PLC with the HMI device using a suitable cable The message Connection to PLC is established is output to the HMI device Note that users can edit the system alarm texts in WinCC flexible NOTICE Always observe the safety related information in the HMI device Manual w
182. d the project in the PLC PLC job Triggering of HMI device functions by the control program R W R W The next sections describe the area pointers and their associated PLC jobs 2 3 3 2 Screen number area pointer Function The HMI device saves information about the screen called on the HMI device to the Screen number area pointer This allows the transfer of the current screen contents from the HMI device to the PLC The PLC can trigger specific reactions such as the call of a different screen Application Configure and enable the area pointer in Communication gt Connections before you put it into use You can create only one instance of the Screen number area pointer and only on one PLC The screen number is transferred spontaneously to the PLC That is it is always transferred when a new screen is activated on the HMI device It is therefore unnecessary to configure an acquisition cycle WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 83 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 3 User data areas Structure The area pointer is a data area in the memory of the PLC with a fixed length of 5 words 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 40 1st word Current screen type 2nd word Current screen number 3rd word Reserved 4th word Current field number 5th word Reserved e Current screen type 1 for the root screen or 4 fo
183. data and are set up only when such data is used Data for which user data areas are required for example e Job mailboxes e Transfer of data records e Date time synchronization e Sign of life monitoring The user data areas are created while configuring in WinCC flexible You assign the corresponding addresses in the PLC 6 2 Communication via Modbus RTU protocol 6 2 1 Requirements of communication Connection The HMI device must be connected to the programming interface of the CPU RS 232 Connecting the HMI device to Modicon is essentially restricted to the physical connection of the HMI device No special blocks are required on the PLC for the connection Cables The following connection cables are available to connect the HMI device to the Modicon Modbus Modicon PLC lie iee on the directly via Modbus SS over MB bridge TSX Compact Svisa RS 232 RS 232 point to point connection RS 232 9 pin PP1 PP1 PP2 RS 232 15 pin 6XV1 440 1K 6XV1 440 1K PP3 length key see catalog The pin assignment of the cables is described in the section Connecting cables for Modicon Modbus 254 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Modicon controllers 6 2 Communication via Modbus RTU protocol 6 2 2 Installing the communication driver Driver for the HMI device The driver for connection to Modicon Modbus is supplied
184. ddress area is achieved differently in the various non Modicon controllers A response frame without ExceptionCode is expected within 500 ms The following function codes are used for the respective data areas Reading function codes Address area 01 ReadCoilStatus Ox DIGITAL_OUT 02 ReadInputStatus 1x DIGITAL_IN 03 ReadHoldingRegisters 4x USERDATA 04 ReadInputRegisters 3x ANALOG_IN 20 14Hex ReadGeneralReference 6x EXTENDEDMEMORY not on all CPUs Writing function codes Address area 06 PresetSingleRegister 4x USERDATA Single 16 10Hex PresetMultipleRegisters 4x USERDATA Multiple 05 ForceSingleCoil Ox DIGITAL_OUT with BIT 15 OFHex ForceMultipleCoils Ox DIGITAL_OUT with 16 BIT GROUP 21 15Hex WriteGeneralReference 6x EXTENDEDMEMORY not on all CPUs WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Modicon controllers 6 7 Communication with Modicon Modbus Cleared methods of communication with Modbus TCP IP The following types of communication have been system tested and approved 252 Point to point connection Multipoint connection from an HMI device Modbus TCP IP client with up to 4 controllers with differing connections in each case The following types of connection are possible Connection to the Ethernet CPU interface of the TSX Unity Quantum Connection via the communicatio
185. denedede athens 2 5 3 Communication via protocol 4 ccccccc cece ces tecnecneeceecnececnaeeaeenecesteeceseesnesnsecaeeeseaeaes EEE 206 5 3 1 Requirements Of COMMUNICATION ccececesesse ects riiit aaie aaien iiai 206 5 3 2 Installing the COMMUNICATION CLIVEL ecceceseeeetectseceeeeeenectsecseeseenecesecsaseescesesasaeesseaeeseaeeas 207 5 3 3 Configuring the controller type and protocol 207 5 3 4 Configuring protocol ParaMeterS ceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeee ee ee eeteeeeteeee setae ee taeeeeetaeeeetaeeeeesiieeeee sete 208 5 3 5 Permitted data types Mitsubishi Protocol 4 210 5 3 6 Optimizing the configuration 0 00 2 eee eee eee eete eee e etter ee ee tae ee iE EEEE 212 5 3 7 COMMISSIONING COMPONEMS vices vesceses veaceacewanac vende AAS SAA rated vena rere ered 2 5 4 User Cala areas y 5 iter hihi ea iesi eE Mee AESA EA hada did A ee eae ee eae lee 214 5 4 1 Trend request and trend transfer sissies ennaa ana anaa aiaa 214 5 4 2 ED MAPPING dsini enisi aaa aa a aa aana iaaa akaa E AA Eana a aa AE Ta na Eae aa A EGA ANANT 216 5 4 3 Area PONEN kacapian e E ia clos cules EE E 217 5 4 3 1 General information on area pointers Mitsubishi MELSEC c cceccceseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeteees 217 5 4 3 2 Screen NUMbEr area POINTE cece ces seni naia eaaa Na aea SEEE 219 2 4 3 3 Date time area POUMeD sssrinin eaaa eaa E ataa aa a Seia 220 5 4 3 4 Date time controller area pointer eee c cece ce ene cne cee ceeene
186. des 48 alarm bits for example WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with LG controllers 4 3 User data areas 4 3 4 3 Step 2 Configuring an alarm Procedure Alarms fall into the following categories e Discrete alarms e Analog alarms You create alarms in the Discrete alarms and Analog alarms editors Discrete alarms The editor is shown in the figure below i SCRE ce pd DD e ee SKEIE ALAKMS Engine overtemperature Errors y Temperature sensor M3 0 lt No group gt Diagnosis Events Soe e Edit text Enter the text to display in runtime You can format the text characters The text may contain fields for the output of tags The text is output to the alarm view if this view was configured in the Screens editor e Specify number Every alarm has a number that must only occur once within the project It is used to uniquely identify the alarm and is displayed with the alarm in runtime The permitted range of values is 1 to 100 000 The alarm numbers are assigned consecutively in the WinCC flexible engineering system You can change the alarm numbers when assigning these to groups for example e Specify the alarm class Available alarm classes Error alarms This class must be acknowledged Warning alarms This class signals events with incoming and outgoing alarms WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008
187. ditor In the Connections editor you create and configure connections Select Connections from the project view and then open the shortcut menu Select New connection from in this shortcut menu The new connection will be created and opened in the work area Be Wind ewan NS tones Poem hei A Work area Object view The menu bar contains all commands required for operating WinCC flexible Available key combinations are indicated next to the menu command The toolbars contain the most frequently used buttons Select View gt Toolbars to show or hide the specific toolbars The H button of a toolbar can be used to show or hide specific buttons of this toolbar WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Working with connections 1 2 Elements and basic settings Work area All connections are visualized in the work area in tabular format You select the communication drivers from the table cells and edit the relevant connection properties To sort the table by its column entries simply click the column header Parameters tab Using the Parameters tab you can configure the settings for the communication drivers selected in the table Select the settings for the HMI the network and for the PLC Area pointer tab Using the Area pointers tab you can configure the area pointers of the connections 1 2 2 Parameters for connections Introduction Select the
188. due to errors If the transfer of data records is aborted due to errors the HMI device reacts as follows e Triggering by the operator in the recipe display Information in the status bar of the recipe view and output of system alarms e Triggered by function Output of system alarms e Triggering by PLC job No feedback message on the HMI device You can nonetheless evaluate the status of the transfer by querying the status word in the data record Sequence of the transfer when triggered by a configured function Reading from the PLC using a configured function Step Action 1 Check Status word 0 Yes No 2 The HMI device enters the recipe and data record number Abort with system specified in the function and the status Transfer active in the alarm data record 3 The HMI device reads the values from the PLC and stores them in the data record specified in the function 4 e If Yes was selected for the Overwrite function an existing data record is overwritten without any prompt for confirmation The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed e If No was selected for the Overwrite function and the data record already exists the HMI device aborts the job and enters 0000 1100 in the status word of the data record 5 The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 137
189. e Note Please note that not all HMI devices support job mailboxes TP 170A and Micro Panel do not support PLC jobs for example No Function 14 Setting the time BCD coded Parameter 1 Left byte Right byte hours 0 23 Parameter 2 Left byte minutes 0 59 Right byte seconds 0 59 Parameter 3 15 Setting the date BCD coded Parameter 1 Left byte Right byte weekday 1 7 Sunday Saturday Parameter 2 Left byte day 1 31 Right byte month 1 12 Parameter 3 Left byte year 23 User logon Logs the user on with the name PLC user at the HMI device with the group number transferred in Parameter 1 The logon is possible only when the transferred group number exists in the project Parameter 1 Group number 1 to 255 174 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with LG controllers 4 3 User data areas No Function 14 Setting the time BCD coded Parameter 2 3 24 User logoff Logs off the current user The function corresponds to the logoff system function Parameter 1 2 3 40 Transfer date time to PLC in the S7 format DATE_AND_TIME An interval of at least 5 seconds must be maintained between two successive jobs to prevent overload of the HMI device Parameter 1 2 3 41 Transfer date time to PLC In OP MP forma
190. e area pointer Function This area pointer is used to transfer the date and time from the HMI device to the PLC The PLC writes control job 41 to the job mailbox When it evaluating the control job the HMI device saves its current date and time to the data area configured in the Date time area pointer All definitions are coded in BCD format The Date Time area pointer when used in a project which contains multiple connections must be enabled for each configured connection The date time data area has the following structure Data word Left byte Right byte 15 7 0 n 0 Reserved Hour 0 to 23 n 1 Minute 0 to 59 Second 0 to 59 Time n 2 Reserved Reserved n 3 Reserved Weekday 1 to 7 1 Sunday n 4 Day 1 to 31 Month 1 to 12 Date n 5 Year 80 to 99 0 to 29 Reserved Note The entry of values from 80 to 99 in the Year data area returns the years 1980 through 1999 values from 0 to 29 return the years 2000 through 2029 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 220 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 4 User data areas 5 4 3 4 Date time controller area pointer Function This area pointer is used to transfer the date and time from the PLC to the HMI device Use this area pointer if the PLC is the time master The PLC loads the data area of the area pointer All definitions are coded in BCD format The HMI device reads the data cyclically within the configured acquis
191. e 2 0000 0010 Transfer is busy 4 0000 0100 Transfer completed without error 12 0000 1100 Transfer completed with error Possible causes of error when transferring data records Possible causes of error The section below shows possible error causes which lead to the cancellation of data record transfer e Tag address not set up on the PLC e Overwriting data records not possible e Recipe number does not exist e Data record number does not exist Note The status word may only be set by the HMI device The PLC may only reset the status word to zero Note The PLC may only evaluate the recipe and data record numbers when data inconsistency is detected if one of the conditions outlined below has been met e The data mailbox status is set to Transfer completed e The data mailbox status is set to Transfer completed with error WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 295 Communication with Modicon controllers 6 4 User data areas Reaction to an aborted transfer due to errors If the transfer of data records is aborted due to errors the HMI device reacts as follows e Triggering by the operator in the recipe display Information in the status bar of the recipe view and output of system alarms e Triggered by function Output of system alarms e Triggering by PLC job No feedback message on the HMI device You can nonetheless evaluate the status of the tran
192. e If the problems persist at the next startup contact Alarms cannot be restored or saved Customer Support delete Flash 270005 Persistent buffer damaged Alarms cannot be If the problems persist at the next startup contact restored Customer Support delete Flash 360 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Appendix 8 1 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 270006 Project modified Alarms cannot be restored The project was generated and transferred new to from the persistent buffer the HMI device The error should no longer occur when the device starts again 270007 A configuration problem is preventing the Update the operating system and then transfer your restore a DLL is missing a directory is unknown etc 280000 DPHMI alarms Connection project again to the HMI device Number Effect causes Remedy 280000 Connection is up because the cause of the interruption has been eliminated 280001 No more data is read or written Possible Check whether causes e The cable is plugged in e The cable is defective e The PLC is OK e The PLC does not respond is defective e The correct port is used ice i Restart the system if the system alarm persists e The wrong port is used for the connection e System overload 280002 The connection used requires a function block in the PLC The function block has responded Communi
193. e It is therefore unnecessary to configure an acquisition cycle WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Modicon controllers 6 4 User data areas Structure The area pointer is a data area in the memory of the PLC with a fixed length of 5 words 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1st word Current screen type 2nd word Current screen number 3rd word Reserved 4th word Current field number 5th word Reserved e Current screen type 1 for the root screen or 4 for the permanent window e Current screen number 1 to 32767 e Current field number 1 to 32767 6 4 3 3 Date time area pointer Function This area pointer is used to transfer the date and time from the HMI device to the PLC The PLC writes control job 41 to the job mailbox When it evaluating the control job the HMI device saves its current date and time to the data area configured in the Date time area pointer All definitions are coded in BCD format The Date Time area pointer when used in a project which contains multiple connections must be enabled for each configured connection The date time data area has the following structure Data word Left byte Right byte 15 7 0 n 0 Reserved Hour 0 to 23 n 1 Minute 0 to 59 Second 0 to 59 Time n 2 Reserved Reserved n 3 Reserved Weekday 1 to 7 1 Sunday n 4 Day
194. e Make sure when you use an array tag that it is not longer than 6 words In order to ensure that a signal transition is generated as soon as the acknowledgment bit is set the HMI device first resets the acknowledgment bit assigned to an error alarm There is a certain time based offset between these two operations due to the processing time of the HMI device Note The reset includes all alarm bits acknowledged since the last restart of Runtime The PLC may only read this area once If the alarm is acknowledged on the HMI device the bit is then set in the assigned acknowledgment tag on the PLC This allows the PLC to recognize that the error alarm has been acknowledged The figure below shows the pulse diagram Error alarm S I I I AL Acknowledgment l HMI device gt PLC l Arrival of the Reset of _ New error alarm acknowledgm bit via HMI device l error alarm WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 328 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Omron controllers 7 4 Commissioning components 7 4 Commissioning components 7 4 1 Commissioning components Transferring the PLC program to the PLC 1 Interconnect the PC with the CPU using the appropriate cable 2 Download the program files to the CPU 3 Then set the CPU to RUN Transferring project data to the HMI device 1 The HMI device must be in transfer mode in order to accept the project transf
195. e function an existing data record is overwritten without any prompt for confirmation The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed e If No was selected for the Overwrite function and the data record already exists the HMI device aborts the job and enters 0000 1100 in the status word of the data record 5 The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 319 Communication with Omron controllers 7 3 User data areas Writing to the PLC by means of configured function Step Action 1 Check Status word 0 Yes No 2 The HMI device enters the recipe and data record number Abort with system specified in the function and the status Transfer active in the alarm data record 3 The HMI device fetches the values of the data record specified in the function from the data medium and transfers the values to the PLC The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed 5 The control program can now evaluate the transferred data The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers Sequence of the transfer triggered by a job mailbox The transfer of data records between the HMI device and the PLC can be initiated by either one of these stations The two PLC jobs No 69 and No 70 are available for thi
196. e Acquisition cycles which are too short lead to unnecessary load on overall performance Set the acquisition cycle according to the rate of change of the process values The rate of temperature changes at a furnace for example is significantly slower compared to the speed rate of an electrical drive A time of approx 1 second is a benchmark for the acquisition cycle e Avoid any gaps when entering the alarm or screen tags in a data area e Changes in the PLC can only be detected reliably if these are available at least within the actual acquisition cycle e Seta maximum possible transmission rate Use arrays to handle discrete alarms and assign each alarm to one bit of the array tag instead of assigning these to any subelements You may only use tags of the N O I S and B file types and Int and UlInt data types for discrete alarms and arrays WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 2 Contiguring the Allen Bradley communication driver Screens The refresh rate of screens is determined by the type and volume of data to be visualized Only configure short acquisition cycles for objects which actually require shorter refresh cycles This procedure reduces update times Trends The HMI device always updates all bit triggered trends whose group bit is set in the Trend transfer area It resets the bits in the next cycle The group
197. e address ranges of the operands depending on the PLC they are selected as large as permitted by the protocol The user is thus not restricted when addressing the memory areas of the supported controllers Setting parameters for the MITSUBISHI communications module The settings on the HMI device and the communications modules must match In the controllers of the FX series the communication parameters are set using the special registers D8120 and D8121 On the interface modules of the A and Q series the communication parameters are set using switches On the A1SJ71UC24 R2 module the station number is always 0 The settings Computer link Dedicated protocol and Protocol format 4 must be selected WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 3 Communication via protocol 4 5 3 5 Permitted data types 210 Permitted data types Mitsubishi Protocol 4 The table lists the user data types that can be used when configuring tags and area pointers Name Operand Data type Output Y Bit 4 bit block 8 bit block 12 bit block 16 bit block 20 bit block 24 bit block 28 bit block 32 bit block Input X Bit 4 bit block 8 bit block 12 bit block 16 bit block 20 bit block 24 bit block 28 bit block 32 bit block Bit memory M Bit 4 bit block 8 bit block 12 bit block 16 bit block 20 bit block 24 bit
198. e adoption of the data type fails a default data type and a default address are used If the adoption of the address fails a default address is used Changing within a device family or changing the CPU type As described above there is an attempt to adopt the address and data type If an address or a data type needs to be adapted before it can be accepted for example because the new CPU controller does not support the previous address format e a message is displayed e the field is displayed on an orange background Change the relevant value to a valid value WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 43 Working with connections 1 6 Conversion when changing controllers 44 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 2 1 Communication with Allen Bradley 2 1 1 Communication between the HMI device and the PLC Allen Bradley Communications principle The HMI device and the PLC communicate using tags and the user data areas Tags The PLC and the HMI device exchange data using process values In your configuration create tags that point to an address on the PLC The HMI device reads and displays the value from the defined address The operator can also make an entry on the HMI device that is then written to the address on the PLC User data areas User data areas are intended for the exchan
199. e detection in the control program of the current HMI device operating mode e detection in the control program of the HMI devices ready to communicate state The Coordination area pointer has a length of two words Note The HMI device always writes the entire coordination area when updating the area pointer The control program may not make changes to the coordination area for this reason Assignment of bits in the Coordination area pointer Startup bit Operating mode Life bit 86 high order byte low order byte 15 8 7 2 4 0 1st word 2st word not assigned T E A EEEE L Startup bit Operation mode reserved fone a Life bit x assigned The startup bit is set briefly to 0 by the HMI device during startup It sets the bit permanently to 1 when startup is completed The operating mode bit is set to 1 as soon as the user switches the HMI device offline The state of the operating mode bit is 0 during normal operation of the HMI device You can determine the current operating mode of the HMI device by reading this bit The HMI device inverts the life bit at intervals of approximately one second You can check whether or not the connection to the HMI device is still up by querying this bit in the control program WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 3 User data areas 2 3 3 6 Project ID area pointer
200. e indicated 320002 No diagnosable alarm message error Select a diagnostics alarm from the ZP_ALARM selected alarm screen The unit associated with the alarm message could not be selected 320003 No alarm message error exists for the Select the defective unit from the overview screen selected unit The detail view cannot visualize any networks 320004 The required signal states could not be read by Check the consistency between the configuration on the PLC The faulty addresses cannot be found the display unit and the PLC program 320005 The project contains ProAgent elements which In order to run the project install the optional are not installed ProAgent diagnostic functions ProAgent package cannot be performed 320006 You have attempted to execute a function Check the type of the selected unit which is not supported in the current constellation 320007 No error triggering addresses were found on Switch the detail screen to STL layout mode and check the status of the addresses and exclusion addresses 366 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Appendix 8 1 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 320008 The diagnostic data stored in the configuration Transfer the project to the HMI device again are not synchronized with those in the PLC ProAgent can only indicate the diagnostic units 320009 The diagnostic data stored in the configura
201. e operator which key to press in a specific situation for example Requirements In order to enable control of an LED you must set up an LED tag or array tag in the PLC and declare this as the LED tag in the configuration data LED assignment Assign the LEDs to the LED tag bits when you configure the function keys Define the LED tag and the corresponding bit for each function key in the General group of the properties view The bit number bit identifies the first of two consecutive bits that control the following LED states LED function all Mobile Panels Operator Panels Bitn 1 Bit n and Multi Panels Panel PCs 0 0 Off Off 0 1 Rapid flashing Flashing 1 0 Slow flashing Flashing 1 1 Permanent signal Permanent signal WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 124 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 3 User data areas 3 3 3 Area pointer 3 3 3 1 General information on area pointers GE FANUC Introduction Area pointers are parameter fields WinCC flexible Runtime reads these parameter fields in order to obtain information about the location and size of data areas in the PLC The PLC and the HMI device interactively communicate read and write data for these data areas The PLC and the HMI device trigger defined interactions based on the evaluation of stored data The area pointers reside in PLC memory Their addresses are c
202. e which trend is currently displayed on the HMI device Trends can also be triggered without evaluation of the trend request area Trend transfer area 1 This area is used to trigger trends In your PLC program you set the bit assigned to the trend in the trend transfer area and set the trend group bit The trend group bit is the last bit in the trend transfer area The HMI device detects the trigger The HMI device reads either a value or the entire buffer from the PLC It then resets the trend bit and the trend group bit The following picture shows the structure of a trend transfer area high order byte low order byte Bit number 15 8 7 1st word nth word Trend group bit The trend transfer area must not be modified by the PLC program until the trend group bit has been reset Trend transfer area 2 Trend transfer area 2 is required for trends configured with a switch buffer The trend transfer areas 1 and 2 have a similar structure WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 4 User data areas Switch buffers The switch buffer is a second buffer for the same trend that can be set up during configuration While the HMI device reads the values from buffer 1 the PLC writes to buffer 2 If the HMI device is reading buffer 2 the PLC writes to buffer 1 This prevents the trend values being overwritten by the PLC whi
203. eans that you overwrite existing project data on the HMI device For corresponding detailed instructions refer to the HMI device manual Check whether the alarm settings meet requirements of your WinCC flexible project 3 Select Project gt Transfer gt Transfer settings to configure the transfer parameters before you transfer project data to the HMI device Select the used port Set the transfer parameters Select the target storage location Initiate the transfer of project data by clicking Transfer The project is compiled automatically All compilation and transfer steps are logged to a message window Message output on the configuration computer on successful completion of the transfer Transfer completed successfully The start screen appears on the HMI device WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 147 Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 4 Commissioning components Interconnecting the PLC with the HMI device 1 Interconnect the PLC with the HMI device using a suitable cable 2 The message Connection to PLC is established is output to the HMI device Note that users can edit the system alarm texts in WinCC flexible NOTICE Always observe the safety related information in the HMI device Manual when commissioning the device RF radiation emitted from devices such as mobile phones may cause unwanted operating sta
204. eceeesteeeee 2 1 3 Communication peer for the Allen Bradley E IP C LOgix protocol eeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeneeeeeaes 2 2 Configuring the Allen Bradley communication CLiVEL eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeaas 48 2 2 1 Communication via DF1 ProtoCol c cc eeceeeeseecceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseneaeesenaenaeees 48 2 2 1 1 Requirements of COMMUNICATION sesser a AAEE Eaa RR 48 2 2 1 2 Installing the COMMUNICATION CLIVEN eee eee cece eneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaeeeseeateeeeenaeeeaeeeeeeaaes 51 2 2 1 3 Configuring the controller type and protocol ssssseessrneseenesssnnasnnnnesnnnanennnantanannnnnennannanennaannaaad 51 2 2 1 4 Configuring protocol parameters isses anian aina Aa AANA ARRA AA ANA KARAER AERA 51 2 2 1 5 Permitted data types Allen Bradley DF1 cceceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeeeetaeeeeenaeeaaes 53 2A LO Optimizing the CONMQUPALION sssri A ceiagy aaueedaneee 54 2 2 1 7 Commissioning components Allen Bradley DF1 2 cc cceecceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeesneeesseeeeaes 55 2 2 2 Communication via DH485 protocol ccccccccesecesecceeeeceececeeceeeecnecnaecseenecnsenseceseeeeaeeeisaee of 2 2 2 1 Requirements Of COMMUNICATION eeeecec cee ce eects cnee cae ceeenecnsecseesaeeesesecssesaeeesesecsaeeaseaeaeeieens of 2 2 2 2 Installing the communication CNV ED wiaciiasassaiiavsinsatanstaaividdasianiaiiniianiuaua
205. ect ID Runtime checks consistency between the WinCC flexible R W project ID and the project in the PLC PLC job Triggering of HMI device functions by the control program R W R W The next sections describe the area pointers and their associated PLC jobs 7 3 3 2 Screen number area pointer Function The HMI device saves information about the screen called on the HMI device to the Screen number area pointer This allows the transfer of the current screen contents from the HMI device to the PLC The PLC can trigger specific reactions such as the call of a different screen Application Configure and enable the area pointer in Communication gt Connections before you put it into use You can create only one instance of the Screen number area pointer and only on one PLC The screen number is transferred spontaneously to the PLC That is it is always transferred when a new screen is activated on the HMI device It is therefore unnecessary to configure an acquisition cycle WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 309 Communication with Omron controllers 7 3 User data areas Structure The area pointer is a data area in the memory of the PLC with a fixed length of 5 words 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1st word Current screen type 2nd word Current screen number 3rd word Reserved 4th word Current field number 5
206. ed 260012 The passwords entered in the Change You have to log on to the system again Then enter Password dialog and the confirmation field are the identical password twice to be able to change the not identical password The password has not been changed User will be logged off 260013 The password entered in the Change You have to log on to the system again Then enter Password dialog is invalid because it is already a new password that has not been used before in use The password has not been changed User will be logged off WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 358 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Appendix 8 1 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 260014 You have tried unsuccessfully to log on three You can log on to the system with your correct times in succession password Only an administrator can change the You will be locked out and assigned to group assignment to a group no 0 260023 The password you entered does not meet the Enter a password that contains at least one number necessary security guidelines 260024 The password you entered does not meet the Enter a password that contains at least one necessary security guidelines character 260025 The password you entered does not meet the Enter a password that contains at least one special necessary security guidelines character 260028 Upon system start up an attempt to log on or Check the connection
207. ed in the corresponding Manual The pin assignment of the cables is described in the section Connecting cables for Mitsubishi WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 2 Communication via PG protocol 5 2 2 Installing the communication driver Driver for the HMI device The driver for connection to Mitsubishi controllers with the PG protocol is supplied with WinCC flexible and is installed automatically No special blocks are required in the PLC for the connection 5 2 3 Configuring the controller type and protocol Select the PLC For a connection to a Mitsubishi PLC over PG Protocol double click on Communication gt Connections in the project view of the HMI device Go to the Communication drivers column and select the protocol Mitsubishi FX The property view displays the parameters of the selected protocol You can edit the parameters at any time by double clicking Communication Connections in the project window of the HMI device Select the connection and edit its parameters in the properties dialog box Note The settings on the HMI device and on the PLC must match WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 200 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 2 Communication via PG protocol 5 2 4 Configuring protocol parameters Parameters to be set To edit the
208. ed length of 5 words Structure of the data area 15 0 1 Word Current recipe number 1 999 2 Word Current data record number 0 65535 3 Word Reserved 4 Word Status 0 2 4 12 5 Word Reserved e Status The status word word 4 can adopt the following values Value Meaning Decimal Binary 0 0000 0000 Transfer permitted data record free 2 0000 0010 Transfer is busy 4 0000 0100 Transfer completed without error 12 0000 1100 Transfer completed with error Possible causes of error when transferring data records Possible causes of error 136 The section below shows possible error causes which lead to the cancellation of data record transfer Tag address not set up on the PLC Overwriting data records not possible Recipe number does not exist Data record number does not exist Note The status word may only be set by the HMI device The PLC may only reset the status word to zero Note The PLC may only evaluate the recipe and data record numbers when data inconsistency is detected if one of the conditions outlined below has been met e The data mailbox status is set to Transfer completed e The data mailbox status is set to Transfer completed with error WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 3 User data areas Reaction to an aborted transfer
209. ed range of values is 1 to 100 000 Consecutive alarm numbers are assigned by WinCC flexible You can change the alarm numbers when assigning these to groups for example e Specify the alarm class Available alarm classes Error alarms This class must be acknowledged Warning alarms This class signals events with incoming and outgoing alarms WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Modicon controllers e Assign trigger tag 6 4 User data areas In the Trigger tag column you link the configured alarm with the tag created in step 1 All tags with permitted data types are shown in the selection list e Specify the bit number In the bit number column specify the relevant bit position in the created tag Remember that the way the bit positions are counted does notdepend on the particular PLC With Modicon controllers the bit positions are counted as follows CPUs of the series Premium und Micro you configure How the bit positions are Left byte Right byte counted In the PLCs of the 984 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 series Compact Quantum und Momentum in WinCC flexible and for 15 14 13 12 11 10 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Analog alarms The only difference between discrete alarms and analog alarms is that you configure a limit value rather than a bit number The alar
210. editor in Address Connection failure A connection failure to a device on which the project ID area pointer is configured results in all the other connections in the project being switched to offline This behavior has the following prerequisites e You have several configured connections in a project e You are using the project ID area pointer in at least one connection Causes which may set connections offline e The PLC is not available e The connection has been switched offline in the engineering system 6 4 3 7 PLC job area pointer Function The PLC can use the job mailbox to transfer jobs to the HMI device to trigger corresponding actions on the HMI device These functions include for example e Display screen e Set date and time WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 276 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with Modicon controllers Data structure Job mailboxes 6 4 User data areas The first word of the job mailbox contains the job number Depending on the job mailbox up to three parameters can be transferred Word Left byte Right byte n 0 0 Job number n 1 Parameter 1 n 2 Parameter 2 n 3 Parameter 3 The HMI device evaluates the job mailbox if the first word of this job is unequal to zero This means that the parameters must be entered in the job mailbox first followed by the job number When the HMI device accepts the job mailbox the f
211. een Reload the record from the storage location or retain which contains a recipe view in which a record the current values is already selected 290031 While saving it was detected that a record with Overwrite the record or cancel the action the specified number already exists 290032 While exporting records it was detected that a Overwrite the file or cancel the process file with the specified name already exists 290033 Confirmation request before deleting records WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 373 Appendix 8 1 System alarms Number 290040 Effect causes A record error with error code 1 that cannot be described in more detail occurred The action is canceled It is possible that the record was not installed correctly on the PLC Remedy Check the storage location the record the Data record area pointer and if necessary the connection to the PLC Restart the action after a short time If the error persists contact Customer Support Forward the relevant error code to Customer Support 290041 A record or file cannot be saved because the storage location is full Delete files no longer required 290042 An attempt was made to execute several recipe actions simultaneously The last action was not executed Trigger the action again after waiting a short period 290043 Confirmation request before storing records
212. eesieaes 4 2 6 Optimizing the CONFIQUIATION 2 0 2 eee A a E a A 4 3 User Cala ane aS sees ices ceet Sate eecie E aes ee ee ele deeds 164 4 3 1 Trend request and trend transfer siioni niiae i ai inaen Ea aa aa 164 4 3 2 LED Mapping neiii neriu ania aiaa aaa a aaa daaa aaeain iasad ideaa eaaa 166 4 3 3 Area POUMG Mic cea tearscecceaacetevantdaacacanaatnannecvasacedsdccncuae aa E E E EEEa 4 3 3 1 General information on area pointers LG GLOFA GM 0 ceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeee see eeeeeeeeeeeenneees 167 4 3 3 2 Screen NUMbeEr ar a POINTE asis erasana aaea RE BAE ana Eae EA a 169 4 3 3 3 Date time area POMC isisisi seisseen ce e Aa neater ae TEE eai 170 4 3 3 4 Date time controller area POinter cccccccceeeceeceececeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceaeaeceeeesecennaeeeeeeeeteeeeeseteees 4 3 3 5 Coordination area POInter eccecccscceceeenecnsecseeseeneceseeseeeeccesesecsasesseaaesecsaseseesaensteesaeesaenes 172 4 3 3 6 Project ID area pointer s sccccccsteccesssteecevtincececvesnhes anA EAR EEE iE 4 3 3 7 Job mailbox area POiNter siriana aaa aa a aaa aaa a aaa G aa a aaa ia aaa 4 3 3 8 Data mailbox area pointer cccccccceceeee cece eeeeeeeeaee sent cece eaaeeeeeeeeceeaeaeeeeeeseseneaeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeea 4 3 4 Events alarms and acknowledgment c ce eceeceeeeeeesecaeceeeeeeeseaeaeeeeeeesesaeaeeeeeeeseeeaees 183 4 3 4 1 General information on events alarms and acknowledgment
213. eesnnaeeeeees 111 2 4 9 Connecting cable PP3 RS 232 for Allen Bradley ecccceceeseeeeeceeeeeeeeceneaeeeeeeeeesnnaeeeeees 2 4 10 Connecting cable PP4 RS 485 for Allen Bradley cccccccesccceceeeeeeecenaeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenees 2 4 11 Connecting cable MP1 RS 485 for Allen Bradley cccccccesecceceeeeeeececaeeeeeeeseeeneeeeeeeeteees Communication with GE Fanuc Controllers ccccccceececcceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseaeeeeaaeeeeesaaeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaas 3 1 Communication with GE Fanuc cccccccccecenecne sense ceeeecseaecseeectsecaececneeesecsecsaseeeeseeaeaees 115 3 1 1 Communication partner GE Fanuc 0 ccccccceeeseeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeneee erence a AA A 115 3 1 2 Communication between HMI device and controller GE Fanuc 3 2 Configuring the communication driver for GE Fanu cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 3 2 1 Requirements of COMMUNICATION ccccceeeceece eee ee eeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeeeceacaeeeeeeeeceneaeeeeeesesensaaeeerenees 3 2 2 Installing the Communication Crivel ccccceccceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeseccacaeeeeeeseceenaeeeeeeseeeeeess 3 2 3 Configuring the controller type and protocol eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeetaeeeeeteeeeesieeeeniaeees 3 2 4 Configuring protocol ParaMeterS cecececeeeeeeeeeeeeee ee ee eete settee ee ee eee ee eeeeeetaeeeeteeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaa 118 3 2 5 Permitted datatypes GE Famue jccccc
214. eft byte minutes 0 59 Right byte seconds 0 59 Parameter 3 15 Setting the date BCD coded Parameter 1 Left byte Right byte weekday 1 7 Sunday Saturday Parameter 2 Left byte day 1 31 Right byte month 1 12 Parameter 3 Left byte year 23 User logon in Parameter 1 Logs the user on with the name PLC user at the HMI device with the group number transferred The logon is possible only when the transferred group number exists in the project Parameter 1 Group number 1 to 255 314 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Omron controllers 7 3 User data areas No Function 14 Setting the time BCD coded Parameter 2 3 24 User logoff Logs off the current user The function corresponds to the logoff system function Parameter 1 2 3 40 Transfer date time to PLC in the S7 format DATE_AND_TIME An interval of at least 5 seconds must be maintained between two successive jobs to prevent overload of the HMI device Parameter 1 2 3 41 Transfer date time to PLC In OP MP format An interval of at least 5 seconds must be maintained between successive jobs in order to prevent overload of the HMI device Parameter 1 2 3 46 Update tags Causes the HMI device to read the current value of the PL
215. en Bradley communication driver 2 2 Configuring the Allen Bradley communication driver 2 2 1 Communication via DF1 protocol 2 2 1 1 Requirements of communication Connection The connection between the HMI device and the Allen Bradley PLC defines the interface parameters and the bus address It is not necessary to install special communication blocks in the PLC Note Allen Bradley offers a wide range of communications adapters for DH485 DH and DH networks for the integration of DF1 nodes Corresponding connections via KF2 and KF3 module have been released Siemens AG has neither tested nor released any other connections Point to point connection over DF1 protocol The DF1 protocol only supports the implementation of point to point connections RS 232 15 9 Pin Sub D RS 232 15 9 Pin Sub D RS 232 RS 422 15 9 Pin Sub D DF1 DF1 DF1 Channel 0 8 Pin Mini DIN Channel 0 9 Pin Sub D Channel 0 25 Pin Sub D PLC5x SLC5 03 SLC5 04 Micro Logix SLC5 05 1 Panel PC and PC only support RS 232 2 DF1 does not support point to point connection to the SLC500 SLC501 and SLC502 PLCs 3 MicroLogix ML1500 LRP also supports channel 1 9 pin sub D Use the 6XV1440 2K __ cable to connect the 15 pin RS 232 port and the 1747 CP3 cable to connect the 9 pin RS 232 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 48 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Allen Bradley c
216. enaeeeeeneeeaes 6 3 4 Configuring protocol ParaMeterS e cece cee ceneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeaeeeeceaeeeseeaaeeseeaeeeseenaeeseeneeeaes 6 3 5 Permitted data types Modbus TCP IP sssrinin aaa aa aa EANAN RAKAR 6 3 6 Optimizing the configuration 2 2 2 ee eeeeeeeeette eect eeeeeeeeteeeeeeseeeaeeeseeaeeeseeaaeeeeecaeeeseeaeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeaaes 264 6 3 7 COMMISSIONING COMPONENKS ceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeesenaeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeseeaaeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeseenneeaes 6 4 SOP CALA ANCES E E E E E E ol 267 6 4 1 Trend request and trend transfer cccccccccecceceetecneeceeceeenecnseeaeeseeeeensecessasesseecaeeaseaeeeieens 267 6 4 2 LED Mapping aeda iada a a aa ead aiid ENE AAAA REA aa 269 6 4 3 Area PONE Ensign aae E E aaaea S EERE E E i 270 6 4 3 1 General information on area pointers Modicon Modbus c ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseeeeeeeenaees 2 0 6 4 3 2 Screen number area POINLEL cece cece ccc ene eeecetecneeteeeeeeeesaeeaeeaeeeeaeesseseeeeenseceeseeeeeetaeeaeel 2 2 6433 Date time area POINTED cece cece teeta e A aa R E 2 3 6 4 3 4 Date time controller area POINtEl cece ccc ctectee cee ce eee caeceeeaeeecaecaeeseenestsecsaeeeseeeseaeeaeel 274 6 4 3 5 Coordination area POINter cece cece knna aa taba abaa Eiai piae iaaa a a aA 275 6 4 3 6 Project ID area POINTED oo taai aoaia aa i E a aa 2 6 6 4 3 PLO job area POINTEN esris piniienn ainena a eiae deanna aa a Ea Eea ai iadaan eha 2
217. ence of the transfer triggered by a job mailbox The transfer of data records between the HMI device and the PLC can be initiated by either one of these stations The two PLC jobs No 69 and No 70 are available for this type of transfer No 69 Read data record from PLC PLC gt DAT PLC job no 69 transfers data records from the PLC to the HMI device The PLC job is structured as follows Left byte LB Right byte RB Word 1 0 69 Word 2 Recipe number 1 999 Word 3 Data record number 1 to 65535 Word 4 Do not overwrite existing data record 0 Overwrite existing data record 1 No 70 Write data record to PLC DAT gt PLC PLC job No 70 transfers data records from the HMI device to the PLC The PLC job is structured as follows Left byte LB Right byte RB Word 1 0 70 Word 2 Recipe number 1 999 Word 3 Data record number 1 to 65535 Word 4 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 180 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with LG controllers 4 3 User data areas Sequence when reading from the PLC with PLC job PLC gt DAT no 69 Step Action 1 Check Status word 0 Yes No 2 The HMI device enters the recipe and data record number specified in Abort without the job and the status Transfer active in the data record return message 3 The HMI device reads the values from the PLC and saves these to the data record
218. end buffer This setting is defined in configuration data Bit triggered trends are normally used to represent fast changing values One example might be the injection pressure in the production of plastic parts To trigger bit triggered trends create suitable external tags in the Tags editor of WinCC flexible The tags must be linked with the trend areas The HMI device and PLC then communicate with each other over these trend areas The following areas are available for trends e Trend request area e Trend transfer area 1 e Trend transfer area 2 required only with switch buffers WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 214 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 4 User data areas Tags of the D Operand are permitted They must be of the data type Word Int or an array tag of the data type Word Int During configuration you assign a bit to a trend This sets a unique bit assignment for all areas Note In conjunction with the Mitsubishi PG protocol tags of the Operand D only of data type Word or an array tag of the data type Word are permitted Trend request area The HMI device sets corresponding bits in the trend request area when you open a screen which contains one or several trends on the HMI device After deselecting the screen the HMI device resets the relevant bits in the trend request area Using the trend request area the PLC can recogniz
219. end group bit is the last bit in the trend transfer area The HMI device detects the trigger The HMI device reads either a value or the entire buffer from the PLC It then resets the trend bit and the trend group bit The following picture shows the structure of a trend transfer area high order byte low order byte Bit number 0 15 alls 1st word nth word Trend group bit The trend transfer area must not be modified by the PLC program until the trend group bit has been reset WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 123 Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 3 User data areas Trend transfer area 2 Trend transfer area 2 is required for trends configured with a switch buffer The trend transfer areas 1 and 2 have a similar structure Switch buffers The switch buffer is a second buffer for the same trend that can be set up during configuration While the HMI device reads the values from buffer 1 the PLC writes to buffer 2 If the HMI device is reading buffer 2 the PLC writes to buffer 1 This prevents the trend values being overwritten by the PLC while the trend is being read out by the HMI device 3 3 2 LED mapping Function The function keys of the keyboard units of the Operator Panel OP Multi Panel MP and Panel PC are equipped with LEDs These LEDs can be controlled by the PLC This functionality can be used to activate an LED in order to tell th
220. eneeeeaees 249 6 1 2 Communication between HMI device and controller Modicon 6 2 Communication via Modbus RTU protocol cceceeececeeceeeeeeesececaeeeeeeeeeeecaeceeeeesesenaeeeeeeeeeeees 6 2 1 Requirements of COMMUNICATION 2 cece ceecceceeeeeeeeeeceneeeceeeeeeceacaeceeeeeedcaaeeeeeeeesecenaeeeeeeeseieeees 6 2 2 Installing the COMMUNICATION driverinn aa tenes aa KAN a Ka A AE 6 2 3 Configuring the PLC type and protocol cece eeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeseaeeeseenaeeeeenaeeeaes j 6 2 4 Configuring protocol ParaMeterS eccccceceeee eee ceneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseeaeeseedaeeeeeenaeeseeneeeaes 256 6 2 5 Permitted data types Modbus RTU 00 ee eeeeeeeeeeeee ee eeeeeeeeeneeeeeteeeeeeseneaeeeeeneeeeteeaeeeeeeeeeetee es 6 2 6 Optimizing the configuration 22 2 eee eeeete eect teeeeeeeteeeeeeteeeaeeeeecaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeseiaeeeeeeeeeeaes 6 2 7 COMMISSIONING COMPONEMIS suspeses esii e ai thea ened ined A eed 6 3 Communication via Modbus TCP IP protocol ececceceeeeeeeceeaeeeeeeeeeseeaeceeeeeeesenieeeeeeeeeees 6 3 1 Requirements of COMMUNICATION c ccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeteeeenaececeetedecaaeeeeeseseennieaeeeeeeteeneeess 6 3 2 Installing the COMMUNICATION CLIVEL eee eee eect eter ee ee tetee ee taeeeeetaeeeetaeeeeeseeeeesieeeersieeeer stented 6 3 3 Configuring the PLC type and protocol cc eceeeceeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeseaeeese
221. ents alarms and acknowledgments 5 4 4 1 General information on events alarms and acknowledgments Function Messages return information about the PLC or HMI device operating states or problems to the user on the HMI device The message texts consist of configurable texts and or tags with actual values Operational messages and events must be distinguished The programmer defines what is an operational message and what is an error alarm Operational message An operational message indicates a state Example e Motor on e PLC in manual mode Alarm message An error alarm indicates a malfunction Example e Valve does not open e Excess motor temperature Alarms indicate exceptional operational states and must therefore be acknowledged Acknowledgment To acknowledge error alarms e Operator input on the HMI device e The PLC sets an acknowledgment bit Triggering alarms Triggering of an alarm in the PLC e Setting a tag bit e Measured value limits exceeded The location of tags or of the tag array is defined in WinCC flexible ES The tag or array must be set up on the PLC WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 4 User data areas 5 4 4 2 Step 1 Creating tags or an array Procedure You create tags or arrays in the Tags editor The dialog is shown in the following figure e Define the tag and array names e Select t
222. equal to 63 for the highest station address HSA Data bits Under Data bit you can select between 7 or 8 bits Parity Select None Even or Odd under Parity Stop bits Select 1 or 2 Stop bits PLC dependent parameters e Station address 160 Under Station address you can specify the station number of the Cnet module of the LG GLOFA GM PLC Values from 0 through 31 are permitted WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with LG controllers 4 2 Configuring the LG GLOFA GM communication driver 4 2 5 Permitted data types LG GLOFA Permitted data types The table lists the user data types that can be used when configuring tags and area pointers Name Area Addressing Data type Internal memory M 0 to max 64 KB BOOL BYTE WORD DOUBLE WORD Output Q Base 0 63 BOOL BYTE WORD Slot 0 7 DOUBLE WORD Card 0 63 Input l Base 0 63 BOOL BYTE WORD Slot 0 7 DOUBLE WORD Card 0 63 Symbolic tags Named max 16 byte long string BOOL BYTE WORD consisting of DOUBLE WORD SINT INT A Z 0 9 _ DINT USINT UINT UDINT TIME STRING Special features of connections to LG GLOFA GM Area pointers can only be created in the M area Trigger tags for discrete alarms can only be tags in the M area and only for the data type Word Array tags may only be used for discrete alarms and trends Array tags only
223. er Possible scenarios Initial startup The HMI device does not yet contain any configuration data in the initial startup phase The project data and runtime software required for operation must be transferred from the configuration computer to the device The HMI device automatically changes to transfer mode The transfer dialog box opens with a connection message on the HMI device Recommissioning Recommissioning means that you overwrite existing project data on the HMI device For corresponding detailed instructions refer to the HMI device manual Check whether the alarm settings meet requirements of your WinCC flexible project 3 Select Project gt Transfer gt Transfer settings to configure the transfer parameters before you transfer project data to the HMI device Select the used port Set the transfer parameters Select the target storage location Initiate the transfer of project data by clicking Transfer The project is compiled automatically All compilation and transfer steps are logged to a message window Message output on the configuration computer on successful completion of the transfer Transfer completed successfully The start screen appears on the HMI device WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 329 Communication with Omron controllers 7 4 Commissioning components Interconnecting the PLC with the HMI device
224. er This setting is defined in configuration data Bit triggered trends are normally used to represent fast changing values One example might be the injection pressure in the production of plastic parts To trigger bit triggered trends create suitable external tags in the Tags editor of WinCC flexible and interconnect those to trend areas The HMI device and PLC then communicate with each other over these trend areas The following areas are available for trends e Trend request area e Trend transfer area 1 e Trend transfer area 2 required only with switch buffers WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 78 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 3 User data areas For communication drivers DF1 and DH485 Tags of the data type N O I S or B are valid They must be of the data type UInt or an array tag of the data type UlInt Assign a bit to the trend in configuration data This sets a defined bit assignment for all trend areas For communication driver Ethernet IP Valid are tags of data type Int or array tags of data type Int Assign a bit to the trend in configuration data This sets a defined bit assignment for all trend areas Trend request area The HMI device sets corresponding bits in the trend request area when you open a screen which contains one or several trends on the HMI device After deselecting the screen the HMI device resets the relevant
225. er to be Abort with system written and the status Transfer active in the data record alarm 2 The HMI device writes the current values to the PLC If the recipes have synchronized tags the changed values are synchronized between the recipe display and tags and then written to the PLC 3 The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed If required the control program can now evaluate the transferred data 5 The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers Note The status word may only be set by the HMI device The PLC may only reset the status word to zero Note The PLC may only evaluate the recipe and data record numbers when data inconsistency is detected if one of the conditions outlined below has been met e The data mailbox status is set to Transfer completed e The data mailbox status is set to Transfer completed with error WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 140 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 3 User data areas 3 3 4 Events alarms and acknowledgments 3 3 4 1 General information on events alarms and acknowledgments Function Messages return information about the PLC or HMI device operating states or problems to the user on the HMI device The message texts consist of configurable texts and or tags with actual values Operational messages and events must be dis
226. erating mode bit is set to 1 as soon as the user switches the HMI device offline The state of the operating mode bit is 0 during normal operation of the HMI device You can determine the current operating mode of the HMI device by reading this bit The HMI device inverts the life bit at intervals of approximately one second You can check whether or not the connection to the HMI device is still up by querying this bit in the control program WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Modicon controllers 6 4 User data areas 6 4 3 6 Project ID area pointer Function You can check whether the HMI device is connected to the correct PLC at the start of runtime This check is important when operating with several HMI devices The HMI device compares a value stored on the PLC with the value specified in configuration data This ensures compatibility of configuration data with the control program If discrepancy is detected a system alarm is displayed on the HMI device and runtime is stopped Application Settings in configuration data required when using this area pointer e Define the version of configuration data Possible values between 1 and 255 Enter the version in the Device settings gt Device settings editor in Project ID e Data address of the value for the version that is stored in the PLC Enter the data address in the Communication gt Connections
227. ers Allen Bradley DF1 Allen Bradley DH485 6 LG GLOFA GM 1 Mitsubishi protocol 4 209 Modicon 2 Omron Hostlink Multilink Possible cause of erro Transferring data a 136 178 228 281 318 PROFIBUS Protocol Device based dependency 24 35 Protocol parameters Allen Bradley DF1 Allen Bradley DH485 6 Allen Bradley Ethernet IP GE Fanuc LG GLOFA GM 160 Mitsubishi PG 201 Mitsubishi protocol 4 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Modicon 256 Omron Hostlink Multilink R Representatives 7 S Select the PLC LG GLOFA GM Mitsubishi PG 200 Mitsubishi protocol 4 Modicon 255 Omron Hostlink Multilink Selecting the PLC Allen Bradley DF 1 Allen Bradley DH485 Allen Bradley Ethernet IP Synchronous Transferring data 91 135 i 227 280 317 System alarm Meaning Parameters T Training center 7 Transfer Transferring data m area pointer 84 128 170 220 273 Treh pointer 81 h25 167 ef OVE Area bod screen a et ei ar A 272 309 Coordination area pointer 86 130 172 222 Salt record are pointer 90 176 221 31 Date time PLC area pointer REAR Job mailbox area pointer 87 h31 h73 223 276 bes B22 input in the recipe view a 140 182 232 Pre job 94 138 180 Possible cause of error 178 228 281 31 Project R v pointer 87 131 173 Tozi 223 276 SE Ded big of a configured function 93 91 135 177 227 280
228. ervals of approximately one second You can check whether or not the connection to the HMI device is still up by querying this bit in the control program WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with LG controllers 4 3 User data areas 4 3 3 6 Project ID area pointer Function You can check whether the HMI device is connected to the correct PLC at the start of runtime This check is important when operating with several HMI devices The HMI device compares a value stored on the PLC with the value specified in configuration data This ensures compatibility of configuration data with the control program If discrepancy is detected a system alarm is displayed on the HMI device and runtime is stopped Application Settings in configuration data required when using this area pointer e Define the version of configuration data Possible values between 1 and 255 Enter the version in the Device settings gt Device settings editor in Project ID e Data address of the value for the version that is stored in the PLC Enter the data address in the Communication gt Connections editor in Address Connection failure A connection failure to a device on which the project ID area pointer is configured results in all the other connections in the project being switched to offline This behavior has the following prerequisites e You have several configured connections in
229. es Jobs are not processed because the address configured in the PLC does not exist has not been set up Remedy Change the address or set up the address in the PLC 210001 Jobs are not processed because read write access to the address configured in the PLC is not possible Change the address or set up the address in the PLC in an area which allows read write access 210002 Jobs are not executed because the address format of the area pointer does not match the internal storage format Internal error 210003 The job buffer is processed again because the last error status has been eliminated return to normal operation 210004 It is possible that the job buffer will not be processed 210005 A control request with an illegal number was initiated Check the PLC program 210006 An error occurred while attempting to execute the control request As a result the control request is not executed Observe the next previous system alarms Check the parameters of the control request Recompile the configuration 220000 WinCC channel adapter alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 220001 The tag is not downloaded because the Change the configuration associated communication driver HMI device does not support the download of Boolean discrete data types 220002 The tag is not downloaded because the Change the configuration associated com
230. es Yes Yes Yes Multi Panels MP 177 MP 270B MP 277 MP 370 MP 377 Screen number Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Data record Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Date time Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Date time PLC Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Coordination Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Project ID Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Job mailbox Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 37 Working with connections 1 5 Device based dependency WinCC flexible Runtime WinCC flexible Runtime Screen number Yes Data record Yes Date time Yes Date time PLC Yes Coordination Yes Project ID Yes Job mailbox Yes 1 The devices OP 73 micro TP 170micro and TP 177micro can only communicate with a S7 200 PLC 1 5 4 Device based dependency of alarms Introduction Alarms are issued to the HMI device They give information regarding the operating states or operating faults on the PLC or the HMI device The alarm texts consist of configurable texts and or tags with actual values We differentiate between the following alarms e Warning alarms A warning alarm shows a status e Error alarms An error alarm shows an operating fault The programmer defines what a warning alarm and what an error alarm is Device based dependency of alarms and words The following tables show the maximum number of alarms and words for different HMI devices WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 38 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Working with connec
231. ess or written to an address configured for this tag directly without redirecting the values by means of interim memory Initiating the transfer of data records There are three ways of triggering the transfer e Operator input in the recipe view e PLC jobs The transfer of data records can also be triggered by the PLC e Triggering by configured functions If the transfer of data records is triggered by a configured function or by a PLC job the recipe display on the HMI device remains operable The data records are transferred in the background Simultaneous processing of several transfer requests is however not possible In this case the HMI device rejects the other transfer requests with a system alarm Transfer without synchronization If you select asynchronous transfer of data records between the HMI device and PLC there is no coordination over the common data areas It is therefore unnecessary to set up a data area during configuration Asynchronous data record transfer can be a useful alternative for example when e The system is capable of excluding the risk of uncontrolled overwriting of data by the communication peer e The PLC does not require information about the recipe number and data record number e The transfer of data records is triggered by the operator of the HMI device WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 90 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with Allen Bradley controllers
232. est station address must be less than or equal to 63 if you set a transmission rate of 1 5 Mbaud at OP 73 or OP 77A If connecting a TP 170A to a SIMATIC S7 station at a transmision rate of 1 5 MBaud on PROFIBUS DP set a value less than or equal to 63 for the highest station address HSA Data bits Select 7 bits or 8 bits under Databits Parity Select None Even or Odd under Parity Stop bits Select 1 or 2 Stop bits Network parameters e Checksum 208 Under Checksum you can choose between Yes and No WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 3 Communication via protocol 4 PLC dependent parameters e Station address Under Station address set the station number of the PLC The following are permitted 0 15 e CPU type Set the PLC type to which the HMI device is connected at the CPU type parameter The following entries are possible FXON FX1S FX2C FX1N FX2N FX2NC A AnS AnN AnA Anu Q QnA QnAS The PLC type must be selected for the following reasons The maximum frame length of the PLC is not exceeded at runtime Protocol differences between CPUs of the PLC types FX A AnS and AnN 5 character addressing and the larger CPUs 7 character addressing can be implemented Addressing for X and Y hexadecimal or octal is adapted Instead of checking th
233. et up on the PLC WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 195 Communication with LG controllers 4 3 User data areas 4 3 4 2 Procedure Step 1 Creating tags or an array You create tags or arrays in the Tags editor The dialog box is shown below z Werd ef e Define the tag and array names e Select the connection to the PLC The connection must already be configured in the Connections editor e Select the data type The available data types depend on the PLC being used If you select an illegal data type the tag will not be available in the Discrete alarms and Analog alarms editors The following data types are supported for LG Industrial Systems controllers GLOFA GM GM4 GM6 and GM7 WORD WORD DOUBLE WORD SINT INT PLC Permitted data types Discrete alarms Analog alarms DINT USINT UINT UDINT 184 e Enter an address The tag addressed here contains the bit that triggers the alarm As soon as the bit of the tag is set on the PLC and is transferred to the HMI device in the configured acquisition cycle the HMI device recognizes the alarm as incoming After the same bit is reset on the PLC the HMI device recognizes the alarm as outgoing e Select the array elements If the number of array elements is increased you can select more bit numbers in the Discrete alarms editor An array with a length of three words provi
234. ey DF 1 Allen Bradley DH 485 Allen Bradley Ethernet IP GE Fanuc LG GLOFA GM Mitsubishi FX Mitsubishi P4 Modicon Modbus RTU Modicon Modbus TCP IP Omron Telemecanique Mobile Panels Mobile Panel 170 Mobile Panel SIMATIC S7 PPI IF1B SIMATIC S7 MPI IFiB SIMATIC S7 IFiB PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC S7 PROFINET SIMATIC S5 AS511 IF1A connection box 3 SIMATIC S5 IF1A connection PROFIBUS DP box 30 OP 73micro IF1B IF1B IF1B 177 DP IF1B IF1B IF1B IF1B TP 170micro IF1B IF1B IF1B Mobile Panel 177 PN Ethernet TP 177micro IF1B IF1B IF1B Mobile Panel Mobile Panel 277 8 277 IWLAN Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN IF1B IF1B IF1B Ethernet Ethernet Wireless IF1A connection box WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Working with connections SIMATIC 500 505 NITP SIMATIC 500 505 PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC HMI HTTP Protocol OPC Allen Bradley DF 1 Allen Bradley DH 485 Allen Bradley Ethernet IP GE Fanuc LG GLOFA GM Mitsubishi FX Mitsubishi P4 Modicon Modbus RTU Modicon Modbus TCP IP Omron Telemecanique Mobile Panel 170 IF1A RS232 IF1B RS422 IF2 RS232 IF1B connection box IF1A IF1B connection box IF2 8 IF1A IF1B connection box IF2 8 IF1A IF1B connection box IF2 8 IF1A IF1B connection box IF2 8 IF1A IF1B connectio
235. ff 260032 It was not possible to log the user on to the Check the user data on the SIMATIC Logon Server SIMATIC Logon Server as his account is blocked The new user is not logged in If a different user was logged on before then this user is logged off 260033 The action change password or log on user Check the connection to the SIMATIC Logon Server could not be carried out and its configuration for example 1 Port number 2 IP address 3 Server name 4 Functional transfer cable Or use a local user WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 373 Appendix 8 1 System alarms Number 260034 Effect causes The last logon operation has not yet ended A user action or a logon dialog can therefore not be called The logon dialog is not opened The user action is not executed Remedy Wait until the logon operation is complete 260035 The last attempt to change the password was not completed A user action or a logon dialog can therefore not be called The logon dialog is not opened The user action is not executed Wait until the procedure is complete 260036 There are insufficient licenses on the SIMATIC Logon Sever The logon is not authorized Check the licensing on the SIMATIC Logon Server 260037 There is no license on the SIMATIC Logon Sever A logon is not possible It is not possible to log on via the SIMATIC Logon
236. figure below shows the pulse diagram 1 Error alarm l I 4 i I I 1 Acknowledgment HMI device PLC Arrival of the Reset of ie I New error alarm acknowledgm bit via HMI device l error alarm WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Modicon controllers 6 5 Connecting cables for Modicon Modbus 6 5 Connecting cables for Modicon Modbus 6 5 1 Communication cables for Modbus RTU protocol 6 5 1 1 Connecting cable 6XV1440 1K RS 232 for Modicon Order number 6XV1440 1K HMI device Modicon connector 1 connector 2 15 pin D Sub connector 9 pin D Sub connector shift latch screw locking cable outlet for pin 1 cable outlet for pin 1 metal enclosure V 24 metal enclosure V 24 Enclosure Shield GND TD lt RxD D DTR lt DSR 4 gt RTS lt CTS gt Shield with large area contact to casing Cable 2 x 0 14 mm shielded max length 3 7 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 292 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Modicon controllers 6 5 Connecting cables for Modicon Modbus 6 5 1 2 Connecting cable PP1 RS 232 for Modicon Point to point cable 1 PLC gt PC HMI device Modicon Modbus connector 1 connector 2 9 pin D Sub female connector 9 pin D Sub connector enclosure shield GND GND RxD TxD TxD Y 4 DTR DSR RTS TAATA CTS Cables 3
237. flexible the WinCC flexible Information System contains detailed information The information system contains instructions examples and reference information in electronic form Basic Knowledge Requirements General knowledge in the field of automation engineering is required to understand this manual You should also have experience of using PCs running under the Windows 2000 or Windows XP operating systems A knowledge of VBA or VBS is required for advanced configuration by using scripts Scope of the manual This manual is valid for the WinCC flexible 2008 software package Position in the information scheme This manual is part of the SIMATIC HMI documentation The information below presents an overview of the information landscape of SIMATIC HMI WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Preface User manual WinCC flexible Micro describes the engineering basics based on the WinCC flexible Micro engineering system ES WinCC flexible Compact Standard Advanced describes the engineering basics based on the WinCC flexible Compact WinCC flexible Standard and WinCC flexible Advanced engineering systems ES WinCC flexible Runtime Describes how to commission and operate your Runtime project on a PC WinCC flexible Migration Describes how to convert an existing ProTool project to WinCC flexible Describes how to convert an existing WinCC project to WinC
238. for discrete alarms and trends Array tags only of the 4x or MW and 6x areas and data types Int and Int are permitted If an existing Modbus RTU project is switched over to Modbus TCP IP protocol the character sequence in the string may differ 6 3 6 Optimizing the configuration Acquisition cycle and update time Discrete alarms 264 The acquisition cycles for the Area pointers and the acquisition cycles of the tags specified in the configuration software are decisive factors for the actual update times that can be achieved The update time is the sum of the acquisition cycle transmission time processing time To achieve optimum update times remember the following points during configuration e Keep the individual data areas as small as possible and as large as necessary e Define data areas that belong together as belonging together You can improve the update time by setting up one large data area instead of several small areas e If the acquisition cycles you select are too short this is detrimental to the overall performance Set the acquisition cycle to suit the rate of change of the process values The rate of temperature changes at a furnace for example is significantly slower compared to the speed rate of an electrical drive As a general guideline the acquisition cycle should be approx 1 second e Put the tags of an alarm or a screen in one data area without gaps e To allow changes in the PLC to be
239. g the communication driver Omron Hostlink Multilink Areas for newer PLCs Areas for old PLCs Areas CS and CJ PLCs CPU status CPU status V0 CIO HR H Range WinCC flex 0 511 AR A LR n a DM D T C T C CPU type CPU type Special features of connections with Omron Hostlink Multilink Area pointers can only be created in DM I O HR AR and LR areas As the Trigger tag for discrete alarms only tags in the DM I O HR AR and LR areas are permitted These tags are only valid for the data types DEC and DEC Array tags may only be used for discrete alarms and trends Only tags in the DM I O HR AR and LR areas and only of the DEC and DEC data types are permitted for array tags Addressing PLCs of the CV CS and CJ series With PLCs of the CV CS and CJ series timers 0 2047 are addressed with T C 0 2047 Counters 0 2047 must be addressed in ProTool with an offset of 2048 T C 2048 4095 correspond to counters 0 2047 Counters and timers with addresses higher than 2047 cannot be addressed over Hostlink Example If you want to address counter C20 the address in ProTool must be T C 20 2048 T C 2068 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 302 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Omron controllers 7 2 Configuring the communication driver Omron Hostlink Muttilink 7 2 6 Optimizing the configuration Acquisition cycle and u
240. g the controller type and protocol Selecting the PLC Double click Communication gt Connections in the project window of the HMI device to configure a connection over DH485 protocol with an Allen Bradley PLC Select the Allen Bradley DH485 protocol from the Communication drivers column in the working area The properties dialog box displays the parameters of the selected protocol You can edit the parameters at any time by double clicking Communication gt Connections in the project window of the HMI device Select the connection and edit its parameters in the properties dialog box Note The HMI device and PLC settings must match WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 61 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 2 Contiguring the Allen Bradley communication driver 2 2 2 4 Configuring protocol parameters Parameters to be set Double click Communication gt Connections in the project window of the HMI device to configure the parameters Allen Bradley DH485 is selected in the Communication drivers column You can now enter or modify the protocol parameters in the Properties window Device dependent parameters 62 Interface Select the HMI port to which the Allen Bradley PLC is connected at the Interface entry For more detailed information refer to the HMI device manual Type You can select the RS 232 or RS 485 port at this entry depending on the
241. ge of special data and are set up only when such data is used Data for which user data areas are required for example e Job mailboxes e Transfer of data records e Date time synchronization e Sign of life monitoring The user data areas are created while configuring in WinCC flexible You assign the corresponding addresses in the PLC WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 45 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 1 Communication with Allen Bradley 2 1 2 Introduction Connectable PLCs Communication peers for the DF1 and DH485 Protocol Allen Bradley This section describes communication between the HMI device and the Allen Bradley PLC from the following series SLC500 SLC501 SLC502 SLC503 SLC504 SLC505 hereafter referred to as SLC PLC5 MicroLogix These PLCs communicate by means of their PLC specific protocols DF 1 point to point connection DH over KF2 module and DF1 multipoint connection DH485 multipoint connection DH485 over KF3 module and DF1 multipoint connection The communication drivers listed below support Allen Bradley PLCs DF1 DF1 DF1 DF1 DH485 DH485 point to point point to point multipoint multipoint point to point multipoint over KF2 module over KF3 module to DH LAN to DH485 LAN PLC RS 232 RS 422 RS 232 RS 422 RS 232 RS 232 RS 485 SLC500 X X X
242. gnostics event cannot be visualized The system returns internal error 2 170004 An S7 diagnostics event cannot be visualized The system returns an internal error of error class 2 error number 3 170007 It is not possible to read the S7 diagnostics buffer SSL because this operation was canceled with an internal error of class 2 and error code 3 350 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Appendix 180000 Misc common alarms 8 1 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 180000 A component OCX received configuration data with Install a newer component a version ID which is not supported 180001 System overload because too many actions Several remedies are available running in parallel Not all the actions can be e Generate the alarms at a slower rate polling executed some are rejected e Initiate scripts and functions at greater intervals If the alarm appears more frequently Restart the HMI device 180002 The screen keyboard could not be activated Reinstall WinCC flexible Runtime Possible causes TouchInputPC exe was not registered due to a faulty Setup 190000 Tag alarms Number 190000 Effect causes It is possible that the tag is not updated 190001 The tag is updated after the cause of the last error state has been eliminated return to normal operation 190002 The tag is n
243. h Set PG PC interface Restart the system WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 373 Appendix 8 1 System alarms WinCC flexible Runtime was closed in Task Manager Or Another application e g STEP7 with different bus parameters is active and the driver cannot be started with the new bus parameters transmission rate for example Number Effect causes Remedy 140005 No tag updating or writing is executed because the Use a different HMI device address HMI device address is incorrect possibly too high Verify the connection and check whether the PLC is switched on Check the parameter definitions in the Control Panel using Set PG PC interface Restart the system 140006 No tag updating or writing is executed because the Select a different baud rate in WinCC flexible baud rate is incorrect according to module profile communication peer etc 140007 Tags are not updated or written because the bus Check the user defined bus profile profile is incorrect see 1 Check the connection and if the PLC is switched on The following parameters could not be written to Check the parameter definitions in the Control Panel the registry using Set PG PC interface 1 Tslot Restart the system 2 Tqui 3 Tset 4 MinTsdr 5 MaxTsdr 6 Trdy 7 Tid1 8 Tid2 9 Gap Factor 10 Retry Limit 140008 No tag updating or writing is executed
244. h PLC job PLC gt DAT no 69 Step Action 1 Check Status word 0 Yes No 2 The HMI device enters the recipe and data record number specified in Abort without the job and the status Transfer active in the data record return message 3 The HMI device reads the values from the PLC and saves these to the data record defined in the PLC job 4 e If Overwrite was selected in the job an existing data record is overwritten without any prompt for confirmation The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed e If Do not overwrite was selected in the job and the data record already exists the HMI device aborts the job and enters 0000 1100 in the status word of the data record 5 The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers Sequence of writing to the PLC using PLC job DAT gt PLC no 70 Step 1 Action Check Status word 0 Yes No The HMI device enters the recipe and data record number specified in the job and the status Transfer active in the data record Abort without return message The HMI device fetches the values of the data record specified in the function from the data medium and writes the values to the PLC The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed The control program can now evaluate the transferred data The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further t
245. h an Allen Bradley PLC Select the Allen Bradley E IP C Logix protocol from the Communication drivers column in the working area The properties dialog box displays the protocol parameters You can edit the parameters at any time by double clicking Communication gt Connections in the project window of the HMI device Select the connection and edit its parameters in the properties dialog box WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 67 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 2 Contiguring the Allen Bradley communication driver 2 2 3 4 Configuring protocol parameters Allen Bradley Ethernet IP Parameters to be set 1 2 Double click Communication gt Connections in the project window Select the Allen Bradley E IP C Logix protocol from the Communication drivers column in the working area Protocol parameters you can enter or edit in the properties dialog box Device specific parameters Interface Select the HMI port to be used for networking the device The default is Ethernet For more detailed information refer to the Manual of the HMI device Type The IP protocol is set permanently Note The ISO protocol is not released for the current version of WinCC flexible Note Configure the IP address and the subnet mask manually on the HMI device PLC specific parameters 68 Address Set the IP address or host name of the Ether
246. h it requires time If a new job mailbox is entered again immediately in the job mailbox it may take some time before the HMI device can process the next job mailbox The next job mailbox will only be accepted when there is computing capacity available Timeout response with TCP IP Ethernet Due to the use of the TCP IP protocol the breakdown of a connection is detected at the earliest after approximately one minute Communication failure cannot be reliably detected if no tags are requested for example no output tags in the current screen Configure an area pointer coordination for each PLC This setting ensures that even in the situation described above the breakdown of the connection will be detected after approximately two minutes 6 3 7 Commissioning components Transferring the PLC program to the PLC 1 Interconnect the PC with the CPU using the appropriate cable 2 Download the program files to the CPU 3 Then set the CPU to RUN WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Modicon controllers 6 3 Communication via Modbus TCP IP protocol Transferring project data to the HMI device 1 The HMI device must be in transfer mode in order to accept the project transfer Possible scenarios Initial commissioning The HMI device does not yet contain any configuration data in the initial commissioning phase The project data and runtime software required for o
247. he alarm As soon as the bit of the tag is set on the PLC and is transferred to the HMI device in the configured acquisition cycle the HMI device recognizes the alarm as incoming After the same bit is reset on the PLC the HMI device recognizes the alarm as outgoing e Select the array elements If the number of array elements is increased you can select more bit numbers in the Discrete alarms editor An array with a length of three words provides 48 alarm bits for example WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Modicon controllers 6 4 User data areas 6 4 4 3 Step 2 Configuring an alarm Procedure Discrete alarms 288 We differentiate between the following alarms e Discrete alarms e Analog alarms You create alarms in the Discrete alarms and Analog alarms editors The editor is shown in the figure below ol ae ete pd et i ry G S CKEIE ALAH Hi Errors Diagnosis Events Warnings System e Edit text Enter the text to display in runtime You can format the text characters The text may contain fields for the output of tags The text is output to the alarm view if this view was configured in the Screens editor e Specify number Every alarm has a number that must only occur once within the project It is used to uniquely identify the alarm and is indicated with the alarm in runtime The permitt
248. he connection to the PLC The connection must already be configured in the Connections editor e Select the data type The available data types depend on the PLC being used If you select an illegal data type the tag will not be available in the Discrete alarms and Analog alarms editors The following data types are supported for Mitsubishi Electric controllers PLC Permitted data types Discrete alarms Analog alarms MELSEC FX FXO FXOn Word Bit 4 Bit Block 8 Bit Block FX1n FX2n Int 1 12 Bit Block 16 Bit Block AnA AnN AnS Anu 20 Bit Block 24 Bit Block QnA QnAS 28 Bit Block 32 Bit Block Word DWord Double 2 Int Dint 1 Real 1 1 Not with Mitsubishi PG protocol 2 Not with Mitsubishi protocol 4 e Enter an address The tag addressed here contains the bit that triggers the alarm As soon as the bit of the tag is set on the PLC and is transferred to the HMI device in the configured acquisition cycle the HMI device recognizes the alarm as incoming After the same bit is reset on the PLC the HMI device recognizes the alarm as outgoing e Select the array elements If the number of array elements is increased you can select more bit numbers in the Discrete alarms editor An array with a length of three words provides 48 alarm bits for example WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 234 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Mitsubishi control
249. he contents of the e mail are lost 70039 The syntax of the e mail address is incorrect or Check the e mail address of the recipient contains illegal characters The contents of the e mail are discarded 70040 The syntax of the e mail address is incorrect or contains illegal characters 70041 The import of the user management was aborted Check your user management or transfer it again to due to an error the panel Nothing was imported 70042 The value range for the tags has been exceeded Check the desired calculation and correct it if while executing the system function necessary The system function calculation has not been carried out 70043 The value range for the tags has been exceeded Check the desired calculation and correct it if while executing the system function necessary The system function calculation has not been carried out 80000 Archive alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 80001 The log specified is filled to the size defined in Store the file or table by executing a move or copy percent and must be stored elsewhere function 80002 A line is missing in the specified log 80003 The copying process for logging was not successful In this case it is advisable to check any subsequent system alarms too 80006 Since logging is not possible this causes a In the case of databases check whether the permanent loss of the functionality corresponding data sou
250. he trends whose bit is set in this area It then resets the bits The group bit in the PLC program can only be set again after all bits have been reset by the HMI device If large numbers of job mailboxes are sent in quick succession this can lead to overload in the communication between the HMI device and PLC The HMI device confirms acceptance of the job mailbox by entering the value zero in the first data word of the job mailbox The HMI device now processes the job for which it requires time If a new job mailbox is entered again immediately in the job mailbox it may take some time before the HMI device can process the next job mailbox The next job mailbox will only be accepted when there is computing capacity available 3 3 User data areas 3 3 1 Trend request and trend transfer Function A trend is the graphic visualization of one or more values from the PLC The value is read either time or bit triggered depending on the configuration Time triggered trends 122 The HMI device reads in the trend values cyclically at an interval specified in the configuration Time triggered trends are suitable for continuous processes for example the operating temperature of a motor WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 3 User data areas Bit triggered trends By setting a trigger bit in the trend request tag the HMI device either reads in a
251. hen commissioning the device RF radiation emitted from devices such as mobile phones may cause unwanted operating states WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 2 Contiguring the Allen Bradley communication driver 2 2 3 Communication via Allen Bradley Ethernet IP 2 2 3 1 Communication requirements Allen Bradley Ethernet IP Connection Components for integrating the HMI device in the Allen Bradley PLC e Existing Ethernet network in which the PLCs are located e Cross over Ethernet cable directly connected to the Ethernet port of the CPU or communication module HMI device communication with an Allen Bradley PLC basically requires only the cable connection It is not necessary to install special communication blocks in the PLC 2 2 3 2 Installing the communication driver Allen Bradley Ethernet IP Driver for the HMI device The drivers for connections over Allen Bradley Ethernet IP to an Allen Bradley PLC are included in the WinCC flexible software and are installed automatically The communication driver is named Allen Bradley E IP C Logix It is not necessary to install special communication blocks in the PLC 2 2 3 3 Configuring the PLC type and protocol Allen Bradley Ethernet IP Selecting the PLC Double click Communication gt Connections in the project window of the HMI device to configure a connection wit
252. her e The value range has been exceeded e lilegal characters have been entered e The maximum permitted number of users has been exceeded Remedy Enter a practical value or delete any unneeded users 230002 The currently logged in user has not the required authorization The system therefore discards the input and restored the previous value Log on as a user with appropriate authorization 230003 Changeover to the specified screen failed because the screen is not available configured The current screen remains selected Configure the screen and check the screen selection function 230005 The value range of the tag has been exceeded in the I O field The original value of the tag is retained Observe the range of values for the tag when entering a value 230100 During navigation in the web browser the system returned a message which may be of interest to the user The web browser continues to run but may not fully show the new page Navigate to another page 230200 The connection to the HTTP channel was interrupted due to an error This error is explained in detail by another system alarm Data is no longer exchanged Check the network connection Check the server configuration 230201 The connection to HTTP channel was established Data is exchanged WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 373 Appendi
253. hich actually require shorter refresh cycles The HMI device always updates all bit triggered trends whose group bit is set in the Trend transfer area It resets the bits in the next cycle The group bit in the PLC program can only be set again after the HMI device has reset all bits A high rate and volume of PLC jobs transferred may lead to overload in communication between the HMI device and the PLC The HMI device confirms acceptance of the Job mailbox by entering the value zero in the first data word of the job mailbox The HMI device now processes the job for which it requires a certain time slice It may take the HMI device some time to process a new Job mailbox which is transferred in immediate succession to the job mailbox The next Job mailbox is only accepted if sufficient computing resources are available WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 2 Contiguring the Allen Bradley communication driver Timeout response with TCP IP Ethernet The Ethernet IP protocol causes a minimum delay of approx one minute in the detection of communication failure Communication failure cannot be reliably detected if no tags are requested for example no output tags in the current screen Configure an area pointer coordination for each PLC This setup delays the detection of communication failure only by approx two minutes even in the aforementi
254. ht byte seconds 0 59 Parameter 3 15 Setting the date BCD coded Parameter 1 Left byte Right byte weekday 1 7 Sunday Saturday Parameter 2 Left byte day 1 31 Right byte month 1 12 Parameter 3 Left byte year 23 User logon Logs the user on with the name PLC user at the HMI device with the group number transferred in Parameter 1 The logon is possible only when the transferred group number exists in the project Parameter 1 Group number 1 to 255 88 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 3 User data areas No Function 14 Setting the time BCD coded Parameter 2 3 24 User logoff Logs off the current user The function corresponds to the logoff system function Parameter 1 2 3 40 Transfer date time to PLC in the S7 format DATE_AND_TIME An interval of at least 5 seconds must be maintained between two successive jobs to prevent overload of the HMI device Parameter 1 2 3 41 Transfer date time to PLC In OP MP format An interval of at least 5 seconds must be maintained between successive jobs in order to prevent overload of the HMI device Parameter 1 2 3 46 Update tags Causes the HMI device to read the current value of the PLC tags whose update ID matches the value transferred in Parameter 1 Functio
255. ia PG protocol 5 2 5 Permitted data types Mitsubishi PG Permitted data types The table lists the User data types that can be used when configuring tags and area pointers Name Operand Data type Input X Bit 4 Bit Block 8 Bit Block 12 Bit Block 16 Bit Block 20 Bit Block 24 Bit Block 28 Bit Block 32 Bit Block Output Y Bit 4 Bit Block 8 Bit Block 12 Bit Block 16 Bit Block 20 Bit Block 24 Bit Block 28 Bit Block 32 Bit Block Flag M Bit 4 Bit Block 8 Bit Block 12 Bit Block 16 Bit Block 20 Bit Block 24 Bit Block 28 Bit Block 32 Bit Block Timer actual value T Word 16 bit counter actual value C 16 bit Word 32 bit counter actual value C 32 bit Double Data register D Bit 9 Word Double String IEEE Float 1 In the case of write accesses note With the bit data type in the D operand after changing the specified bit the entire word is written back to the PLC There is no check to determine whether any other bits in the word have changed As a result the PLC only has read access to the specified word WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 202 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 2 Communication via PG protocol Special features of a connection with the Mitsubishi Electric PG protocol Area pointers can only be created with the D operand The trigger tag for discrete alarms can on
256. ialization of the It is recommended to save the backups or to delete logs An attempt has been made to create backups them in order to release memory of the tables and this has failed No logging or backup has been performed 80044 The export of a log was interrupted because The export resumes automatically Runtime was closed or due to a power failure It was detected that the export needed to be resume when Runtime restarted 80045 The export of a log was interrupted due to an error The export is repeated automatically Check in the connection to the server or at the server e The connection to the server itself e f the server is running e If there is enough free space on the server 80046 The destination file could not be written while Check whether there is enough space on the server and it you have permission to create the log file 344 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Appendix 8 1 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 80047 The log could not be read while exporting it Check whether the storage medium is correctly inserted 80049 The log could not be renamed while preparing to Check whether the storage medium is correctly export it inserted and if there is sufficient space on the medium The job can not be completed 80050 The log which shall be exported is not closed Make sure the CloseAll Logs system function is The job can not be c
257. ias tag in the PLC Example Local 3 0 data cannot be addressed in WinCC flexible If for Local 3 O in the PLC the alias MyOut is defined you can address with WinCC flexible via MyOut Data WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 71 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 2 Contiguring the Allen Bradley communication driver Addressing syntax Notation of addresses The tables below define the notation of addressing options in E IP C Logix Access to arrays basic data types and structure elements Data types Basic data types Arrays Bits Structure elements Type PLC tag Program tag PLC tag Program tag PLC tag Program tag PLC tag Program tag Address Tag name Programname tagname Array tag Program name array tag Tagname bitnumber Programname tagname bitnumber Structure tag Structure element Program name structure tag structure element Note Bit addressing with the data types Bool Real and String is not permitted and will cause an addressing fault Description of the syntax 72 Syntax description is ea tagname x y z tagname x y z bitnumber e The defines an optional single instance of an expression e The defines an optional expression with multiple single instances The address string length may not exceed 128 characters WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual
258. ication Part 2 108 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 4 Connecting cables for Allen Bradley 2 4 6 Connecting cable 1761 CBL PMO02 RS 232 for Allen Bradley Allen Bradley cable 1761 CBL PM02 For interconnecting the HMI device RS 232 9 pin sub D Micro Logix AlC HMI device Allen Bradley connector 1 connector 2 9 pin D Sub female connector 8 pin mini DIN connector screw locking cable outlet to the rear cable outlet to the rear e a enclosure l l l l l l Lo lo 1 DCD H i lt l l 2 TxD lt l l l 3 l l RxD J gt l 5 GND l l l I l l 8 l l RTS lt I l I l 7 i CTS D oy oy Shield with large area contact to housing at both ends Cable 5 x 0 14 mm2 shielded max length 15 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 109 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 4 Connecting cables for Allen Bradley 2 4 7 Connecting cable PP1 RS 232 for Allen Bradley PP1 connecting cable For interconnecting the HMI device RS 232 15 pin sub D Micro Logix HMI device Allen Bradley Micro Logix connector 1 connector 2 15 pin D Sub connector 8 pin mini DIN connector shift latch cable outlet to the rear cable outlet to the rear enclosure Shield with large area contact to housing at both ends Cable 5 x 0 14 mm
259. ication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Length key see catalog ST 80 49 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 2 Configuring the Allen Bradley communication driver The cable connection of PLCs to the DH data bus is defined in the Allen Bradley documentation The HMI port to be used is defined in the corresponding Manual The pin assignment of the cables is described in the section Connecting cables for Allen Bradley DF1 protocol with multipoint connection over KF3 module on DH485 LAN 50 SLC500 SLC5 01 SLC5 03 SLC5 04 SLC5 02 SLC5 03 SLC5 05 Micro Logix Channel 0 1 8 Pin Mini DIN RS 232 15 9 Pin Sub D Channel 1 8 Pin RJ45 Channel 0 9 Pin Sub D DF1 RS 232 DH485 RS 232 DH485 RS 232 DH485 RS 232 8 Pin AMP SDL 9 Pin Sub D 9 Pin Sub D 25 Pin Sub D DH485 RS 485 1 MicroLogix ML1500 LRP also supports Channel 1 9 pin sub D Connecting cables HMI panel interface used For connection to Interface Module KF3 RS 232 15 pin 6XV1440 2L and adapter 25 pin female female RS 232 9 pin Allen Bradley cable 1784 CP10 and 25 pin female female adapter Length key see catalog ST 80 The HMI port to be used is defined in the corresponding Manual The pin assignment of the cables is described in the section Connecting cables for Allen Bradley WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2
260. ice System alarm parameters System alarms may contain encrypted parameters which are relevant to troubleshooting because they provide a reference to the source code of the runtime software These parameters are output after the text Error code Meaning of the system alarms All the system alarms that can be displayed are listed below The system alarms are divided into different ranges 10000 Printer alarms Number Effect cause Remedy 10000 The print job could not be started or was canceled Check the printer settings cable connections and the due to an unknown error Faulty printer setup Or power supply No authorization is available for accessing the Set up the printer once again Obtain a network printer network printer authorization Power supply failure during data transfer If the error persists contact the Hotline 10001 No printer is installed or a default printer has not Install a printer and or select it as the default printer been set up 10002 Overflow of the graphics buffer for printing Up to Allow sufficient intervals between successive print jobs two images are buffered SIMATIC HMI WinCC flexible 2008 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 337 Appendix 8 1 System alarms Number Effect cause Remedy 10003 Images can now be buffered again 10004 Overflow of the buffer for printing lines in text mode Allow
261. ich it requires a certain time slice It may take the HMI device some time to process a new PLC job which is transferred in immediate succession to the job mailbox The next PLC job is only accepted if sufficient computing resources are available Setting network parameters The HMI device and PLC network nodes have the same priority in the DH485 protocol The current token holder controls the bus until it has passed the token to the node with the next higher node number Items to observe in order to optimize bus parameters e The bus nodes must be allocated consecutive addresses starting at 1 in order to avoid any interruption of token passing e The Max bus address parameter setting must correspond with the highest bus node address used 2 2 2 7 Commissioning components Allen Bradley DH485 Transferring the PLC program to the PLC 1 Interconnect the PC with the CPU using the appropriate cable 2 Download the program files to the CPU 3 Then set the CPU to RUN WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 65 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 2 Contiguring the Allen Bradley communication driver Transferring project data to the HMI device 1 The HMI device must be in transfer mode in order to accept the project transfer Possible scenarios Initial startup The HMI device does not yet contain any configuration data in the initial startup phase The project data an
262. ified to be imported could not be Check found e The file name e Ensure that the file is in the specified directory 290020 Alarm reporting that the download of records from the HMI device to the PLC has started 290021 Alarm reporting that the download of records from the HMI device to the PLC was completed 290022 Alarm reporting that the download of records Check in the configuration whether due to an error e The recipe number exists e The record number exist e The Overwrite function parameter is set 290023 Alarm reporting that the download of records from the PLC to the HMI device has started 290024 Alarm reporting that the download of records from the PLC to the HMI device was completed 290025 Alarm reporting that the download of records Check in the configuration whether due to an error e The recipe number exists e The record number exist e The Overwrite function parameter is set 290026 An attempt has been made to read write a Set the record status to zero record although the record is not free at present This error may occur in the case of recipes for which downloading with synchronization has been configured 290027 Unable to connect to the PLC at present Asa Check the connection to the PLC result the record can neither be read nor written Possible causes No physical connection to the PLC no cable plugged in cable is defect or the PLC is switched off 290030 This alarm is output after you selected scr
263. iggered by the controller or the HMI device Alarm level Operational level of the HMI device in which the alarms are displayed Area pointer Required for data exchange between HMI device and controller It contains information on the location of data areas on the controller Alarm reporting Printout of alarms and system messages at the same time as the screen display Alarm time Time between generation and clearance of an alarm Combo box Box for setting a parameter one value can be selected from those displayed Configuration Specifying basic settings alarms and screens for a specific plant using the ProTool configuration software Configuration computer Generic term for programming devices and PCs on which configurations are created Display duration Time between an alarm being generated and being cleared WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 373 Appendix 8 3 Glossary Display function Events Field Flash memory Forced printout Hard copy Job mailbox Function that causes a change in the displayed information for example alarm level display alarm buffer display screen display Indicates certain statuses of the machine or plant connected to the controller Reserved area in configured or fixed texts for output and or input of values Programmable memory that can be erased quickly and then written to again Automatic printout of the alarms and
264. important when operating with several HMI devices The HMI device compares a value stored on the PLC with the value specified in configuration data This ensures compatibility of configuration data with the control program If discrepancy is detected a system alarm is displayed on the HMI device and runtime is stopped Application Settings in configuration data required when using this area pointer e Define the version of configuration data Possible values between 1 and 255 Enter the version in the Device settings gt Device settings editor in Project ID e Data address of the value for the version that is stored in the PLC Enter the data address in the Communication gt Connections editor in Address Connection failure A connection failure to a device on which the project ID area pointer is configured results in all the other connections in the project being switched to offline This behavior has the following prerequisites e You have several configured connections in a project e You are using the project ID area pointer in at least one connection Causes which may set connections offline e The PLC is not available e The connection has been switched offline in the engineering system 5 4 3 7 Job mailbox area pointer Function The PLC can use the job mailbox to transfer jobs to the HMI device to trigger corresponding actions on the HMI device These functions include for example e Display screen
265. ination over the common data areas It is therefore unnecessary to set up a data area during configuration Asynchronous data record transfer can be a useful alternative for example when e The system is capable of excluding the risk of uncontrolled overwriting of data by the communication peer e The PLC does not require information about the recipe number and data record number e The transfer of data records is triggered by the operator of the HMI device WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Modicon controllers 6 4 User data areas Reading values When a read job is triggered the values are read from the PLC addresses and transferred to the HMI device e Triggering by the operator in the recipe view The values are downloaded to the HMI device You can then process edit or save these values for example e Triggering by a function or PLC job The values are saved immediately to the data volume Writing values When a write job is triggered the values are written to the PLC addresses e Triggering by the operator in the recipe view The current values are written to the PLC e Triggering by a function or PLC job The current values are written to the PLC from the data medium Transfer with synchronization Modicon If you select synchronous transfer both communication partners set status bits in the common data area You can use this mech
266. ing cable 6XV1440 2L 105 6XV1440 2K 104 6XV1440 2V 107 Allen Bradley cable 1747 CP3 Allen Bradley cable 1761 CBL PM02 109 Allen Bradley cable 1784 CP10 PP1 connecting cable 110 PP2 for Allen Bradley 111 PP3 connecting cable PP4 connecting cable Connecting cables 6XV1440 2P for Mitsubishi PG protocol GE Fanuc LG GLOFA GM 159 Mitsubishi Electric using protocol 4 MP1 connecting cable 114 Omron Hostlink Multilink 298 Point to point cable 1 Point to point cable 2 Point to point cable 3 Point to point cable PP2 for Omron 332 PP1 for adapter HE693SNP232A PP2 connecting cable PP3 connecting cable PP4 connecting cable Connection Allen Bradley DF 1 Allen Bradley DH485 Allen Bradley Ethernet IP LG GLOFA GM Modicon 254 261 Omron Hostlink Multilink 116 158 198 253 297 293 294 376 Connection cable 6XV1440 2R for Mitsubishi PG protocol 6XV1440 1K Connecting cable PPS with RJ 45 connector Connecting cable PP6 with RJ 45 connector 154 Mitsubishi PG Modicon MP1 for Mitsubishi protocol 4 247 MP2 for Mitsubishi protocol 4 248 Multipoint cable 1 Multipoint cable 1 MP TP PC Multipoint cable 12 Multipoint cable 2 RS422 MP TP PC Multipoint cable MP1 Multipoint cable MP8 Point to point cable 3 Point to point cable 4 Point to point cable PP2 for Omron PP1 for Mitsubishi protocol 4 242 PP2 for Mitsubishi protocol 4 PP3 for Mitsubishi protocol 4 PP4 for Mitsubishi proto
267. ing figure shows the dialog for configuring an acknowledgment Discrete Alarms z ol j DISCRETE ALARMS ngine overtemperature Errors a Temperature sensor M3 0 ms lt No group gt M m General gt pg gt J amer infotext Tag Temperature sensor M w T EE tag gt m Process ht a i Bit 1 th b g m Trigger gt Events Distinction in terms of acknowledgment e Acknowledgment on the HMI device e Acknowledgment by the PLC Acknowledgment by the PLC In Acknowledgment PLC tag you configure the tag or the array tag and the bit number based on which the HMI device can recognize an acknowledgment by the PLC A bit set in the tag triggers acknowledgment of the assigned error alarm bit at the HMI device This tag bit returns a function similar to acknowledgment on the HMI device which is triggered by pressing the ACK button for example The acknowledgment bit must be located in the same tag as the bit for the error alarm WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 195 Communication with LG controllers 4 3 User data areas Reset the acknowledgment bit before setting the bit in the alarm area again The figure below shows the pulse diagram Error alarm Acknowledgment PLC HMI device Arrival of the TO Reset Al New error alarm via PLC I acknowledgm bit l error alarm gt Acknow
268. ing the communication driver Omron Hostlink Multilink User data areas 7 2 7 2 1 Connector Cable 298 User data areas are intended for the exchange of special data and are set up only when such data is used Data for which user data areas are required for example e Job mailboxes e Transfer of data records e Date time synchronization e Sign of life monitoring The user data areas are created while configuring in WinCC flexible You assign the corresponding addresses in the PLC Requirements for communication Omron Configuring the communication driver Omron Hostlink Multilink The connection of the HMI device to an OMRON PLC is essentially restricted to the physical connection of the HMI device No special blocks are required in the PLC for the connection Connect the HMI device to the Hostlink Multilink port of the CPU RS 232 The following cables are available to connect the HMI device to an Omron PLC Port on the HMI Omron PLC device RS232 9 pin RS232 I O RS422 9 pin RS422 periphery port terminals connect or RS232 9 pin PP1 Programming cable standard Omron cable RS232 15 pin 6XC1440 2X RS232 over Multipoint cable 1 converter RS422 9 pin PP2 Multipoint cable 2 length key see catalog The HMI device port to be used is defined in the corresponding Manual WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part
269. ion which you can access via the search function in our service amp support database e A forum where users and experts from all over ther world exchange ideas e You local Automation amp Drives representative e Information about on site service repairs spare parts Much more can be found on our Services pages WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 8 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Table of contents Prefa esse 2oieaceacaesstalecisSa ts eecabe vets baw alctias sl vuccckded dived dvcees ga alten id dishesdeaudavduyits a a a E EE a RE 1 Working with CONNECTIONS siisii tainen aana ana aaraa aen aada aa aa aa aa a aAa a aE da an EE 1 1 PaaS a eect nate eee 1 1 1 COMMUNICATION DASICS srren cenne eE EEE AEAEE EE AEE EEEN EAEE EA 1 1 2 Principles of COMMUNICATION sssini enaa i a a aa a a aaa 1 2 Elements and basic settings sesos anadaka a E NE aaa E ANE EAA Aa 8 1 2 1 Connections EJOT siisisercani ninie iei anaiai naaa arenie Einni anaiai mia Kanian 18 1 2 2 Parameters for CONNECTIONS cccccecceseeteencecseeneensecascaeensaeseessessecsececnsansacaeeneansaciecsseseneananeas 19 1 2 3 Area pointers for connections cececcccce cece cee eeeeeeeeee eee ee eececeaeee ce eecaeaaaeeceeeeseeaneaeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeed L 1 3 Configuring the COMMECUOM sass iccccen dedaece ipdeees peceedde ae EAER dauen ex EER pueden danedentpeecsnedades ied 1 4 Connections and Protocols esis ciacccs caicecrastedsatugs icdcacaagcet
270. ion Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Appendix 40000 Linear scaling alarms 8 1 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 40010 The system function could not be executed since Check the parameter types in the configuration the parameters could not be converted to a common tag type 40011 The system function could not be executed since Check the parameter types in the configuration the parameters could not be converted to a common tag type 50000 Data server alarms Number 50000 Effect causes The HMI device is receiving data faster than it is capable of processing Therefore no further data is accepted until all current data have been processed Data exchange then resumes Remedy 50001 Data exchange has been resumed 60000 Win32 function alarms Number 60000 60010 Effect causes This alarm is generated by the DisplaySystemAlarms function The text to be displayed is transferred to the function as a parameter The file could not be copied in the direction defined because one of the two files is currently open or the source target path is not available It is possible that the Windows user has no access rights to one of the two files Remedy Restart the system function or check the paths of the source target files Using Windows NT XP The user executing WinCC flexible Runtime must be granted access rights for the files
271. ion cycle e Set the transmission rate to the highest possible value For discrete alarms use arrays and assign the individual alarms to one bit of the array tags themselves and not to the individual subelements For discrete alarms and arrays only tags of the D operand and data type Word are permitted With screens the update rate that can actually be achieved depends on the type and amount of data to be displayed Configure short acquisition cycles only for objects which actually require shorter refresh cycles WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 2 Communication via PG protocol Trends Job mailboxes 204 When using bit triggered trends if the group bit is set in the Trend transfer area the HMI device always updates all the trends whose bit is set in this area It then resets the bits The group bit in the PLC program can only be set again after all bits have been reset by the HMI device If large numbers of job mailboxes are sent in quick succession this can lead to overload in the communication between the HMI device and PLC The HMI device confirms acceptance of the job mailbox by entering the value zero in the first data word of the job mailbox The HMI device now processes the job for which it requires time If a new job mailbox is entered again immediately in the job mailbox it may take some time before the H
272. ions describe the area pointers and their associated PLC jobs 5 4 3 2 Screen number area pointer Function The HMI device saves information about the screen called on the HMI device to the Screen number area pointer This allows the transfer of the current screen contents from the HMI device to the PLC The PLC can trigger specific reactions such as the call of a different screen Application Configure and enable the area pointer in Communication gt Connections before you put it into use You can create only one instance of the Screen number area pointer and only on one PLC The screen number is transferred spontaneously to the PLC That is it is always transferred when a new screen is activated on the HMI device It is therefore unnecessary to configure an acquisition cycle WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 4 User data areas Structure The area pointer is a data area in the memory of the PLC with a fixed length of 5 words 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1st word Current screen type 2nd word Current screen number 3rd word Reserved 4th word Current field number 5th word Reserved e Current screen type 1 for the root screen or 4 for the permanent window e Current screen number 1 to 32767 e Current field number 1 to 32767 5 4 3 3 Date tim
273. irst word is set to 0 again The execution of the job mailbox is generally not completed at this point in time All job mailboxes and their parameters are listed below The No column contains the job number of the job mailbox Job mailboxes can only be triggered by the PLC when the HMI device is online Note Please note that not all HMI devices support job mailboxes TP 170A and Micro Panel do not support PLC jobs for example No Function 14 Setting the time BCD coded Parameter 1 Left byte Right byte hours 0 23 Parameter 2 Left byte minutes 0 59 Right byte seconds 0 59 Parameter 3 15 Setting the date BCD coded Parameter 1 Left byte Right byte weekday 1 7 Sunday Saturday Parameter 2 Left byte day 1 31 Right byte month 1 12 Parameter 3 Left byte year 23 User logon Logs the user on with the name PLC user at the HMI device with the group number transferred in Parameter 1 The logon is possible only when the transferred group number exists in the project Parameter 1 Group number 1 to 255 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Modicon controllers 6 4 User data areas No Function 14 Setting the time BCD coded Parameter 2 3 24 User logoff Logs off the current user The function corresponds to the logoff system f
274. ission IF Interface LCD Liquid Crystal Display LED Light Emitting Diode MOS Metal Oxide Semiconductor MP Multi Panel MPI Multipoint Interface SIMATIC S7 MTBF Mean Time Between Failures OP Operator Panel PC Personal Computer WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 373 Appendix 8 2 Abbreviations PCL Printer Control Language PG Programming device PPI Point to Point Interface SIMATIC S7 RAM Random Access Memory RTS Request To Send RxD Receive Data SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage AL Alarm SP Service Pack PLC Programmable Logic Controller SRAM Static Random Access Memory STN Super Twisted Nematic D sub Subminiature D plug TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TFT Thin Film Transistor TP Touch Panel TTL Transistor Transistor Logic TxD Transmit Data UL Underwriter s Laboratory UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply VGA Video Graphic Array AT Accept button WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 370 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Appendix 8 3 Glossary 8 3 Glossary Alarm Indicates particularly serious operating states that must be acknowledged Alarm cleared also known as outgoing Time at which an alarm is cleared by the controller Alarm generated also known as incoming Time at which an alarm is tr
275. it assignment for all areas WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 164 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with LG controllers 4 3 User data areas Trend request area The HMI device sets corresponding bits in the trend request area when you open a screen which contains one or several trends on the HMI device After deselecting the screen the HMI device resets the relevant bits in the trend request area Using the trend request area the PLC can recognize which trend is currently displayed on the HMI device Trends can also be triggered without evaluation of the trend request area Trend transfer area 1 This area is used to trigger trends In your PLC program you set the bit assigned to the trend in the trend transfer area and set the trend group bit The trend group bit is the last bit in the trend transfer area The HMI device detects the trigger The HMI device reads either a value or the entire buffer from the PLC It then resets the trend bit and the trend group bit The following picture shows the structure of a trend transfer area high order byte low order byte Bit number 15 8 7 1st word nth word Trend group bit The trend transfer area must not be modified by the PLC program until the trend group bit has been reset Trend transfer area 2 Trend transfer area 2 is required for trends configured with a switch buffer The trend transfer areas 1 and 2 have a similar struc
276. it via HMI device l error alarm WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 103 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 4 Connecting cables for Allen Bradley 2 4 Connecting cables for Allen Bradley 2 4 1 Connecting cable 6XV1440 2K RS 232 for Allen Bradley 6XV1440 2K__ __ Length key see catalog ST 80 For interconnecting the HMI device RS 232 15 pin sub D SLC503 SLC504 SLC505 Micro Logix ML1500 LRP HMI device Allen Bradley connector 1 connector 2 15 pin D Sub connector 9 pin D Sub female connector shift latch screw locking cable outlet for pin 1 metal enclosure V 24 metal enclosure V 24 enclosure DCD D Shield with large area contact to housing at both ends Cable 5 x 0 14 mm2 shielded length 15 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 104 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 4 Connecting cables for Allen Bradley 2 4 2 Connecting cable 6XV1440 2L RS 232 for Allen Bradley 6XV1440 2L_ Length key see catalog ST 80 For interconnecting the HMI device 15 pin sub D PLC5x KF2 KF3 HMI device Allen Bradley connector 1 connector 2 15 pin D Sub connector 25 pin D Sub connector shift latch screw locking cable outlet for pin 1 metal enclosure V 24 metal enclosure V 24 a enclosure l LAN l li I DCD D Py 4 i oj DsR De DTR lt lt RD 3 j i TxD l
277. ith a fixed length of 5 words 1st word 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7J 6 5 41 31 2 1 0 Current screen type 2nd word Current screen number 3rd word Reserved 4th word Current field number 5th word Reserved e Current screen type 1 for the root screen or 4 for the permanent window e Current screen number 1 to 32767 e Current field number 1 to 32767 4 3 3 3 Date time area pointer Function This area pointer is used to transfer the date and time from the HMI device to the PLC The PLC writes control job 41 to the job mailbox When it evaluating the control job the HMI device saves its current date and time to the data area configured in the Date time area pointer All definitions are coded in BCD format The Date Time area pointer when used in a project which contains multiple connections must be enabled for each configured connection The date time data area has the following structure Data word Left byte Right byte 15 8 7 0 n 0 Reserved Hour 0 to 23 n 1 Minute 0 to 59 Second 0 to 59 Time n 2 Reserved Reserved n 3 Reserved Weekday 1 to 7 1 Sunday n 4 Day 1 to 31 Month 1 to 12 Date n 5 Year 80 to 99 0 to 29 Reserved Note The entry of values from 80 to 99 in the Year data area returns the years 1980 through 1999 values from 0 to 29 return the years 2000 through 2029 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Par
278. ith an underscore character e Strings with successive underscore and space characters are invalid e The address may not exceed a length of 128 characters WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 2 Contiguring the Allen Bradley communication driver Note The characters reserved for tag addressing may not be used in program tag names or at any other address instance The reserved characters are listed below Reserved character Function Element delimiter Definition of a program tag Delimiter for addressing multi dimensional arrays Reserved for bit addressing Addressing of array elements or arrays PLC and program tags The Allen Bradley E IP C Logix driver supports addressing of PLC tags global project tags and or program tags global program tags A program tag is declared based on the program name in the PLC and actual tag name which are delimited by colon PLC tags are simply addressed by their name NOTICE Addressing errors Addressing errors are generated when the tag name and data type are inconsistent The tag name defined in the address field in WinCC flexible must correspond with the tag name in the PLC The data type of tags in WinCC flexible and in the PLC must correspond Note Module specific tags e g for data on input and output modules cannot be addressed directly Instead use an al
279. itialized alarm Check the configuration the ODBC Open The faulty log files are not available for logging Database Connectivity and the specified drive jobs 80030 The structure of the existing log file does not match Delete the existing log data manually in advance the expected structure Logging is stopped for this log 80031 The log in CSV format is corrupted Delete the faulty file The log cannot be used 80032 Logs can be assigned events These are triggered Close WinCC flexible Runtime delete the log then as soon as the log is full If WinCC flexible Runtime restart WinCC flexible Runtime is started and the log is already full the event is not Or triggered Configure a button which contains the same actions as The log specified no longer logs data because itis the event and press it full 80033 System Defined is set in the data log file as the Reinstall SQL Sever 2005 Express data source name This causes an error No data is written to the database logs whereas the logging to the CSV logs works 80034 An error has occurred in the initialization of the No action is necessary However it is recommended to logs An attempt has been made to create the save the backup files or delete them in order to make tables as a backup This action was successful A the space available again backup has been made of the tables of the corrupted log file and the cleared log was restarted 80035 An error has occurred in the init
280. itiating the transfer of data records There are three ways of triggering the transfer e Operator input in the recipe view e PLC jobs The transfer of data records can also be triggered by the PLC e Triggering by configured functions If the transfer of data records is triggered by a configured function or by a PLC job the recipe display on the HMI device remains operable The data records are transferred in the background Simultaneous processing of several transfer requests is however not possible In this case the HMI device rejects the other transfer requests with a system alarm Transfer without synchronization If you select asynchronous transfer of data records between the HMI device and PLC there is no coordination over the common data areas It is therefore unnecessary to set up a data area during configuration Asynchronous data record transfer can be a useful alternative for example when e The system is capable of excluding the risk of uncontrolled overwriting of data by the communication peer e The PLC does not require information about the recipe number and data record number e The transfer of data records is triggered by the operator of the HMI device WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 226 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with Mitsubishi controllers Reading values Writing values 5 4 User data areas When a read job is triggered the values are read from the PLC addres
281. ition cycle and synchronizes itself Note Set an acquisition cycle of sufficient length for the date time area pointer in order to avoid any negative impact on HMI device performance Recommended Acquisition cycle of 1 minute if your process can handle it The date time data area has the following structure DATE_AND_TIME format in BCD code Data word Left byte Right byte n 0 Year 80 to 99 0 to 29 Month 1 to 12 n 1 Day 1 to 31 Hour 0 to 23 n 2 Minute 0 to 59 Second 0 to 59 n 3 Reserved Reserved Weekday 1to7 1 Sunday n 4 1 Reserved Reserved n 5 1 Reserved Reserved 1 The two data words must be available in the data area in order to ensure compliance of the data format with WinCC flexible and to avoid the reading of incorrect information Note Note that when you enter the year values 80 99 result in years 1980 through 1999 and the values 0 29 result in the years 2000 through 2029 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 4 User data areas 5 4 3 5 Coordination area pointer Function Application The Coordination area pointer is used to implement the following functionality e detection in the control program of HMI device startup e detection in the control program of the current HMI device operating mode e detection in the control program of the HM
282. itions are coded in BCD format The Date Time area pointer when used in a project which contains multiple connections must be enabled for each configured connection The date time data area has the following structure Data word Left byte Right byte 15 7 0 n 0 Reserved Hour 0 to 23 n 1 Minute 0 to 59 Second 0 to 59 Time n 2 Reserved Reserved n 3 Reserved Weekday 1 to 7 1 Sunday n 4 Day 1 to 31 Month 1 to 12 Date n 5 Year 80 to 99 0 to 29 Reserved Note The entry of values from 80 to 99 in the Year data area returns the years 1980 through 1999 values from 0 to 29 return the years 2000 through 2029 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 128 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 3 User data areas 3 3 3 4 Date time controller area pointer Function This area pointer is used to transfer the date and time from the PLC to the HMI device Use this area pointer if the PLC is the time master The PLC loads the data area of the area pointer All definitions are coded in BCD format The HMI device reads the data cyclically within the configured acquisition cycle and synchronizes itself Note Set an acquisition cycle of sufficient length for the date time area pointer in order to avoid any negative impact on HMI device performance Recommended Acquisition cycle of 1 minute if your process can handle it The date time data area has the following structure
283. ive in the data record return message 3 The HMI device fetches the values of the data record specified in the function from the data medium and writes the values to the PLC The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed 5 The control program can now evaluate the transferred data The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 139 Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 3 User data areas Sequence of a transfer started by the operator in the recipe display Reading from the PLC started by the operator in the recipe display Step Action 1 Check Status word 0 Yes No 2 The HMI device enters the recipe number to be read and the status Abort with system Transfer active in the data record and sets the data record number alarm to 0 3 The HMI device reads the values from the PLC and displays them in the recipe display If the recipes have synchronized tags the values from the PLC are also written to the tags The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed 5 The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers Writing to the PLC started by the operator in the recipe display Step Action Check Status word 0 1 Yes No The HMI device enters the recipe and data record numb
284. le the trend is being read out by the HMI device 5 4 2 LED mapping Function The function keys of the keyboard units of the Operator Panel OP Multi Panel MP and Panel PC are equipped with LEDs These LEDs can be controlled by the PLC This functionality can be used to activate an LED in order to tell the operator which key to press in a specific situation for example Requirements In order to enable control of an LED you must set up an LED tag or array tag in the PLC and declare this as the LED tag in the configuration data LED assignment Assign the LEDs to the LED tag bits when you configure the function keys Define the LED tag and the corresponding bit for each function key in the General group of the properties view The bit number bit identifies the first of two consecutive bits that control the following LED states LED function A all Mobile Panels Operator Panels Bit n 1 Bit n and Multi Panels Panel PCs 0 0 Off Off 0 1 Rapid flashing Flashing 1 0 Slow flashing Flashing 1 1 Permanent signal Permanent signal WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 216 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 4 User data areas 5 4 3 Area pointer 5 4 3 1 General information on area pointers Mitsubishi MELSEC Introduction Area pointers are parameter fields WinCC flexible Runtime reads these parameter fields in order to
285. ledgment on the HMI device In Ack read tag you configure the tag or the array tag and the bit number that is written to the PLC after acknowledgment from the HMI device Make sure when you use an array tag that it is not longer than 6 words In order to ensure that a signal transition is generated as soon as the acknowledgment bit is set the HMI device first resets the acknowledgment bit assigned to an error alarm There is a certain time based offset between these two operations due to the processing time of the HMI device Note The reset includes all alarm bits acknowledged since the last restart of Runtime The PLC may only read this area once If the alarm is acknowledged on the HMI device the bit is then set in the assigned acknowledgment tag on the PLC This allows the PLC to recognize that the error alarm has been acknowledged The figure below shows the pulse diagram Error alarm S I I I AL Acknowledgment l HMI device gt PLC l Arrival of the Reset of _ New error alarm acknowledgm bit via HMI device l error alarm WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 188 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with LG controllers 4 4 Commissioning components 4 4 Commissioning components 4 4 1 Commissioning components communications modules Transferring the PLC program to the PLC 1 Interconnect the PC with the CPU using the appropriate cable 2 Download the p
286. lers 5 4 User data areas 5 4 4 3 Step 2 Configuring an alarm Procedure We differentiate between the following alarms e Discrete alarms e Analog alarms You create alarms in the Discrete alarms and Analog alarms editors Discrete alarms The editor is shown in the figure below DISCRETE e ALARMS a pe a a a x pe Engine overtemperature Temperature sensor M3 v 0 lt No group gt Errors Diagnosis Events Warnings System e Edit text Enter the text to display in runtime You can format the text characters The text may contain fields for the output of tags The text is output to the alarm view if this view was configured in the Screens editor e Specify number Every alarm has a number that must be unique within the project It is used to uniquely identify the alarm and is indicated with the alarm in runtime The permitted range of values is 1 to 100 000 The WinCC flexible engineering system assigns consecutive numbers You can change the alarm number when assigning it to groups for example e Specify the alarm class Available alarm classes Error alarms This class must be acknowledged Warning alarms This class signals events with incoming and outgoing alarms WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 4 User data areas e Assign trigger tag In the Trigger tag column
287. llowing own protocols e Programming device protocol PG protocol For this point to point connection the HMI device is connected to the programming interface of the CPU RS 422 e Protocol 4 With this protocol point to point or multipoint connections can be established over Mitsubishi communications modules with RS 232 or RS 422 interfaces Connectable controllers Connections can be implemented for the following Mitsubishi controllers PLC PG protocol Protocol 4 MELSEC FX FX0 X MELSEC FX0n FX1n FX2n x X MELSEC A 1 X MELSEC Q 2 X 1 A series is the generic term for AnA AnN AnS AnU 2 Q series is the generic term for QnA and QnAS SIMATIC HMI WinCC flexible 2008 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 197 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 1 Communication with Mitsubishi MELSEC Released communication types Applies only to the PG protocol The point to point connection from an HMI device to a Mitsubishi FXK CPU using the PG protocol protocol for access to the program and memory elements of the FX series PC CPU version V1 21 and higher has been subjected to a system test by Siemens AG and released Applies only to Protocol 4 On the HMI devices only the physical connections that are available as standard on the HMI devices are enabled Particularly on a standard PC only the RS 232 port is enabled A multipoint connection with
288. ly be tags of the D operand and the data type Word Array tags may only be used for discrete alarms and trends Array tags only of the D operand and the data types Word are permitted 5 2 6 Optimizing the configuration Acquisition cycle and update time Discrete alarms Screens The acquisition cycles for the Area pointers and of the tags defined in the configuration software are decisive in terms of the update times which can actually be achieved The update time is the sum of the acquisition cycle transmission time processing time To achieve optimum update times remember the following points during configuration e Keep the individual data areas as small as possible and as large as necessary e Define data areas that belong together as belonging together You can improve the update time by setting up one large data area instead of several small areas e If the acquisition cycles you select are too short this is detrimental to the overall performance Set the acquisition cycle according to the rate of change of the process values The rate of temperature changes at a furnace for example is significantly slower compared to the speed rate of an electrical drive As a general guideline the acquisition cycle should be approx 1 second e Put the tags of an alarm or a screen in one data area without gaps e To allow changes in the PLC to be recognized reliably these must be available at least during the actual acquisit
289. m is triggered when this limit is exceeded The outgoing alarm is triggered when the low limit is violated making allowances for any configured hysteresis WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 295 Communication with Modicon controllers 6 4 User data areas 6 4 4 4 Procedure Step 3 Configuring the acknowledgment Create suitable tags on the PLC to acknowledge an error alarm You assign these tags to an alarm in the Bit messages editor You make the assignment in Properties gt Acknowledgment The following figure shows the dialog for configuring an acknowledgment Discrete Alarms Dis DREIE ALARMS fngine overtemperature Errors i Temperature sensor M3 zo lt No group gt M m General D Properties _ Kno wledgement a Infotext ed gemont HMI m Process Tag Temperature sensor I x Tag lt No tag gt m Trigger Bit 1 ap 4 rb g p Events Distinction in terms of acknowledgment e Acknowledgment on the HMI device e Acknowledgment by the PLC Acknowledgment by the PLC 290 In Acknowledgment PLC tag you configure the tag or the array tag and the bit number based on which the HMI device can recognize an acknowledgment by the PLC A bit set in the tag triggers acknowledgment of the assigned error alarm bit at the HMI device This tag bit returns a function similar to acknowledgment on the HMI device which is
290. m the PLC and displays them in the recipe display If the recipes have synchronized tags the values from the PLC are also written to the tags The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed 5 The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers Writing to the PLC started by the operator in the recipe display Step Action Check Status word 0 1 Yes No The HMI device enters the recipe and data record number to be Abort with system written and the status Transfer active in the data record alarm 2 The HMI device writes the current values to the PLC If the recipes have synchronized tags the changed values are synchronized between the recipe display and tags and then written to the PLC 3 The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed If required the control program can now evaluate the transferred data 5 The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers Note The status word may only be set by the HMI device The PLC may only reset the status word to zero Note The PLC may only evaluate the recipe and data record numbers when data inconsistency is detected if one of the conditions outlined below has been met e The data mailbox status is set to Transfer completed e The data mailbox status is set to Transfer completed with error WinCC flexible 200
291. may only reset the status word to zero Note The PLC may only evaluate the recipe and data record numbers when data inconsistency is detected if one of the conditions outlined below has been met e The data mailbox status is set to Transfer completed e The data mailbox status is set to Transfer completed with error WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with Omron controllers 7 3 User data areas Reaction to an aborted transfer due to errors If the transfer of data records is aborted due to errors the HMI device reacts as follows e Triggering by the operator in the recipe display Information in the status bar of the recipe view and output of system alarms e Triggered by function Output of system alarms e Triggering by PLC job No feedback message on the HMI device You can nonetheless evaluate the status of the transfer by querying the status word in the data record Sequence of the transfer when triggered by a configured function Reading from the PLC using a configured function Step Action 1 Check Status word 0 Yes No 2 The HMI device enters the recipe and data record number Abort with system specified in the function and the status Transfer active in the alarm data record 3 The HMI device reads the values from the PLC and stores them in the data record specified in the function 4 e If Yes was selected for the Overwrit
292. meter 1 2 3 50 Clear alarm buffer Parameter 1 2 3 51 Screen selection Parameter 1 Screen number Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Field number 69 Read data record from PLC Parameter 1 Recipe number 1 999 Parameter 2 Data record number 1 65535 Parameter 3 0 Do not overwrite existing data record 1 Overwrite existing data record 70 Write data record to PLC Parameter 1 Recipe number 1 999 Parameter 2 Data record number 1 65535 Parameter 3 1 OP 73 OP 77A and TP 177A HMI devices also execute the Screen selection job mailbox if the on screen keyboard is active WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 295 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 4 User data areas 5 4 3 8 Data mailbox area pointer Data mailbox area pointer Function When data records are transferred between the HMI device and PLC both partners access common communications areas on the PLC Data transfer types There are two ways of transferring data records between the HMI device and PLC e Transfer without synchronization e Transfer with synchronization over the data record Data records are always transferred directly That is the tag values are read from an address or written to an address configured for this tag directly without redirecting the values by means of interim memory In
293. mmunication driver Installing communication drivers for Windows XP 60 Multipoint connection i Network parameters Optimizing the configuration Permitted data type 63 PLC dependent parameters 63 Point to point connection Protocol parameters Selecting the PLC Allen Bradley Ethernet IP Address multiplexing Addressing 70 Addressing type Connection 67 Device specific parameters Installing communication drivers Optimizing the configuration PLC specific parameters 68 Protocol parameters Area pointer 36 8 167 217 270 Availability 36 Asynchronous Transferring data 90 134 176 226 279 316 C Cable 6XV1440 2X___ Communication Ethernet 2 using area pointers using tags he Communication drivers 17 Communication partner LG GLOFA GM Communication partners GE Fanuc Mitsubishi Electric 197 SIMATIC HMI WinCC flexible 2008 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 375 Index Modicon Omron Hostlink Multilink 297 Communication peer Allen Bradley 46 Communication protocol Area pointer 36 Availability 24 Supported interfaces Communications principle Configuring an alarm Allen Bradle Modicon Omron Hostlink Multilink Configuring the acknowledgment Alarm message 102 145 187 237 290 connectable HMI device 24 4 Connectable PLC Mitsubishi Electric 197 connecting HMI device with PLC 56 66 148 206 260 Connect
294. ms currently running StopRuntime with the option Runtime and Then close Windows operating system Windows and WinCC flexible Runtime are not closed One possible cause is that other programs cannot be closed 70013 The system time could not be modified because an Check the time which is to be set invalid value was entered Incorrect separators may have been used 70014 The system time could not be modified Possible Check the time which is to be set causes Using Windows NT XP The user executing WinCC e An invalid time was transferred flexible Runtime must be granted the right to change e The Windows user has no right to modify the the system time of the operating system system time Windows rejects the setting request 70015 The system time could not be read because Windows rejects the reading function 70016 An attempt was made to select a screen by means Check the screen number in the function or job with the of a system function or job This is not possible screen numbers configured because the screen number specified does not Assign the number to a screen if necessary exist Check the details for the screen call and whether the Or A screen could not be generated due to screen is blocked for specific users insufficient system memory Or The screen is blocked Or Screen call has not been executed correctly 70017 Date time is not read from the area pointer because Change the address or set up the address in the PLC the
295. munication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 69 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 2 Contiguring the Allen Bradley communication driver Valid data types Addressing Address Valid data types Array Sint USInt Int Ulnt Dint UDInt Real Individual bits from the basic data Bool types of the PLC Sint USInt Int UInt Dint UDInt Any changed value of certain defined bits is written back to the PLC There is no check to determine whether any other bits have changed The PLC or other PLCs may only read access the value Note Strings in RSLogix 5000 have a default length of 82 characters WinCC flexible can visualize up to 80 characters Always use strings which do not exceed the maximum length of 80 characters Note Only the data type Int and array of Int are allowed in the area pointer configuration Addressing with Allen Bradley E IP C Logix Addressing A tag is uniquely referenced in WinCC flexible by means of an address in the PLC The address must correspond with the tag name in the PLC The tag address is defined by a string with a length of up to 128 characters Using characters for addressing 70 Valid characters for tag addressing e Letters a to z A to Z e Numbers 0 to 9 e Underscore _ The tag address consists of tag name and other character strings used to specify the tag in the PLC Tag name properties e The tag name may begin but not end w
296. munication driver HMI device does not support write access to the data type BYTE 220003 The communication driver cannot be loaded Install the driver by reinstalling WinCC flexible The driver may not be installed Runtime 220004 Communication is down and no update data is Check the connection transferred because the cable is not connected or defective etc 220005 Communication is up 220006 The connection between the specified PLC and the specified port is active 220007 The connection to the specified PLC is Check whether interrupted at the specified port e The cable is plugged in e The PLC is OK e The correct port is used e Your configuration is OK port parameters protocol settings PLC address Restart the system if the system alarm persists WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 354 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Appendix 8 1 System alarms Number 220008 Effect causes The communication driver cannot access or open the specified port The port may be in use by another application or the port used is not available on the destination device There is no communication with the PLC Remedy Close all the applications which access this port and restart the computer Use another port of the system 230000 View alarms Number 230000 Effect causes The value entered could not be accepted The system discards the entry and restores the previous value Eit
297. n create tags that point to an address on the PLC The HMI device reads and displays the value from the defined address The operator can also make an entry on the HMI device that is then written to the address on the PLC User data areas User data areas are intended for the exchange of special data and are set up only when such data is used Data for which user data areas are required for example e Job mailboxes e Transfer of data records e Date time synchronization e Sign of life monitoring The user data areas are created while configuring in WinCC flexible You assign the corresponding addresses in the PLC WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 115 Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 2 Configuring the communication driver for GE Fanuc 3 2 Configuring the communication driver for GE Fanuc 3 2 1 Requirements of communication Connection RS 232 port 116 The communication between the HMI device and the GE Fanuc PLC 90 PLC sets the interface parameters and the bus address No special blocks are required on the PLC for the connection The HMI device can be connected over two different interfaces Point to point communication Master Slave HMI PLC RS232 SNP 1 Cable PP3 through PP6 depending on the HMI device and PLC Multipoint communication This principle can also be used for a point to point connection Master Slave Slave SNP HE693SNP232A SNP
298. n commissioning the device RF radiation emitted from devices such as mobile phones may cause unwanted operating states WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 266 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Modicon controllers 6 4 User data areas 6 4 User data areas 6 4 1 Trend request and trend transfer Function A trend is the graphic visualization of one or more values from the PLC The value is read either time or bit triggered depending on the configuration Time triggered trends The HMI device reads in the trend values cyclically at an interval specified in the configuration Time triggered trends are suitable for continuous processes for example the operating temperature of a motor Bit triggered trends By setting a trigger bit in the trend request tag the HMI device either reads in a trend value or an entire trend buffer This setting is defined in configuration data Bit triggered trends are normally used to visualize rapidly changing values One example might be the injection pressure in the production of plastic parts To trigger bit triggered trends create suitable external tags in the Tags editor of WinCC flexible The tags must be linked with the trend areas The HMI device and PLC then communicate with each other over these trend areas The following areas are available for trends e Trend request area e Trend transfer area 1 e Trend transfer area 2 required only with
299. n gt Connections in the project view of the HMI device Select the connection and edit its parameters in the properties dialog box WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 195 Communication with LG controllers 4 2 Configuring the LG GLOFA GM communication driver 4 2 4 Configuring protocol parameters Parameters to be set To edit the parameters double click Communication gt Connections in the project window of the HMI device In the project view of the HMI device LG GLOFA GM is selected in the Communication drivers column You can now enter or modify the protocol parameters in the Properties window Device dependent parameters Interface Select the HMI device port to which the LG IMO PLC is connected under Interface For more detailed information refer to the HMI device manual Type Under type set RS 232 RS 422 or RS 485 Note If you use the IF1B interface you must also switch over the RS 422 received data and the RTS signal using 4 DIP switches on the back of the Multi Panel Baud rate Define the transmission rate between the HMI device and the PLC under Baud rate System defaults 19200 bps Note The highest station address must be less than or equal to 63 if you set a transmission rate of 1 5 Mbaud at OP 73 or OP 77A If connecting a TP 170A to a SIMATIC S7 station at a transmision rate of 1 5 MBaud on PROFIBUS DP set a value less than or
300. n Bradley DF1 Allen Bradley DH485 Allen Bradley EsIP C Logix GE Fanuc SNP LG GLOFA GM Mitsubishi Fx Mitsubishi Protocol 4 Modicon MODBUS Modicon MODBUS TCP IP Omron Hostlink Multilink OPC SIMATIC 500 505 DP SIMATIC 500 505 seriell SIMATIC HMI HTTP Protocol SIMATIC 55 45511 SIMATIC 55 DP SIMATIC 57 200 SIMATIC 57 300 400 el Only those drivers that are supported by the selected HMI device will be displayed 5 The system automatically sets suitable values for the communication partner in the Parameters tab 6 Check the parameters and edit these as required 7 Save the project WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 21 Working with connections 1 4 Connections and protocols Alternative procedure Result Select Insert gt New item gt Connection from the menu bar The Connections editor opens and shows a new connection Edit the connection as described in steps 2 through 7 You can drag and drop existing connections directly from HMI_1 or via an interim station in the library to HMI_2 The output view shows the following information The interface used for the connection has been adapted to the device A device change is performed for this connection The system does not verify whether or not the HMI_2 supports the communications driver Open the Connections editor on HMI_2 to check the connections Faulty entries are marked in orange A new
301. n a screen which contains one or several trends on the HMI device When the screen is deselected the HMI device resets the relevant bits in the trend request area Using the trend request area the PLC can recognize which trend is currently displayed on the HMI device Trends can also be triggered without evaluation of the trend request area Trend transfer area 1 This area is used to trigger trends In your PLC program set the bit assigned to the trend in the trend transfer area and set the trend group bit The trend group bit is the last bit in the trend transfer area The HMI device detects the trigger The HMI device reads either a value or the entire buffer from the PLC It then resets the trend bit and the trend group bit The following picture shows the structure of a trend transfer area high order byte low order byte Bit number 15 8 7 1st word nth word Trend group bit The trend transfer area must not be changed by the PLC program until the trend group bit has been reset Trend transfer area 2 Trend transfer area 2 is required for trends configured with a switch buffer The trend transfer areas 1 and 2 have a similar structure Switch buffers The switch buffer is a second buffer for the same trend that can be set up during configuration While the HMI device reads the values from buffer 1 the PLC writes to buffer 2 If the HMI device is reading buffer 2 the PLC writes to buffer 1 This prevent
302. n be entered in the alarm buffer for up to four more failed tags if necessary After that alarm 290004 is output Observe the value range for the tag type 290002 It is not possible to convert a value from a source format to a target format The alarm can be entered in the alarm buffer for up to four more failed recipe tags if necessary After that alarm 290005 is output Check the value range or type of the tag 290003 This alarm is output when alarm number 290000 is triggered more than five times In this case no further separate alarms are generated Check in the configuration that the tag addresses have been set up in the PLC 290004 This alarm is output when alarm number 290001 is triggered more than five times In this case no further separate alarms are generated Observe the value range for the tag type 290005 This alarm is output when alarm number 290002 is triggered more than five times In this case no further separate alarms are generated Check the value range or type of the tag 290006 The threshold values configured for the tag have been violated by values entered Observe the configured or current threshold values of the tag 290007 There is a difference between the source and target structure of the recipe currently being processed The target structure contains an additional data recipe tag which is not available in the source structure The data recipe tag
303. n box IF2 8 IF1A IF1B connection box IF2 8 IF1A IF1B 12 connection box IF2 8 IF1A IF1B connection box IF2 8 IF1B WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Mobile Panel 177 DP 8 IF1A RS232 IF1B RS422 IF1B connection box IF1A 8 IF1B 89 connection box IF1A 8 IF1B 8 connection box IF1A 8 IF1B 8 connection box IF1A 8 IF1B 8 connection box IF1A 8 IF1B 8 connection box IF1A 8 IF1B 8 connection box IF1A IF1B 812 connection box IF1A 8 IF1B 8 connection box IF1B 8 Mobile Panel 177 PN Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet 1 5 Device based dependency Mobile Panel 277 48 IF1A RS232 IF1B RS422 IF1B connection box Ethernet IF1A 8 IF1B 89 connection box IF1A 8 IF1B connection box Ethernet IF1A 8 IF1B 8 connection box IF1A 8 IF1B 8 connection box IF1A 8 IF1B 8 connection box IF1A 8 IF1B connection box IF1A 8 IF1B 812 connection box Ethernet IF1A 8 IF1B connection box IF1B 8 Mobile Panel 277 IWLAN Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Ethernet Wireless OPC Ethernet Wireless 31 Working with connections 1 5 Device based dependency Basic Panels KTP400 Basic PN KTP600 Basic DP KTP600 Basic PN KTP1000 KTP1000 TP1500 Basic DP Basic PN Basic PN SIMATIC S7 IF1B IF1B PPI 1 SIMATIC S7 MPI IF1B
304. n corresponds to the UpdateTag system function Parameter 1 1 100 49 Clear process alarm buffer Parameter 1 2 3 50 Clear alarm buffer Parameter 1 2 3 51 Screen selection Parameter 1 Screen number Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Field number 69 Read data record from PLC Parameter 1 Recipe number 1 999 Parameter 2 Data record number 1 65535 Parameter 3 0 Do not overwrite existing data record 1 Overwrite existing data record 70 Write data record to PLC Parameter 1 Recipe number 1 999 Parameter 2 Data record number 1 65535 Parameter 3 1 OP 73 OP 77A and TP 177A HMI devices also execute the Screen selection job mailbox if the on screen keyboard is active WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 89 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 3 User data areas 2 3 3 8 Data mailbox area pointer Data mailbox area pointer Function When data records are transferred between the HMI device and PLC both partners access common communications areas on the PLC Data transfer types There are two ways of transferring data records between the HMI device and PLC e Transfer without synchronization e Transfer with synchronization over the data record Data records are always transferred directly That is the tag values are read from an addr
305. n cycle to suit the rate of change of the process values The rate of temperature changes at a furnace for example is significantly slower compared to the speed rate of an electrical drive As a general guideline the acquisition cycle should be approx 1 second e Put the tags of an alarm or a screen in one data area without gaps e To allow changes in the PLC to be recognized reliably they must be available at least during the actual acquisition cycle e Set the transmission rate to the highest possible value WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with Modicon controllers Discrete alarms Screens Trends Job mailboxes 6 2 Communication via Modbus RTU protocol For discrete alarms use arrays and assign the individual alarms to one bit of the array tags themselves and not to the individual subelements For discrete alarms and arrays only tags of Reference 4x and 6x and data types Int and Int are permitted With screens the update rate that can actually be achieved depends on the type and amount of data to be displayed Configure short acquisition cycles only for objects which actually require shorter refresh cycles When using bit triggered trends if the group bit is set in the Trend transfer area the HMI device always updates all the trends whose bit is set in this area It then resets the bits The group bit in the PLC program can only be
306. n module for Ethernet 140 NOE 771 01 for the series TSX Quantum and TSX Unity Quantum Connection via the Ethernet interface of the CPU adapter 171 CCC 980 30 of the Momentum series Connection to the Ethernet CPU interface of the TSX Unity Quantum Connection via the Ethernet TCP IP switch on module TSX ETY 110 for the series TSX Premium and TSX Unity Premium Connection via the Ethernet TCP IP switch on module TSX ETY 410 for the Micro series Connection via the Ethernet TCP IP Modbus Plus Bridge 174 CEV 200 40 to the Modbus Plus interface of the Compact the TSX Quantum the TSX Unity Quantum and the 984 series apart from 984A 984B and 984X Via bridge the controllers can be reached via their remote slave address via the Ethernet interface of the bridge Note It is not possible to integrate the HMI device in a Modbus network via a bridge as the HMI device is a Modbus master WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Modicon controllers 6 7 Communication with Modicon Modbus Restrictions The connection of the HMI device to PLCs of other manufacturers that offer a Modbus TCP IP interface has not be system tested and therefore is not approved If you nevertheless use a different PLC you will find several useful tips here e Use the CPU type Premium Micro as this works without an address offset a
307. n the Properties window WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 51 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 2 Contiguring the Allen Bradley communication driver Device dependent parameters Interface Select the HMI port to which the Allen Bradley PLC is connected at the Interface entry For more detailed information refer to the HMI device manual Type Select RS 232 RS 422 or RS 485 depending on the HMI device and the selected port Baud rate Define the transmission rate between the HMI device and the PLC under Baud rate Note The highest station address must be less than or equal to 63 if you set a transmission rate of 1 5 Mbaud at OP 73 or OP 77A If connecting a TP 170A to a SIMATIC S7 station at a transmision rate of 1 5 MBaud on PROFIBUS DP set a value less than or equal to 63 for the highest station address HSA Data bits Select 7 bits or 8 bits under Databits Parity Select None Even or Odd under Parity Stop bits Select 1 or 2 Stop bits Network parameters Checksum Define the procedure to be used to determine the error code at Checksum BCC or CRC PLC dependent parameters 52 Destination address dec Define the PLC address at Destination address Set Address 0 for point to point DF 1 connections CPU type Define the CPU type of your PLC at CPU type Note To parameterize the DF1 FULL
308. n the PLC and is transferred to the HMI device in the configured acquisition cycle the HMI device recognizes the alarm as incoming After the same bit is reset on the PLC the HMI device recognizes the alarm as outgoing e Select the array elements You can select more bit numbers in the Discrete alarms editor by increasing the number of array elements An array with a length of three words provides 48 alarm bits for example WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 99 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 3 User data areas 2 3 4 3 Step 2 Configuring an alarm Procedure Discrete alarms 100 We distinguish between the following alarms e Discrete alarms e Analog alarms You create alarms in the Discrete alarms and Analog alarms editors The editor is shown below Dl 52 Bf a a dasa ee a es Engine overtemperature Errors Temperature sensor M3 0 lt No group gt Errors Diagnos is Events e Edit text Enter the text to display in runtime You can format the text characters The text may contain fields for the output of tags The text is output to the alarm view if this view was configured in the Screens editor e Specify number Each alarm number must be unambiguous within the project It is used to uniquely identify the alarm and is indicated with the alarm in runtime The permitted range of values is 1 to 100 00
309. naeeeeeneeees 97 2 3 4 1 General information on events alarms and acknowledgment ccceceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeenees 97 2 3 4 2 Step 1 Creating tags OF AN ATAY ee eee ee eeeeee ee eeee eee teee eter tana eeeeeeeeeeseneeeeteeeeeeeseeeeeeteeeseeeaeens 98 2 3 4 3 Step 2 Configuring an Alar sess inasnan AEE taeda ede EEN SAES BEA 100 2 3 4 4 Step 3 Configure the acknowledgment cece eeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseeaaeeeseaaeeeeeeaeeeesnateeees 2 4 Connecting cables for Allen Bradley sss essinu unninn anina naaa aaa aaia 2 4 1 Connecting cable 6XV1440 2K RS 232 for Allen Bradley ccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeateeeeeaas 2 4 2 Connecting cable 6XV1440 2L RS 232 for Allen Bradley cc ccccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeesseeeteees 105 2 4 3 Connecting cable 1784 CP10 RS 232 for Allen Bradley cececccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeetseneeeeees 106 2 4 4 Connecting cable 6XV1440 2V RS 422 for Allen Bradley cccceceeeeeeeceeceeeeeseesnteeeeees 2 4 5 Connecting cable 1747 CP3 RS 232 for Allen Bradley ccccccccceeeeeseeeceeeeeeeeseesneeeeees 108 2 4 6 Connecting cable 1761 CBL PM02 RS 232 for Allen Bradley ccccccsceceeeeeeeeeeeesteeeees 2 4 7 Connecting cable PP1 RS 232 for Allen Bradley ccccceeeeeeeneeceeeeeeeecnneaeeeeeeeecsnnaeeeeees 110 2 4 8 Connecting cable PP2 RS 232 for Allen Bradley c ccccceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeceaeaeeeeese
310. nd with the standard bit method of counting e The following function codes are used for the respective data areas Reading function codes Address area 01 ReadCoilStatus Ox M DIGITAL_OUT 02 ReadInputStatus 1x l DIGITAL_IN 03 ReadHoldingRegisters 4x MW USERDATA 04 ReadInputRegisters 3x IW ANALOG_IN 20 14Hex ReadGeneralReference 6x EXTENDEDMEMORY not on all CPUs Writing function codes Address area 06 PresetSingleRegister 4x MW USERDATA Single 16 10Hex PresetMultipleRegisters 4x MW USERDATA Multiple 05 ForceSingleCoil 0x M DIGITAL_OUT with BIT 15 OFHex ForceMultipleCoils Ox M DIGITAL_OUT with 16 BIT GROUP 21 15Hex WriteGeneralReference 6x EXTENDEDMEMORY not on all CPUs 6 1 2 Communication between HMI device and controller Modicon Communications principle The HMI device and the PLC communicate using tags and the user data areas Tags The PLC and the HMI device exchange data using process values In your configuration create tags that point to an address on the PLC The HMI device reads and displays the value from the defined address The operator can also make an entry on the HMI device that is then written to the address on the PLC WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Modicon controllers 6 2 Communication via Modbus RTU protocol User data areas User data areas are intended for the exchange of special
311. ndefined gt Tob mailbox 4 Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt Coordination 1 Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt Date time 6 Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt lt il J gt Enabling an area pointer based on the example of a SIMATIC S7 PLC e Active Enables the area pointer e Name Name of the area pointer defined by WinCC flexible e Address Tag address of the area pointer in the PLC e Length WinCC flexible defines the default length of the area pointer e Acquisition cycle Define an acquisition cycle in this field to allow cyclic reading of the area pointer in Runtime An extremely short acquisition time may have a negative impact on HMI device performance e Comment Save a comment for example to describe the purpose of the area pointer WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 308 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Omron controllers Accessing data areas The table shows how the PLC and HMI device handle read R and write W access to the 7 3 User data areas data areas Data area Required for HMI device PLC Screen number Evaluation by the PLC in order to determine the active W R screen Data record Transfer of data records with synchronization R W R W Date time Transfer of the date and time from the HMI device to the PLC W R Date time PLC Transfer of the date and time from the PLC to the HMI device R W Coordination Requesting the HMI device status in the control program W R Proj
312. ne mode is now set 110001 The operating mode was changed Online mode is now set 110002 The operating mode was not changed Check the connection to the PLCs Check whether the address area for the area pointer 88 Coordination in the PLC is available 110003 The operating mode of the specified PLC was changed by the system function SetConnectionMode The operating mode is now offline 110004 The operating mode of the specified PLC has been changed by the system function SetConnectionMode The operating mode is now online 110005 An attempt was made to use the system function Switch the complete system to online mode then SetConnectionMode to switch the specified PLC to execute the system function again online mode although the entire system is in offline mode This changeover is not allowed The PLC remains in offline mode 110006 The content of the project version area pointer Check e The project ID entered on the PLC e The project ID entered in WinCC flexible 120000 Trend alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 120000 The trend is not displayed because you configured Change the configuration an incorrect axis to the trend or an incorrect trend 120001 The trend is not displayed because you configured Change the configuration an incorrect axis to the trend or an incorrect trend 120002 The trend is not displayed because the tag Check whether the data area for the tag exi
313. net IP module of the PLC Port 44818 is set by default for Ethernet IP devices Communication path Configure the CIP path from the Ethernet module to the PLC This setting creates a logical interconnection of the Ethernet module with the PLC irrespective of their location in different CIP networks WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 2 Contiguring the Allen Bradley communication driver 2 2 3 5 Examples Communication path Example 1 Connection with a PLC in the same Allen Bradley rack 1 0 Number Meaning 1 Stands for a backplane connection 0 Stands for a CPU slot number Example 2 Connection with a PLC in remote Allen Bradley racks Two Allen Bradley racks are networked on Ethernet 1 2 2 190 130 3 101 1 5 Number Meaning 1 Backplane connection 2 Stands for the CPU slot number of the second Ethernet module 2 Stands for an Ethernet connection 190 130 3 101 IP address of a remote AB rack on the network in particular the third Ethernet module 1 Backplane connection 5 Slot number of the CPU 2 2 3 6 Valid data types and addressing Valid data types for Allen Bradley E IP C Logix The selection of data types listed below can be used to configure tags Basic data types Data type Bit address space Bool Sint 0 7 USiInt 0 7 Int 0 to 15 Ulnt 0 15 Dint 0 31 UDint 0 to 31 Real String WinCC flexible 2008 Com
314. ng actions being activated at the same time All copy jobs are deleted 80019 The connection between WinCC flexible and all logs were closed for example after executing the system function CloseAllLogs Entries are written to the buffer and are then written to the logs when a connection is re established There is no connection to the storage location and the storage medium may be replaced for example 80020 The maximum number of simultaneously copy Wait until the current copying actions have been operations has been exceeded Copying is not completed then restart the last copy action executed 80021 An attempt was made to delete a log which is still Wait until the current copying actions have been busy with a copy action Deletion has not been completed then restart the last action executed 80022 An attempt was made to use the system function In the project check StartSequenceLog to start a sequence log fora e if the StartSequenceLog system function was log which is not configured as a sequence log No properly configured sequence log file is created e if the tag parameters are properly provided with data on the HMI device 80023 An attempt was made to copy a log to itself In the project check The log is not copied e if the CopyLog system function was properly configured e if the tag parameters are properly provided with data on the HMI device 80024 The CopyLog system function does not allow Edit the CopyLog
315. nly to TP 177B PN DP and OP 177B PN DP PROFINET IO Enabled must be deactivated Up to four SIMATIC S7 200 connections via PPI network For a series communication in the menu File gt Transfer gt Options clear Remote Control from Channel 1 Direct communication with PLC5 or KF2 module otherwise approved only with converter RS 422 RS232 6AV6 671 8XE00 0AX0 option KTP600 Basic PN color and KTP600 Basic PN mono Device based dependency of the interfaces The PLC and HMI device use a communication connection for data exchange You must ensure the interfaces are in concordance Among others the following parameters must be noted e The PLC and communication drivers must be in concordance e The HMI device must support the required communication protocol e Using the interface supported by the HMI device The Connections editor is used to configure the parameters for the communication drivers Supported interfaces The following tables show the hardware interfaces that are to be used on the HMI devices WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 29 Working with connections 1 5 Device based dependency Overview Micro Panels SIMATIC S7 PPI SIMATIC S7 MPI SIMATIC S7 PROFIBUS DP 1 SIMATIC S7 PROFINET SIMATIC S5 AS51141 SIMATIC S5 PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC 500 505 NITP SIMATIC 500 505 PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC HMI HTTP Protocol OPC Allen Bradl
316. nnecting cable MP3 RS 232 over converter for Mitsubishi Connecting cable MP1 over converter HMI device Mitsubishi converter Mitsubishi FXO 9 pin D Sub female connector 25 pin D Sub connector 6 pin screw terminal or 15 pin D Sub connector screw locking FG RDB RDA TDA TDB SG 9 25 pin FX 485C IF FG RDB RDA TDA TDB SG PP4 15 25 pin my my multipanel mm mw FG RDB RDA TDA TDB SG my my Stl Ce A FG RDB RDA TDA TDB SG Terminating resistor R 330 Ohm Shield with large area contact to casing at both ends Cable 5 x 0 14 mm2 shielded max length 500 m Use the connection cable PP2 to connect the PC converter Use the connection cable PP4 to connect the Multi Panel converter WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 5 Connecting cables for Mitsubishi 5 5 2 7 Connecting cable MP2 RS 422 for Mitsubishi MP2 connecting cable 248 HMI device 9 pin D Sub connector TxD TxD RxD RxD Cables 5 x 0 14 mm2 shielded max length 500 m Mitsubishi 6 pin screw terminal FG RDA RDB TDA TDB SG FG RDB RDA TDA TDB SG My My FG RDB RDA TDA TDB SG my My ea ge ee nee ee 11 LA a FG RDB RDA TDA TDB SG Terminating resistor R 330 Ohm WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2
317. nnector enclosure RxD SD TxD RD DTR RS DSR CS RTS CTS DR GND SG Cables 3 x 0 14 mm2 shielded max length 15 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 332 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Omron controllers 7 5 Connecting cables for Omron Hostlink Multilink 7 5 3 Connecting cable PP2 RS 422 for Omron Point to point cable PP2 RS 422 HMI device Omron connector 1 connector 2 9 pin D Sub connector 9 pin D Sub connector screw locking screw locking cable outlet to the rear cable outlet to the rear enclosure TxD RxD TxD RxD RxD TxD RxD TxD Insert resistor 220 ohms gt 150 mW e g design 0207 Cables 3 x 0 14 mm2 shield contacts connected max length 500 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 333 Communication with Omron controllers 7 5 Connecting cables for Omron Hostlink Multilink 7 5 4 Connecting cable MP1 RS 232 over converter for Omron Multipoint cable 1 MP TP PC gt PLC HMI device Omron 9 pin D Sub female 9 pin D Sub converter connector connector NT ALOO1 RS 232 RS 422 TxD RxD GND gt RxD gt TxD gt SG gt 5V 9 pin D Sub connector 6 pin screw terminal RDB RDA TDB TDA t I DC 5V 200mA Inrush current max 0 8 A RDB RDA TDB TDA i eo a I 1 L I RDB RDA TDB TDA 1 t I R
318. ntime software e WinCC flexible 2008 refers to the configuration software e Runtime designates the runtime software running on the HMI devices e WinCC flexible Runtime designates the visualization product for use on standard PCs or panel PCs The term WinCC flexible is used in the general context A version name such as WinCC flexible 2008 is used whenever it is necessary to distinguish it from other versions The following formatting is used to facilitate reading of the manual Notation Scope Add screen e Terminology that occurs in the user interface e g dialog names tabs buttons menu commands e Inputs required e g limit values tag values e Path information File gt Edit Operational sequences e g menu commands shortcut menu commands lt F1 gt lt Alt gt lt P gt Keyboard inputs Please observe notes labeled as follows Note Notes containing important information about the product and its use or a specific section of the documentation to which you should pay particular attention HMI SIMATIC SIMATIC HMI SIMATIC ProTool SIMATIC WinCC SIMATIC WinCC flexible Third parties using for their own purposes any other names in this document which refer to trademarks might infringe upon the rights of the trademark owners WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Preface Additional s
319. nual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 T 170B TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B 9 OP 170B Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No No No No No Yes No Yes Yes 19 Yes No No No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes Yes 5 No No Yes No Yes No MP 277 9 Yes Yes Yes 7 5 Device based dependency Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes 7 9 10 Yes 79 Yes 7 Yes 79 Yes 7 9 Yes 7 9 Yes 7 9 Yes 579 Yes 5 7 Yes 9 Yes 7 9 MP 370 Yes Yes Yes TP 270 TP 2779 OP 270 OP 277 9 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes 79 10 Yes Yes 79 No Yes Yes Yes 79 Yes Yes 7 9 Yes Yes 79 Yes Yes 7 9 Yes Yes 5 7 9 Yes Yes Yes Yes 9 Yes Yes 7 9 MP377 2 Yes Yes Yes 27 Working with connections 7 5 Device based dependency MP 177 9 MP 270B MP 277 9 MP 370 MP377 9 SIMATIC S7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes PROFINET SIMATIC S5 AS511 No Yes No Yes No SIMATIC S5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC 500 505 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes NITP SIMATIC 500 505 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC HMI Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes HTTP Protocol OPC No Yes Yes Yes Yes SIMOTION No Yes Yes Yes Yes Allen Bradley DF1 Yes 7 9 10 Yes Yes 7 9 10 Yes Yes 7 9 10 Allen Bradley DH 485 Yes 79 Yes Yes 7 9 Yes Yes 7 9 Allen Bradley Yes 9 Yes Yes 79 Yes
320. nual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with Modicon controllers 6 3 Communication via Modbus TCP IP protocol 6 3 Communication via Modbus TCP IP protocol 6 3 1 Requirements of communication Connector The HMI device can be connected to the Modicon PLC via the following components e Existing Ethernet network in which the PLCs are located e Cross over Ethernet cable directly connected to the Ethernet port of the CPU or communication module The connection of the HMI device to a Modicon PLC is essentially restricted to the physical connection of the HMI device No special blocks are required in the PLC for the connection 6 3 2 Installing the communication driver Driver for the HMI device The drivers for the connection to a Modicon PLC via Modbus TCP IP are provided and automatically installed with WinCC flexible No special blocks are required in the PLC for the connection 6 3 3 Configuring the PLC type and protocol Select the PLC For a connection to a Modicon PLC double click on Communication gt Connections in the project view of the HMI device Go to the Communication drivers column and select the protocol Modicon Modbus TCP IP The property view displays the protocol parameters You can edit the parameters at any time by double clicking Communication gt Connections in the project view of the HMI device Select the connection and edit its parameters in the properties dialog box WinCC flexible
321. o Yes 78 No Yes 78 No Yes 7 8 No Yes 78 No 25 Working with connections 1 5 Device based dependency Modicon Modbus TCP IP Omron Telemecanique Basic Panels SIMATIC S7 PPI SIMATIC S7 MPI SIMATIC S7 PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC S7 PROFINET SIMATIC S5 AS511 SIMATIC S5 PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC 500 505 NITP SIMATIC 500 505 PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC HMI HTTP Protocol OPC SIMOTION Allen Bradley DF1 Allen Bradley DH 485 Allen Bradley Ethernet IP GE Fanuc LG GLOFA GM Mitsubishi FX Mitsubishi P4 Modicon Modbus RTU Modicon Modbus TCP IP Omron Telemecanique 26 Mobile Panel 170 No Yes Yes KTP400 Basic PN No No No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No KTP600 Basic DP Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No Yes 10 No No No No No No Yes 5 No No No Mobile Panel 177 DP No Yes 7 8 Yes 7 8 No No No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No KTP600 Basic PN 11 Mobile Panel 177 PN Yes No No KTP1000 Basic DP Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No Yes 10 No No No No No No Yes 5 No No No Mobile Panel 277 Yes 8 Yes 7 8 Yes 7 8 KTP1000 Basic PN No No No Yes No No No No No No No
322. o ensure compliance of the data format with WinCC flexible and to avoid the reading of incorrect information Note Note that when you enter the year values 80 99 result in years 1980 through 1999 and the values 0 29 result in the years 2000 through 2029 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 274 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Modicon controllers 6 4 User data areas 6 4 3 5 Coordination area pointer Function Application The Coordination area pointer is used to implement the following functionality e detection in the control program of HMI device startup e detection in the control program of the current HMI device operating mode e detection in the control program of the HMI devices ready to communicate state The Coordination area pointer has a length of two words Note The HMI device always writes the entire coordination area when updating the area pointer The control program may not make changes to the coordination area for this reason Assignment of bits in the Coordination area pointer Startup bit Operating mode Life bit high order byte low order byte 15 8 7 2 1 0 1st word 2st word not assigned ae ec Berecheeedeceedecs Eo Startup bit Operation mode reserved a Life bit x assigned The startup bit is set briefly to 0 by the HMI device during startup It sets the bit permanently to 1 when startup is completed The op
323. ob and the data record already exists the HMI device aborts the job and enters 0000 1100 in the status word of the data record 5 The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers Sequence of writing to the PLC using PLC job DAT gt PLC no 70 Step Action 1 Check Status word 0 Yes No 2 The HMI device enters the recipe and data record number specified in Abort without the job and the status Transfer active in the data record return message 3 The HMI device fetches the values of the data record specified in the function from the data medium and writes the values to the PLC The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed 5 The control program can now evaluate the transferred data The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 95 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 3 User data areas Sequence of a transfer started by the operator in the recipe display Reading from the PLC started by the operator in the recipe display Step Action 1 Check Status word 0 Yes No 2 The HMI device enters the recipe number to be read and the status Abort with system Transfer active in the data record and sets the data record number alarm to 0 3 The HMI device reads the values fro
324. ollers 5 3 Communication via protocol 4 5 3 7 Commissioning components Transferring the PLC program to the PLC 1 Interconnect the PC with the CPU using the appropriate cable 2 Download the program files to the CPU 3 Then set the CPU to RUN Transferring project data to the HMI device 1 The HMI device must be in transfer mode in order to accept the project transfer Possible scenarios Initial commissioning The HMI device does not yet contain any configuration data in the initial commissioning phase The project data and runtime software required for operation must be transferred from the configuration computer to the device The HMI device automatically changes to transfer mode The transfer dialog box opens with a connection message on the HMI device Recommissioning Recommissioning means that you overwrite existing project data on the HMI device For corresponding detailed instructions refer to the Manual of your HMI device 2 Check whether the alarm settings meet requirements of your WinCC flexible project 3 Select Project gt Transfer gt Transfer settings to configure the transfer parameters before you transfer project data to the HMI device Select the used port Set the transfer parameters Select the target storage location 4 Initiate the transfer of project data by clicking Transfer The project is compiled automatically All compilation and transfer steps are logged to a mes
325. ommunication Part 2 194 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with LG controllers 4 5 Connecting cables for LG GLOFA GM 4 5 5 Connecting cable MP1 RS 485 for LG IMO Multipoint cable 1 HMI device LG INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS IMO connector 1 connector 2 9 pin D Sub connector terminal strips screw locking P in PLC P in PLC P in PLC P in PLC Data B 3 1 RDA Data A 8 2 RDB GND 5 Shield with large area contact to casing at both ends Cable 2 x 2 x 0 14 mm2 shielded max length 500 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 195 Communication with LG controllers 4 5 Connecting cables for LG GLOFA GM 4 5 6 Connecting cable MP2 RS 422 for LG IMO Multipoint cable 2 HMI device LG INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS IMO connector 2 connector 1 6 pin terminal strip 9 pin D Sub connector screw locking Pin PLC Pin PLC Pin PLC P in PLC Shield with large area contact to casing at both ends Cable 3 x 2 x 0 14 mm shielded max length 500 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 196 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 5 1 Communication with Mitsubishi MELSEC 5 1 1 Communication partner Mitsubishi MELSEC Introduction This section describes communication between an HMI device and Mitsubishi Electric controllers These controllers communicate by means of the fo
326. ompleted called before using the ExportLog system function Change the configuration as required 90000 FDA alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 90024 No operator actions can be logged due to lack of Make more space available by inserting an empty space on the storage medium for log The operator storage medium or swapping out the log files on the action will therefore not be executed server using ExportLog 90025 No user actions can be logged because of error Check whether the storage medium is correctly state of the archive Therefore the user action will inserted not be executed 90026 No operator actions can be logged because the log Before further operator actions are carried out the log is closed The operator action will therefore not be must be opened again using the system function executed OpenAllLogs Change the configuration as required 90028 The password you entered is incorrect Enter the correct password 90029 Runtime was closed during ongoing operation Ensure that you are using the correct storage medium perhaps due to a power failure or a storage medium in use is incompatible with Audit Trail An Audit Trail is not suitable if it belongs to another project or has already be archived 90030 Runtime was closed during ongoing operation perhaps due to a power failure 90031 Runtime was closed during ongoing operation perhaps due to a power f
327. on 2 4 261 Connection a 254 Create tag Creating an array 2 Device dependent parameters 256 262 Installing communication ae 255 261 Network parameters 2 Optimizing the conia ion 258 Permitted data type 257 263 PLC dependent e 257 Protocol parameters 256 2 psn bed Restrictions with Modbus RTU 251 Restrictions with Modbus TCP IP 253 Select the PLC 255 Multiplexing Address multiplexing Allen Bradley Ethernet IP N Network parameters Allen Bradley DF1 Allen Bradley DH485 6 GE Fanuc Modicon 256 O Offices 7 Omron Hostlink Multilink Configuring an alarm 325 Configuring protocol parameters 300 Connecting cables Connection 29 Create tag 3 Creating an array 3 Device dependent ees 300 Installing communication drivers 299 378 Optimizing the type BO uration 303 Permitted data type 301 PLC dependent par rameters 300 300 Select the PLC 299 OP 73 Transmission rate on PROFIBUS 52 62 119 160 ope 208 B58 Bod ce rate on PROFIBUS b2 62 119 160 201 208 256 300 Operational message 97 141 183 233 286 323 Operator input in the a nad iTe 184 32 085 aaa Transferring data Optimizing the ben TE a Allen Bradley DF1 Allen Bradley DH485 Allen Bradley Ethernet IP GE Fanuc LG GLOFA GM 163 Mitsubishi PG 203 Mitsubishi protocol 4 Modicon Omron Hostlink Multilink P Parameter Connections editor Permitted data type Allen Bradley DF 1 Allen Bradley DH4
328. on Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with Modicon controllers 6 4 User data areas 6 4 3 8 Data mailbox area pointer Data mailbox area pointer Function When data records are transferred between the HMI device and PLC both partners access common communications areas on the PLC Data transfer types There are two ways of transferring data records between the HMI device and PLC e Transfer without synchronization e Transfer with synchronization over the data record Data records are always transferred directly That is the tag values are read from an address or written to an address configured for this tag directly without redirecting the values by means of interim memory Initiating the transfer of data records There are three ways of triggering the transfer e Operator input in the recipe view e PLC jobs The transfer of data records can also be triggered by the PLC e Triggering by configured functions If the transfer of data records is triggered by a configured function or by a PLC job the recipe display on the HMI device remains operable The data records are transferred in the background Simultaneous processing of several transfer requests is however not possible In this case the HMI device rejects the other transfer requests with a system alarm Transfer without synchronization If you select asynchronous transfer of data records between the HMI device and PLC there is no coord
329. on to Interface Module AlC LAN RS485 For RS 232 15 pin to 9 pin sub D PP2 RS 232 AlC to 8 pin Mini DIN PP3 RS 232 AlC For RS 232 9 pin to 9 pin sub D 1761 CP3 to 8 pin mini DIN 1761 CBL PM02 For RS 485 9 pin MP1 RS 485 DH485 LAN The HMI device port to be used is defined in the corresponding Manual Refer to the Allen Bradley documentation for information on cabling The pin assignment of the cables is described in the section Connecting cables for Allen Bradley 2 2 2 2 Installing the communication driver Driver for the HMI device The communication driver for Allen Bradley PLCs for which WinCC flexible supports communication over DH485 protocol is supplied with WinCC flexible This driver is installed automatically for Panels and Multi Panels It must be installed manually for Panel PCs and standard PCs Installing the driver for Panel PCs and standard PCs running on Windows XP and Windows Vista The Allen Bradley DH485 protocol is released for the operating systems e Windows XP e Windows Vista The computer must meet the following requirements e Processor at least 450 MHz Only communication with the RS 232 interface over the AlC module has been released Note When the driver is being installed no other serial interface may be operating This also applies to interfaces switched online by other programs for example RSLogix 500 or RSLinx WinCC flexi
330. oned scenario Commissioning components communications modules Transferring the PLC program to the PLC 1 Interconnect the PC with the CPU using the appropriate cable 2 Download the program files to the CPU 3 Then set the CPU to RUN Transferring project data to the HMI device 1 The HMI device must be in transfer mode in order to accept the project transfer Possible scenarios Initial commissioning The HMI device does not yet contain any configuration data in the initial commissioning phase The project data and runtime software required for operation must be transferred from the configuration computer to the device The HMI device automatically changes to transfer mode The transfer dialog box opens with a connection message on the HMI device Recommissioning Recommissioning means that you overwrite existing project data on the HMI device For corresponding detailed instructions refer to the Manual of your HMI device 2 Check whether the alarm settings meet requirements of your WinCC flexible project 3 Select Project gt Transfer gt Transfer settings to configure the transfer parameters before you transfer project data to the HMI device Select the used port Set the transfer parameters Select the target storage location 4 Initiate the transfer of project data by clicking Transfer The project is compiled automatically All compilation and transfer steps are logged to a message window
331. onfigure the tag or the array tag and the bit number that is written to the PLC after acknowledgment from the HMI device Make sure when you use an array tag that it is not longer than 6 words In order to ensure that a signal transition is generated as soon as the acknowledgment bit is set the HMI device first resets the acknowledgment bit assigned to an error alarm There is a certain time based offset between these two operations due to the processing time of the HMI device Note The reset includes all alarm bits acknowledged since the last restart of Runtime The PLC may only read this area once If the alarm is acknowledged on the HMI device the bit is then set in the assigned acknowledgment tag on the PLC This allows the PLC to recognize that the error alarm has been acknowledged The figure below shows the pulse diagram Error alarm S I I I AL Acknowledgment l HMI device gt PLC l Arrival of the Reset of _ New error alarm acknowledgm bit via HMI device l error alarm WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 238 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 5 Connecting cables for Mitsubishi 5 5 Connecting cables for Mitsubishi 5 5 1 Connecting cables for Mitsubishi PG protocol 5 5 1 1 Adapter 6XV1440 2UE32 RS 232 for Mitsubishi 6XV1440 2UE32 This adapter is inserted in the HMI device and enables the Mitsubishi cable SC 07
332. onfigured in the Area pointers dialog of the Connections editor Area pointers used in WinCC flexible Device dependency PLC job Project ID Screen number Data record Date time Date time PLC Coordination Availability of the area pointer depends on the HMI device used WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 125 Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 3 User data areas Application Configure and enable the area pointer in Communication gt Connections before you put it into use Parameters Area pointer For all connections lt undefined gt v Date time PLC Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt lt undefined gt Screen number 5 Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt lt undefined gt Project ID 1 Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt S T Jl gt For each connection pane fers ana rence pence fanme pa Data mailbox Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt Job mailbox 4 Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt Coordination 1 Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt Date time 6 Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt lt iil Ral Enabling an area pointer based on the example of a SIMATIC S7 PLC e Active Enables the area pointer e Name Name of the area pointer defined by WinCC flexible e Address Tag address of the area pointer in the PLC e Length WinCC flexible defines the default length of the area pointer e Acquisition cycle Define an acquisition cy
333. onnector 8 pin RJ45 connector V 24 screw locking V 24 enclosure GND GND lt RxD TxD lt D TxD RxD D RTS lt CTS D Pin 1 is at the bottom when looking at the controller RJ45 Shield with large area contact to casing at both ends Cable 5 x 0 14 mm2 shielded max length 15 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 153 Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 5 Connecting cables for GE Fanuc 3 5 6 Connecting cable PP6 RS 232 for GE Fanuc Connecting cable PP6 with RJ 45 connector HMI device GE Fanuc connector 1 connector 2 15 pin D Sub connector 8 pin RJ45 connector V 24 shift latch V 24 enclosure GND TxD RxD RTS VAYA CTS Pin 1 is at the bottom when looking at the controller RJ45 Shield with large area contact to casing at both ends Cable 5 x 0 14 mm2 shielded max length 15 m 3 5 7 Connection cable MP1 RS 422 for GE Fanuc Multipoint cable MP1 This cable connects the RS 422 output of the HE693SNP232A adapter with the Fanuc controllers The HMI device is connected to the adapter with the PP1 or PP2 cables WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 154 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 5 Connecting cables for GE Fanuc caution The power supply for the adapter must only be connected in one PLC otherwise the controllers will be damaged
334. ontrollers Connecting cables 2 2 Configuring the Allen Bradley communication driver HMI panel interface used For connection to PLC5x For connection to SLC5 03 SLC5 04 SLC5 05 For connection to Micro Logix RS 232 15 pin 6XV1440 2L ___ 6XV1440 2K_ PP1 RS 232 ML RS 232 9 pin Allen Bradley cable Allen Bradley cable Allen Bradley cable 1784 CP10 1747 CP3 1761 CBL PM02 RS 422 9 pin 6XV1440 2V_ Length key see catalog ST 80 The HMI port to be used is defined in the corresponding Manual The pin assignment of the cables is described in the section Connecting cables for Allen Bradley DF1 protocol with multipoint connection over KF2 module on DH LAN The KF2 protocol interface module supports the connection of PLCs to the DH LAN data highway plus local area network RS232 RS422 15 9 Pin Sub D DF1 RS232 25 Pin Sub D Connecting cables Channel 1A 3 Pin Phoenix PLC5x except PLC5 11 Channel 1B 8 Pin Mini Din DH Data Highway Plus SLC5 04 Channel 1 8 Pin Mini Din or 3 Pin Phoenix HMI panel interface used For connection to Interface Module KF2 RS 232 15 pin 6XV1440 2L____ and adapter 25 pin female female RS 232 9 pin Allen Bradley cable 1784 CP10 and 25 pin female female adapter RS 422 9 pin 6XV1440 2V____ and 25 pin female female adapter WinCC flexible 2008 Commun
335. ontrollers 6 4 User data areas Application Configure and enable the area pointer in Communication gt Connections before you put it into use Parameters Area pointer For all connections 5 ae ee es lt undefined gt Date time PLC Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt lt undefined gt Screen number Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt lt undefined gt Project ID 1 Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt i Bi For each connection jc ced Se a aae y Data mailbox yclic continuous lt undefined gt Off Tob mailbox 4 Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt Z off Coordination 1 Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt Off Date time 6 Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt lt M ij gt Enabling an area pointer based on the example of a SIMATIC S7 PLC e Active Enables the area pointer e Name Name of the area pointer defined by WinCC flexible e Address Tag address of the area pointer in the PLC e Length WinCC flexible defines the default length of the area pointer e Acquisition cycle Define an acquisition cycle in this field to allow cyclic reading of the area pointer in Runtime An extremely short acquisition time may have a negative impact on HMI device performance e Comment Save a comment for example to describe the purpose of the area pointer WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 295 Communication with Modicon controllers 6 4 User data areas
336. orking with connections 1 1 Basics 1 1 1 Communication basics Introduction The data exchange between two communication partners is known as communication The communication partners can be interconnected via direct cable connection or network Communication partners A communication partner can be any node which is capable of communicating and exchanging data with other nodes on the network In the WinCC flexible environment the following nodes can be communication partners e Central modules and communication modules in the automation system e can be HMI devices and communication processors in the PC Data transferred between the communication partners may serve different purposes e process control e process data acquisition e reporting states in a process e process data logging WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 15 Working with connections 1 1 Basics 1 1 2 Principles of communication Introduction WinCC flexible controls communication between the HMI and the PLC by means of tags and area pointers Communication using tags In WinCC flexible tags are centrally managed in the Tag editor There are external and internal tags External tags are used for communication and represent the image of defined memory locations on the PLC The HMI and the PLC both have read and write access to this storage location Those read and write operations may cyclic or event trigge
337. orting that the specified record memory was cleared 290061 Alarm reporting that clearing of record memory was canceled due to an error 290062 The record number is above the maximum of 65536 This record cannot be created Select another number 364 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Appendix 8 1 System alarms Number 290063 Effect causes This occurs with the system function ExportDataRecords when the parameter Overwrite is set to No An attempt has been made to save a recipe under a file name which already exists The export is canceled Remedy Check the ExportDataRecords system function 290064 Alarm reporting that the deletion of records has started 290065 Alarm reporting that the deletion of records has successfully completed 290066 Confirmation request before deleting records 290068 Security request to confirm if all records in the recipe should be deleted 290069 Security request to confirm if all records in the recipe should be deleted 290070 The record specified is not in the import file Check the source of the record number or record name constant or tag value 290071 During the editing of record values a value was entered which exceeded the low limit of the recipe tag The entry is discarded Enter a value within the limits of the recipe tag
338. ot updated because communication with the PLC is down Select the system function SetOnline to go online 190004 The tag is not updated because the configured tag address does not exist Check the configuration 190005 The tag is not updated because the configured PLC type does not exist for this tag Check the configuration 190006 The tag is not updated because it is not possible to map the PLC type in the data type of the tag Check the configuration 190007 The tag value is not modified because the connection to the PLC is interrupted or the tag is offline Set online mode or reconnect to the PLC 190008 The threshold values configured for the tag have been violated for example by e A value entered e A system function e A script Observe the configured or current threshold values of the tag 190009 An attempt has been made to assign the tag a value which is outside the permitted range of values for this data type For example a value of 260 was entered for a byte tag or a value of 3 for an unsigned word tag Observe the range of values for the data type of the tags 190010 Too many values are written to the tag for example in a loop triggered by a script Values are lost because only up to 100 actions are saved to the buffer The following remedies are available e Increase the time interval between multiple write actions e Do not use an arr
339. parated by point In addition to basic data types the structure elements may represent arrays or other structures Only one dimensional arrays may be used as a structure element Note The nesting depth of structures is only limited by the maximum length of 128 characters for the address Address multiplexing in Allen Bradley E IP C Logix Address multiplexing The Allen Bradley E IP C Logix communication driver supports address multiplexing Address multiplexing requires two tags 74 Tag_1 of data type String contains a logical address such as HMI Robot5 Block5 as value The value may change to a second valid address for example HMI Robot4 Block3 Tag_2 contains a connection setup with the Allen Bradley E IP C Logix communication driver However declare Tag_1 as address instead of a constant The square brackets indicate address multiplexing The address is derived from the actual value in Tag_1 Note You can only multiplex the entire Allen Bradley E IP C Logix addresses Multiplexing of address elements is not possible HMI Robot Tag_1 Block5 is an invalid address You can optionally click the arrow right icon in the Address column Replace the Constant with the Multiplex entry by clicking the arrow on the left edge of the next address dialog box Now the tag selection list only returns tags of data type String You can also configure a function triggered by a change of value event
340. pdate time Discrete alarms Screens Trends The acquisition cycles for the Area pointers and the those of the tags specified in the configuration software are decisive factors for the actual update times that can be achieved The update time is the sum of the acquisition cycle transmission time processing time To achieve optimum update times remember the following points during configuration e Keep the individual data areas as small as possible and as large as necessary e Define data areas that belong together as belonging together You can improve the update time by setting up one large data area instead of several small areas e If the acquisition cycles you select are too short this is detrimental to the overall performance Set the acquisition cycle to suit the rate of change of the process values The rate of temperature changes at a furnace for example is significantly slower compared to the speed rate of an electrical drive As a general guideline the acquisition cycle should be approx 1 second e Put the tags of an alarm or a screen in one data area without gaps e To allow changes in the PLC to be recognized reliably they must be available at least during the actual acquisition cycle e Set the transmission rate to the highest possible value For discrete alarms use arrays and assign the individual alarms to one bit of the array tags themselves and not to the individual subelements For discrete alarms and arr
341. peration must be transferred from the configuration computer to the device The HMI device automatically changes to transfer mode The transfer dialog box opens with a connection message on the HMI device Recommissioning Recommissioning means that you overwrite existing project data on the HMI device For corresponding detailed instructions refer to the Manual of your HMI device 2 Check whether the alarm settings meet requirements of your WinCC flexible project 3 Select Project gt Transfer gt Transfer settings to configure the transfer parameters before you transfer project data to the HMI device Select the used port Set the transfer parameters Select the target storage location 4 Initiate the transfer of project data by clicking Transfer The project is compiled automatically All compilation and transfer steps are logged to a message window Message output on the configuration computer after successful completion of the transfer Transfer completed successfully The start screen appears on the HMI device Interconnecting the PLC with the HMI device 1 Interconnect the PLC CPU or communication module with the HMI device using a suitable patch cable 2 The message Connection to PLC is established is output to the HMI device Note that users can edit the system alarm texts in WinCC flexible NOTICE Always observe the safety related information in the HMI device manual whe
342. r e Install a certificate with a valid date on the server Invalid CN Common Name or Computer Name e Either ignore this item in your project or e Install a certificate with a name that corresponds to that of the server address 230203 Although a connection can be made to the Error 503 Service unavailable server the HTTP server refuses to connect Check that WinCC flexible Runtime is running on the because server and the HTTP channel is supported e WinCC flexible Runtime is not running on the server or e The HTTP channel is not supported 503 Service unavailable Other errors can only occur if the Webserver does not support the HTTP channel The language of the alarm text depends on the Webserver Data is not exchanged 230301 An internal error has occurred An English text explains the error in more detail This may be caused by insufficient memory OCX does not work 230302 The name of the remote server cannot be Check the configured server address resolved Check whether the DNS service is available on the The attempt to connect failed network 230303 The remote server is not running on the Check the configured server address addressed computer Check whether the remote server is running on the Wrong server address target computer The attempt to connect failed 230304 The remote server on the addressed computer Use a compatible remote server is incompatible with VNCOCX The attempt to connect failed 35
343. r the permanent window e Current screen number 1 to 32767 e Current field number 1 to 32767 2 3 3 3 Date time area pointer Function This area pointer is used to transfer the date and time from the HMI device to the PLC The PLC writes control job 41 to the job mailbox When it evaluating the control job the HMI device saves its current date and time to the data area configured in the Date time area pointer All definitions are coded in BCD format The Date Time area pointer when used in a project which contains multiple connections must be enabled for each configured connection The date time data area has the following structure Data word Left byte Right byte 15 7 0 n 0 Reserved Hour 0 to 23 n 1 Minute 0 to 59 Second 0 to 59 Time n 2 Reserved Reserved n 3 Reserved Weekday 1 to 7 1 Sunday n 4 Day 1 to 31 Month 1 to 12 Date n 5 Year 80 to 99 0 to 29 Reserved Note The entry of values from 80 to 99 in the Year data area returns the years 1980 through 1999 values from 0 to 29 return the years 2000 through 2029 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 84 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 3 3 4 Date time controller area pointer Function 2 3 User data areas This area pointer is used to transfer the date and time from the PLC to the HMI device Use this area pointer if the PLC is the time master The PLC loads the data area of the area pointer
344. r their address via the bridge functionality of the first PLC Note It is not possible to integrate the HMI device in a Modbus network as the HMI device is a Modbus master The integration of the HMI device in a Modbus Plus network via Modbus Plus Bridge type BM85 000 logical point to point communication of the HMI device with a Modbus 984 or TSX Quantum The integration of the HMI device in a Modbus Plus network via the Bridge function of the Modicon 984 or TSX Quantum logical point to point communication of the HMI device with a PLC WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Modicon controllers Restrictions Co 6 7 Communication with Modicon Modbus nnecting the HMI device to PLCs of other manufacturers who offer a Modbus interface has not been tested and is not approved If you nevertheless use a different PLC you will find several useful tips here This driver works only with tags with the standard for Modicon PLCs bit counting method from left bit1 highest value bit to right bit 16 lowest bit with data type INT The address offset displayed during configuration is subtracted at the protocol level in the frame For example the offset of the Holding register 4x is 40001 As a result the configured address 40006 becomes address 5 in the frame The conversion of the address transferred in the frame for example 5 to the PLC specific a
345. ransfers 284 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with Modicon controllers Sequence of a transfer started by the operator in the recipe display Reading from the PLC started by the operator in the recipe display 6 4 User data areas Step Action 1 Check Status word 0 Yes No 2 The HMI device enters the recipe number to be read and the status Abort with system Transfer active in the data record and sets the data record number alarm to 0 3 The HMI device reads the values from the PLC and displays them in the recipe display If the recipes have synchronized tags the values from the PLC are also written to the tags 4 The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed 5 The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers Writing to the PLC started by the operator in the recipe display Step Action Check Status word 0 1 Yes No The HMI device enters the recipe and data record number to be Abort with system written and the status Transfer active in the data record alarm 2 The HMI device writes the current values to the PLC If the recipes have synchronized tags the changed values are synchronized between the recipe display and tags and then written to the PLC 3 The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed 4 If requi
346. rce exists and start up the system again 80009 A copying action has been completed successfully 80010 Since the storage location was incorrectly entered Configure the storage location for the respective log in WinCC flexible this causes a permanent loss of again and restart the system when the full functionality the functionality is required 342 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Appendix 8 1 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 80012 Log entries are stored in a buffer If the values are Archive fewer values read to the buffer faster than they can be physically Or written using a hard disk for example Increase the logging cycle overloading may occur and recording is then stopped 80013 The overload status no longer applies Archiving resumes the recording of all values 80014 The same action was triggered twice in quick succession Since the process is already in operation the action is only carried out once 80015 This system alarm is used to report DOS or database errors to the user 80016 The logs are separated by the system function Reconnect the logs CloseAllLogs and the incoming entries exceed the defined buffer size All entries in the buffer are deleted 80017 The number of incoming events cause a buffer Stop the copy action overflow This can be caused for example by several copyi
347. reate array tags using tags of the N O I S and B file type and Int and UlInt data type Note I O modules with 8 or 16 ports occupy one data word on the PLC I O modules with 24 or 32 ports occupy two data words The HMI device does not output an error message if using non existent bits You should always make sure that I O modules with 8 or 24 ports only occupy the bits that are actually assigned to a port Optimizing the configuration Acquisition cycle and update time 64 The acquisition cycles for the Area pointers and of the tags defined in the configuration software are decisive in terms of the update times which can actually be achieved The update time is equivalent to the acquisition cycle transmission time processing time Items to observe when optimizing the update times in configuration data Optimize the maximum and minimum size of the data areas Define data areas that belong together as belonging together You can improve the update time by setting up one large data area instead of several small areas Acquisition cycles which are too short lead to unnecessary load on overall performance Set the acquisition cycle according to the rate of change of the process values The rate of temperature changes at a furnace for example is significantly slower compared to the speed rate of an electrical drive A time of approx 1 second is a benchmark for the acquisition cycle Avoid any gaps when
348. red In your configuration create tags that point to specific PLC addresses The HMI reads the value from the defined address and then displays it The operator may also enter values on the HMI device which will be written to the relevant PLC address Communication using area pointers Area pointers are used to exchange data of specific user data areas Area pointers are parameter fields WinCC flexible receives from these parameter fields in runtime the information about the location and size of data areas in the PLC During communication the PLC and the HMI device alternately access those data areas for read and write operations Based on the evaluation of data stored in the data areas the PLC and HMI device trigger defined actions WinCC flexible uses the following area pointers e Control request e Project ID e Screen number e Data record e Date time e Date time PLC e Coordination The availability of the various area pointers is determined by the HMI used Communication between WinCC flexible and automation systems Industrial communication using WinCC flexible means that data are exchanged using tags and area pointers To acquire the data the HMI sends request messages to the automation system using a communication driver The automation system AS returns the requested data to the HMI in a response frame WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 16 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Working with connections
349. red the control program can now evaluate the transferred data 5 The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers Note The status word may only be set by the HMI device The PLC may only reset the status word to zero Note The PLC may only evaluate the recipe and data record numbers when data inconsistency is detected if one of the conditions outlined below has been met e The data mailbox status is set to Transfer completed e The data mailbox status is set to Transfer completed with error WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 295 Communication with Modicon controllers 6 4 User data areas 6 4 4 Events alarms and acknowledgments 6 4 4 1 General information on operational messages alarm messages and acknowledgments Function Messages return information about the PLC or HMI device operating states or problems to the user on the HMI device The message texts consist of configurable texts and or tags with actual values Operational messages and events must be distinguished The programmer defines what is an operational message and what is an error alarm Operational message An operational message indicates a state Example e Motor on e PLC in manual mode Alarm message An error alarm indicates a malfunction Example e Valve does not open e Excess motor temperature Alarms indicate exceptional operational states and mu
350. ring the communication driver for GE Fanuc Device dependent parameters e Interface Select the HMI port to which the GE Fanuc PLC is connected under Interface For more detailed information refer to the Manual of the HMI device e Type Depending on the selected interface here RS 232 or RS 422 are chosen Note If you use the IF1B interface you must also switch over the RS 422 received data and the RTS signal using 4 DIP switches on the back of the Multi Panel e Baud rate Define the transmission rate between the HMI device and the PLC under Baud rate Note The highest station address must be less than or equal to 63 if you set a transmission rate of 1 5 Mbaud at OP 73 or OP 77A If connecting a TP 170A to a SIMATIC S7 station at a transmision rate of 1 5 MBaud on PROFIBUS DP set a value less than or equal to 63 for the highest station address HSA e Data bits Under Data bits 8 bits is always selected e Parity Select None Even or Odd under Parity e Stop bits Select 1 or 2 Stop bits Network parameters e Long break Under Long Break you set the time in ms for establishing connections to the individual controllers We recommend keeping the default setting of 50 ms If connection problems occur despite identical interface parameters on the PLC and HMI device increase this value step by step Note Increasing the long break however always increases the update times
351. rogram files to the CPU 3 Then set the CPU to RUN Transferring project data to the HMI device 1 The HMI device must be in transfer mode in order to accept the project transfer Possible scenarios Initial commissioning The HMI device does not yet contain any configuration data in the initial commissioning phase The project data and runtime software required for operation must be transferred from the configuration computer to the device The HMI device automatically changes to transfer mode The transfer dialog box opens with a connection message on the HMI device Recommissioning Recommissioning means that you overwrite existing project data on the HMI device For corresponding detailed instructions refer to the Manual of your HMI device 2 Check whether the alarm settings meet requirements of your WinCC flexible project 3 Select Project gt Transfer gt Transfer settings to configure the transfer parameters before you transfer project data to the HMI device Select the used port Set the transfer parameters Select the target storage location 4 Initiate the transfer of project data by clicking Transfer The project is compiled automatically All compilation and transfer steps are logged to a message window Message output on the configuration computer after successful completion of the transfer Transfer completed successfully The start screen appears on the HMI device WinCC flexible
352. roup number 1 to 255 132 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 3 User data areas No Function 14 Setting the time BCD coded Parameter 2 3 24 User logoff Logs off the current user The function corresponds to the logoff system function Parameter 1 2 3 40 Transfer date time to PLC in the S7 format DATE_AND_TIME An interval of at least 5 seconds must be maintained between two successive jobs to prevent overload of the HMI device Parameter 1 2 3 41 Transfer date time to PLC In OP MP format An interval of at least 5 seconds must be maintained between successive jobs in order to prevent overload of the HMI device Parameter 1 2 3 46 Update tags Causes the HMI device to read the current value of the PLC tags whose update ID matches the value transferred in Parameter 1 Function corresponds to the UpdateTag system function Parameter 1 1 100 49 Clear process alarm buffer Parameter 1 2 3 50 Clear alarm buffer Parameter 1 2 3 51 Screen selection Parameter 1 Screen number Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Field number 69 Read data record from PLC Parameter 1 Recipe number 1 999 Parameter 2 Data record number 1 65535 Parameter 3 0 Do not
353. rrays of all basic types being valid for element addressing Read write operations are only carried out at the addressed element and not for the entire array Bit access is allowed to all basic data types with the exception of Bool Real and String Bit addressing is also allowed at array structure elements Data type Bool is set in WinCC flexible for the addressing of bits and bit tags in the basic data types One place bit numbers will be address with x or Ox x bit number Bit numbers are defined by up to two digits Note With the Bool data type in the data types Sint Int and DInt after changing the specified bit the complete tag is then written in the PLC again In the meantime no check is made as to whether other bits in the tag have since changed Therefore the PLC may have only read access to the specified tag User defined data types are created by means of structures These structures group tags of different data types Structures may consist of basic types arrays and of other structures WinCC flexible only addresses structure elements instead of the entire structure WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 73 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 2 Contiguring the Allen Bradley communication driver Structure elements Structure elements are addressed by means of the name of the structure and of the required structure element This addressing is se
354. rrect Values cannot be read or written e The computer name is correct e The server is registered 160012 No connection to the server because the server Check for example if Values cannot be read or written e The computer name is correct e The server is registered Note for advanced users Interpret the value from HRESULT 160013 The specified server was started as InProc server Configure the server as OutProc Server or Local This has not been released and may possibly lead Server to incorrect behavior because the server is running in the same process area as the WinCC flexible Runtime software 160014 Only one OPC server project can be started on a Do not start a second project with OPC server PC MP An alarm is output when an attempt is functionality on the computer made to start a second project The second project has no OPC server functionality and cannot be located as an OPC server by external sources 170000 S7 dialog alarms Number 170000 Effect causes S7 diagnostics events are not indicated because it is not possible to log on to the S7 diagnostics functions at this device The service is not supported Remedy 170001 The S7 diagnostics buffer cannot be viewed because communication with the PLC is shut down Set the PLC to online mode 170002 The S7 diagnostics buffer cannot be viewed because reading of the diagnostics buffer SSL was canceled with error 170003 An S7 dia
355. s WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 Connection 2 2 Configuring the Allen Bradley communication driver Communication via DH485 protocol Requirements of communication A connection between the HMI device and the Allen Bradley PLC only requires basic configuration of the interface parameters and bus addresses It is not necessary to install special communication blocks in the PLC Note Allen Bradley corporation offers a multitude of communication adapters for the integration of nodes in DH485 DH and DH networks None of the Allen Bradley communication adapters have not been subject to system tests and release in conjunction with the Siemens communication driver for DH485 protocol Point to point connection over DH485 protocol The DH485 protocol supports point to point and multipoint connections An HMI device can be interconnected directly with the PLC by means of RS 232 port An Isolated Link Coupler AIC or an Advanced Interface Converter AIC must be installed for the electrical isolation of the RS 485 port for connections over DH485 For more detailed information refer to the Allen Bradley documentation RS 485 9 Pin Sub D DH485 RS 485 6 Pin Phoenix Channel 0 AIC AIC 9 Pin Sub D Channel 0 8 Pin Mini DIN SLC5 03 SLC5 04 Micro Logix SLC500 SLC5 01 SLC5 05
356. s OP 73micro PROFIBUS DP direct keys No PROFINET IO direct keys No Mobile Panels Mobile Panel 170 PROFIBUS DP direct keys No PROFINET IO direct keys No Basic Panels TP 170micro No No Mobile Panel Mobile 177 DP PN Yes No No Yes KTP400 Basic KTP600 Basic KTP600 Basic PN DP PROFIBUS DP No No direct keys PROFINET IO No No direct keys Panels OP73 OP77A OP77B TP170A TP170B TP177A TP 177B OP 177B PROFIBUS DP direct keys No No PROFINET IO direct keys No No Multi Panels MP 177 PROFIBUS DP direct keys Yes PROFINET IO direct keys No 40 PN No No Panel 177 KTP1000 Basic DP No No OP 170B Yes No Yes No No No MP 270B MP 277 Yes Yes No Yes No No TP 177micro No No Mobile Panel 277 Mobile Panel Yes Yes KTP1000 Basic PN No No Yes Yes 1 MP 370 Yes No 277 IWLAN Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Yes Yes TP1500 Basic PN No No TP 270 TP 277 OP 270 OP 277 Yes Yes No Yes MP 377 Yes Yes WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Working with connections WinCC flexible Runtime PROFIBUS DP direct keys PROFINET IO direct keys 1 5 6 Supported HMI devices Depending on the HMI device the transfer of projects can take place via the following interfaces Overview Micro Panels Serial MPI PROFIBUS DP Ethernet USB S7Ethernet Mobile Panels Serial MPI PROFIBUS DP Ethernet
357. s 7 Communication with Omron Controllers ccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaee eee aaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeesesnaeeeeeeeeeeaaes 7 1 Communication with Omron Hostlink MUItilINK 0 eee ee eeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeteeeeetaeeeeeteeeertnaeeeenea 7 1 1 Communication partner Omron cccccceecceeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeceeeeceaeeeeeeeseeeeseaeeesaeesieeseseeesereessneees 297 7 1 2 Communication between HMI device and controller Omron 7 2 Configuring the communication driver Omron Hostlink Mulltilink 00 0 2 eeeeeeeeeteeeeetteeeeeenteeeees WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 13 Table of contents 7 2 1 Requirements for communication OMION ce eeeeeeee cence ee eeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeaeeseeaeeeseenaees 7 2 2 Installing the COMMUNICATION drveli aa aa A a a a 7 2 3 Configuring the controller type and protocol OMron c cccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeneeee 7 2 4 Configuring protocol parameters OMSON ceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeseaeeeseeaeeeseaeeeseenaeeeeeaaes k 7 2 5 Permitted data types OMIPON 2 c scccecccssceccssce cove esaaeecesansedeeaheecevtaneeevsnsdeeevinaeestanaeesevsnieeesaneeannes k 7 2 6 Optimizing the configuratiOn sscsreiieseriissiceerredidrrenricsinni ariari inie Aa ATEENA EEE EEA i 7 3 User data areas iiccccsccc tae nkedv esta deevien Mace ee snadevonid eee evnnsed bits A E K 7 3 1 Trend request and trend
358. s 2 Errors 3 PLC acknowledgment 4 HMI device acknowledgment 5 LED mapping 6 Trend request 7 Trend transfer 1 8 Trend transfer 2 No Consecutive number displayed in WinCC flexible ES 190101 The area pointer is not updated because it is not possible to map the PLC type to the area pointer type Parameter type and no see alarm 190100 190102 The area pointer is updated after the cause of the last error state has been eliminated return to normal operation Parameter type and no See alarm 190100 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 352 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Appendix 200000 PLC coordination alarms 8 1 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 200000 Coordination is not executed because the address Change the address or set up the address in the PLC configured in the PLC does not exist is not set 200001 Coordination is canceled because the write access Change the address or set the address in the PLC at an to the address configured in the PLC is not area which allows write access possible 200002 Coordination is not carried out at the moment Internal error because the address format of the area pointer does not match the internal storage format 200003 Coordination can be executed again because the last error state is eliminated return to normal operation 200004 The coordination may not be executed 200005 No more data is read or written Possible causes
359. s are written to the PLC addresses e Triggering by the operator in the recipe view The current values are written to the PLC e Triggering by a function or PLC job The current values are written to the PLC from the data medium Transfer with synchronization GE Fanuc Application Requirements If you select synchronous transfer both communication partners set status bits in the common data area You can use this mechanism to prevent uncontrolled overwriting of data in either direction in your control program Synchronous data record transfer can be a useful solution for example when e The PLC is the active partner in the transfer of data records e The PLC evaluates the information about the recipe number and data record number e The transfer of data records is triggered by means of a Job mailbox In order to synchronize transfer of data records between the HMI device and the PLC the following requirements must be met during configuration e An area pointer has been set up Communication gt Connections editor in Area pointer e The PLC with which the HMI device synchronizes transfer of data records is specified in the recipe Recipes editor properties view of the recipe Properties group in Transfer WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 135 Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 3 User data areas Structure of the data area The data area has a fix
360. s been set up Communication gt Connections editor in Area pointer e The PLC with which the HMI device synchronizes transfer of data records is specified in the recipe Recipes editor properties view of the recipe Properties group in Transfer WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 91 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 3 User data areas Structure of the data area The data area has a fixed length of 5 words Structure of the data area 15 0 1 Word Current recipe number 1 999 2 Word Current data record number 0 65535 3 Word Reserved 4 Word Status 0 2 4 12 5 Word Reserved e Status The status word word 4 can adopt the following values Value Meaning Decimal Binary 0 0000 0000 Transfer permitted data record free 2 0000 0010 Transfer is busy 4 0000 0100 Transfer completed without error 12 0000 1100 Transfer completed with error Possible causes of error when transferring data records Possible causes of error 92 The section below shows possible error causes which lead to the cancellation of data record transfer e Tag address not set up on the PLC e Overwriting data records not possible e Recipe number does not exist e Data record number does not exist Note The status word may only be set by the HMI device The PLC may only reset the status word to zero
361. s of configuring logs project reports scripts user management and multilingual projects and integration into STEP 7 e WinCC flexible options Based on a sample project this is a step by step introduction to the basics of configuring the WinCC flexible Audit Sm rtServices Sm rtAccess and OPC Server options Online availability The following link actively guides you to technical documentation for SIMATIC products and systems in different languages e SIMATIC Guide Technical Documentation ttp Awww automation siemens com simatic portal html_76 techdoku htm The user manual consists of Parts 1 and 2 Part 2 is organized as follows e the connection to Allen Bradley controllers e the connection to GE Fanuc Automation controllers e the connection to LG Industrial Systems IMO controllers e the connection to Mitsubishi Electric controllers e the connection to Schneider Automation Modicon controllers e the connection to OMRON controllers Part 1 contains the descriptions of e the connection to SIEMENS SIMATIC controllers S7 S5 500 505 e the connection via the HMI HTTP protocol e the connection via OLE for Process Control OPC e the connection to SIMOTION controllers e the connection to WinAC controllers WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 5 Preface Conventions Trademarks A distinction is made in the naming conventions for the configuration and ru
362. s the trend values being overwritten by the PLC while the trend is being read out by the HMI device WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 305 Communication with Omron controllers 7 3 User data areas 7 3 2 LED mapping Function Requirements LED assignment The function keys of the keyboard units of the Operator Panel OP Multi Panel MP and Panel PC are equipped with LEDs These LEDs can be controlled by the PLC This functionality can be used to activate an LED in order to tell the operator which key to press in a specific situation for example In order to enable control of an LED you must set up an LED tag or array tag in the PLC and declare this as the LED tag in the configuration data Assign the LEDs to the LED tag bits when you configure the function keys Define the LED tag and the corresponding bit for each function key in the General group of the properties view The bit number bit identifies the first of two consecutive bits that control the following LED states LED function all Mobile Panels Operator Panels Bitn 1 Bit n and Multi Panels Panel PCs 0 0 Off Off 0 1 Rapid flashing Flashing 1 0 Slow flashing Flashing 1 1 Permanent signal Permanent signal 306 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Omron controllers 7 3 User data areas
363. s type of transfer No 69 Read data record from PLC PLC gt DAT PLC job no 69 transfers data records from the PLC to the HMI device The PLC job is structured as follows Left byte LB Right byte RB Word 1 0 69 Word 2 Recipe number 1 999 Word 3 Data record number 1 to 65535 Word 4 Do not overwrite existing data record 0 Overwrite existing data record 1 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 320 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Omron controllers No 70 Write data record to PLC DAT gt PLC PLC job No 70 transfers data records from the HMI device to the PLC The PLC job is structured as follows 7 3 User data areas Left byte LB Right byte RB Word 1 0 70 Word 2 Recipe number 1 999 Word 3 Data record number 1 to 65535 Word 4 Sequence when reading from the PLC with PLC job PLC gt DAT no 69 Step Action 1 Check Status word 0 Yes No 2 The HMI device enters the recipe and data record number specified in Abort without the job and the status Transfer active in the data record return message 3 The HMI device reads the values from the PLC and saves these to the data record defined in the PLC job 4 e If Overwrite was selected in the job an existing data record is overwritten without any prompt for confirmation The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed e If Do not overwrite
364. s you select are too short this is detrimental to the overall performance Set the acquisition cycle to suit the rate of change of the process values The rate of temperature changes at a furnace for example is significantly slower compared to the speed rate of an electrical drive As a general guideline the acquisition cycle should be approx 1 second e Put the tags of an alarm or a screen in one data area without gaps e To allow changes in the PLC to be recognized reliably these must be available at least during the actual acquisition cycle e Set the transmission rate to the highest possible value For discrete alarms use arrays and assign the individual alarms to one bit of the array tags themselves and not to the individual subelements For discrete alarms and arrays only tags of the R and M operands and data types Int and WORD are permitted With screens the update rate that can actually be achieved depends on the type and amount of data to be displayed During configuration make sure that you only configure short acquisition cycles for objects that actually need to be updated quickly This reduces the update times WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 121 Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 3 User data areas Trends Job mailboxes When using bit triggered trends if the group bit is set in the Trend transfer area the HMI device always updates all t
365. sage window Message output on the configuration computer after successful completion of the transfer Transfer completed successfully The start screen appears on the HMI device WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 4 User data areas Interconnecting the PLC with the HMI device 1 Interconnect the PLC CPU or communication module with the HMI device using a suitable patch cable 2 The message Connection to PLC is established is output to the HMI device Note that users can edit the system alarm texts in WinCC flexible NOTICE Always observe the safety related information in the HMI device manual when commissioning the device RF radiation emitted from devices such as mobile phones may cause unwanted operating states 5 4 User data areas 5 4 1 Trend request and trend transfer Function A trend is a graphic representation of one or more values from the PLC The value is read either time or bit triggered depending on the configuration Time triggered trends The HMI device reads in the trend values cyclically at an interval specified in the configuration Time triggered trends are suitable for continuous processes for example the operating temperature of a motor Bit triggered trends By setting a trigger bit in the trend request tag the HMI device either reads in a trend value or an entire tr
366. ses and transferred to the HMI device e Triggering by the operator in the recipe view The values are downloaded to the HMI device You can then process edit or save these values for example e Triggering by a function or PLC job The values are saved immediately to the data volume When a write job is triggered the values are written to the PLC addresses e Triggering by the operator in the recipe view The current values are written to the PLC e Triggering by a function or PLC job The current values are written to the PLC from the data medium Transfer with synchronization Mitsubishi Application Requirements If you select synchronous transfer both communication partners set status bits in the common data area You can use this mechanism to prevent uncontrolled overwriting of data in either direction in your control program Synchronous data record transfer can be a useful solution for example when e The PLC is the active partner in the transfer of data records e The PLC evaluates the information about the recipe number and data record number e The transfer of data records is triggered by means of a Job mailbox In order to synchronize transfer of data records between the HMI device and the PLC the following requirements must be met during configuration e An area pointer has been set up Communication gt Connections editor in Area pointer e The PLC with which the HMI device synchronizes transfer
367. set again after all bits have been reset by the HMI device If large numbers of job mailboxes are sent in quick succession this can lead to overload in the communication between the HMI device and PLC The HMI device confirms acceptance of the job mailbox by entering the value zero in the first data word of the job mailbox The HMI device now processes the job for which it requires time If a new job mailbox is entered again immediately in the job mailbox it may take some time before the HMI device can process the next job mailbox The next job mailbox will only be accepted when there is computing capacity available 6 2 7 Commissioning components Transferring the PLC program to the PLC 1 Interconnect the PC with the CPU using the appropriate cable 2 Download the program files to the CPU 3 Then set the CPU to RUN WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Modicon controllers 6 2 Communication via Modbus RTU protocol Transferring project data to the HMI device 1 The HMI device must be in transfer mode in order to accept the project transfer Possible scenarios Initial startup The HMI device does not yet contain any configuration data in the initial startup phase The project data and runtime software required for operation must be transferred from the configuration computer to the device The HMI device automatically changes to transfer mode The tran
368. sfer by querying the status word in the data record Sequence of the transfer when triggered by a configured function Reading from the PLC using a configured function 282 Step Action 1 Check Status word 0 Yes No 2 The HMI device enters the recipe and data record number Abort with system specified in the function and the status Transfer active in the alarm data record 3 The HMI device reads the values from the PLC and stores them in the data record specified in the function 4 e If Yes was selected for the Overwrite function an existing data record is overwritten without any prompt for confirmation The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed e If No was selected for the Overwrite function and the data record already exists the HMI device aborts the job and enters 0000 1100 in the status word of the data record 5 The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Modicon controllers Writing to the PLC by means of configured function 6 4 User data areas Step 1 Action Check Status word 0 Yes No The HMI device enters the recipe and data record number specified in the function and the status Transfer active in the data record Abort with system alarm The HMI device fetches the values of
369. sfer dialog box opens with a connection message on the HMI device Recommissioning Recommissioning means that you overwrite existing project data on the HMI device For corresponding detailed instructions refer to the HMI device manual 2 Check whether the alarm settings meet requirements of your WinCC flexible project 3 Select Project gt Transfer gt Transfer settings to configure the transfer parameters before you transfer project data to the HMI device Select the used port Set the transfer parameters Select the target storage location 4 Initiate the transfer of project data by clicking Transfer The project is compiled automatically All compilation and transfer steps are logged to a message window Message output on the configuration computer on successful completion of the transfer Transfer completed successfully The start screen appears on the HMI device Interconnecting the PLC with the HMI device 1 Interconnect the PLC with the HMI device using a suitable cable 2 The message Connection to PLC is established is output to the HMI device Note that users can edit the system alarm texts in WinCC flexible NOTICE Always observe the safety related information in the HMI device Manual when commissioning the device RF radiation emitted from devices such as mobile phones may cause unwanted operating states WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 260 User s Ma
370. sor M3 0 ms lt No group gt M m General gt pg gt J amer infotext Tag Temperature sensor M w T EE tag gt m Process ht a i Bit 1 th b g m Trigger gt Events Distinction in terms of acknowledgment e Acknowledgment on the HMI device e Acknowledgment by the PLC Acknowledgment by the PLC In Acknowledgment PLC tag you configure the tag or the array tag and the bit number based on which the HMI device can recognize an acknowledgment by the PLC A bit set in the tag triggers acknowledgment of the assigned error alarm bit at the HMI device This tag bit returns a function similar to acknowledgment on the HMI device which is triggered by pressing the ACK button for example The acknowledgment bit must be located in the same tag as the bit for the error alarm WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 327 Communication with Omron controllers 7 3 User data areas Reset the acknowledgment bit before setting the bit in the alarm area again The figure below shows the pulse diagram Error alarm Acknowledgment PLC HMI device Arrival of the TO Reset Al New error alarm via PLC I acknowledgm bit l error alarm gt Acknowledgment on the HMI device In Ack read tag you configure the tag or the array tag and the bit number that is written to the PLC after acknowledgment from the HMI devic
371. splay on the HMI device remains operable The data records are transferred in the background Simultaneous processing of several transfer requests is however not possible In this case the HMI device rejects the other transfer requests with a system alarm Transfer without synchronization If you select asynchronous transfer of data records between the HMI device and PLC there is no coordination over the common data areas It is therefore unnecessary to set up a data area during configuration Asynchronous data record transfer can be a useful alternative for example when e The system is capable of excluding the risk of uncontrolled overwriting of data by the communication peer e The PLC does not require information about the recipe number and data record number e The transfer of data records is triggered by the operator of the HMI device WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 134 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with GE Fanuc controllers Reading values Writing values 3 3 User data areas When a read job is triggered the values are read from the PLC addresses and transferred to the HMI device e Triggering by the operator in the recipe view The values are downloaded to the HMI device You can then process edit or save these values for example e Triggering by a function or PLC job The values are saved immediately to the data volume When a write job is triggered the value
372. st therefore be acknowledged Acknowledgment To acknowledge error alarms e Operator input on the HMI device e The PLC sets an acknowledgment bit Triggering alarms Triggering of an alarm in the PLC e Setting a tag bit e Measured value limits exceeded The location of tags or of the tag array is defined in WinCC flexible ES The tag or array must be set up on the PLC WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 286 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Modicon controllers 6 4 4 2 Procedure 6 4 User data areas Step 1 Creating tags or an array You create tags or arrays in the Tags editor The dialog box is shown below i L 4x40001 X Cyclic continuous Temperature sensor M3 Modicon Reference ESAn ee atm EE 4x 40001 lx e Define the tag and array names e Select the connection to the PLC The connection must already be configured in the Connections editor e Select the data type The available data types depend on the PLC being used If you select an illegal data type the tag will not be available in the Discrete alarms and Analog alarms editors The following data types are supported by Modicon controllers PLC Permitted data types Discrete alarms Analog alarms All Modicon series Int Int Bit 16 Bit Group Int Int Double Double Float e Enter an address The tag addressed here contains the bit that triggers t
373. sts in the assigned attempts to access an invalid PLC address PLC the configured address is correct and the value range for the tag is correct 130000 System information alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 130000 The action was not executed Close all other programs Delete files no longer required from the hard disk 130001 The action was not executed Delete files no longer required from the hard disk 130002 The action was not executed Close all other programs Delete files no longer required from the hard disk 346 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Appendix 8 1 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 130003 No data medium found The operation is canceled Check for example if e The correct data medium is being accessed e The data medium is inserted 130004 The data medium is write protected The operation Check whether access has been made to the correct is canceled data carrier Remove the write protection 130005 The file is read only The operation is canceled Check whether access has been made to the correct file Edit the file attributes if necessary 130006 Access to file failed The operation is canceled Check for example if e The correct file is being accessed e The file exists e Another action is preventing simultaneous access to the file 130007 The network connection is interrupte
374. switch buffers Tags from Reference 4x or 6x are permitted They must be of the data type Int Int or an array tag of the data type Int Int During configuration you assign a bit to a trend This sets a unique bit assignment for all areas Trend request area The HMI device sets corresponding bits in the trend request area when you open a screen which contains one or several trends on the HMI device After deselecting the screen the HMI device resets the relevant bits in the trend request area Using the trend request area the PLC can recognize which trend is currently displayed on the HMI device Trends can also be triggered without evaluation of the trend request area WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Modicon controllers 6 4 User data areas Trend transfer area 1 This area is used to trigger trends In your PLC program you set the bit assigned to the trend in the trend transfer area and set the trend group bit The trend group bit is the last bit in the trend transfer area The HMI device detects the trigger The HMI device reads either a value or the entire buffer from the PLC It then resets the trend bit and the trend group bit The following picture shows the structure of a trend transfer area high order byte low order byte 15 ae Bit number 1st word nth word Trend group bit The trend transfer are
375. system messages deleted when there is a buffer overflow Printout of the content of the display on a printer Triggering of a function by the controller Loop through mode Normal mode Operator note Output box 372 Mode on the HMI device Includes normal operation and also allows communication between the configuration computer and controller over the second interface of the HMI device This mode is possible only when the connection to the controller uses the AS511 protocol Mode on the HMI device in which alarms are displayed and input can made in screens Configurable additional information on alarms screens screen entries and boxes Box for displaying a process value WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Appendix 8 3 Glossary Screen Display of logically related process data that can be displayed together on the HMI device and that can be individually changed Screen entry Element of a screen consists of the entry number texts and tags Screen level Processing level on the HMI device at which pictures can be viewed and manipulated Self test Test of the status of the CPU and the memory each time the power is turned on Softkey Key with a variable assignment dependent on the displayed screen entry System event Indicates an internal state on the HMI device and on the controller System to be monitored Related to operator control and monitoring
376. t D TxD 4 RxD D l GND 12 GND l l l I I RTS lt b I l l l o CTS D oy oy Shield with large area contact to housing however without contact to the PE pins Cable 5 x 0 14 mm shielded max length 15 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 105 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 4 Connecting cables for Allen Bradley 2 4 3 Connecting cable 1784 CP10 RS 232 for Allen Bradley Allen Bradley cable 1784 CP10 For interconnecting the HMI device RS 232 9 pin sub D PLC5x KF2 KF3 You require an additional 25 pin female female adapter gender changer for interconnections with KF2 and KF3 HMI device Allen Bradley connector 1 connector 2 9 pin D Sub female connector 25 pin D Sub connector screw locking screw locking cable outlet to the rear cable outlet to the rear enclosure DCD D D DTR DsR De lt 4 DSR DTR lt lt RD TD lt pe TxD RD De GND GND lt cTs RTS lt D RTS cts gt Shield with large area contact to housing at both ends Cable 5 x 0 14 mm shielded max length 15 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 106 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 4 Connecting cables for Allen Bradley 2 4 4 Connecting cable 6XV1440 2V RS 422 for Allen Bradley 6XV1440 2V__ Length key see
377. t An interval of at least 5 seconds must be maintained between successive jobs in order to prevent overload of the HMI device Parameter 1 2 3 46 Update tags Causes the HMI device to read the current value of the PLC tags whose update ID matches the value transferred in Parameter 1 Function corresponds to the UpdateTag system function Parameter 1 1 100 49 Clear process alarm buffer Parameter 1 2 3 50 Clear alarm buffer Parameter 1 2 3 51 Screen selection Parameter 1 Screen number Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Field number 69 Read data record from PLC Parameter 1 Recipe number 1 999 Parameter 2 Data record number 1 65535 Parameter 3 0 Do not overwrite existing data record 1 Overwrite existing data record 70 Write data record to PLC Parameter 1 Recipe number 1 999 Parameter 2 Data record number 1 65535 Parameter 3 1 OP 73 OP 77A and TP 177A HMI devices also execute the Screen selection job mailbox if the on screen keyboard is active WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 195 Communication with LG controllers 4 3 User data areas 4 3 3 8 Data mailbox area pointer Data mailbox area pointer Function When data records are transferred between the HMI device and PLC both partners access common communi
378. t 2 170 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with LG controllers 4 3 User data areas 4 3 3 4 Date time controller area pointer Function This area pointer is used to transfer the date and time from the PLC to the HMI device Use this area pointer if the PLC is the time master The PLC loads the data area of the area pointer All definitions are coded in BCD format The HMI device reads the data cyclically within the configured acquisition cycle and synchronizes itself Note Set an acquisition cycle of sufficient length for the date time area pointer in order to avoid any negative impact on HMI device performance Recommended Acquisition cycle of 1 minute if your process can handle it The date time data area has the following structure DATE_AND_TIME format in BCD code Data word Left byte Right byte n 0 Year 80 to 99 0 to 29 Month 1 to 12 n 1 Day 1 to 31 Hour 0 to 23 n 2 Minute 0 to 59 Second 0 to 59 n 3 Reserved Reserved Weekday 1to7 1 Sunday n 4 1 Reserved Reserved n 5 1 Reserved Reserved 1 The two data words must be available in the data area in order to ensure compliance of the data format with WinCC flexible and to avoid the reading of incorrect information Note Note that when you enter the year values 80 99 result in years 1980 through 1999 and the values 0 29 result in the years 2000 through 2029 WinCC fle
379. t No No No No No No no No No Multi Panels MP 177 MP 270B MP 277 MP 370 MP 377 Serial Yes Yes Yes 1 Yes Yes MPI PROFIBUS DP Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Ethernet Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes USB Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes S7Ethernet Yes No Yes No Yes WinCC flexible Runtime Serial MPI PROFIBUS DP Ethernet USB S7Ethernet 42 WinCC flexible Runtime on Panel PC Yes COM1 through COM4 Yes Yes Yes No WinCC flexible Runtime on PC Yes COM1 COM4 depending on configuration Yes 5 Yes Yes No WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Working with connections 7 6 Conversion when changing controllers Only when using a PC PPI cable via the RS 485 interface 2 Only when using a USB PPI cable 6ES7 901 3DB30 0XA0 via the RS 485 interface 3 Only available with TP 177B PN DP and OP 177B PN DP 4 Only when using an Ethernet CF card 5 Only when using a PROFIBUS DP card e g CP5611 6 Depends on which connection box is used 7 Exception TP 177B 4 supports the S7Ethernet interface 1 6 Conversion when changing controllers Changing the controller With controllers and drivers for which it is pointless to attempt to adopt the addresses from other controllers for example SIMOTION SIMATIC HMI HTTP protocol or OPC the address is deleted With all other controllers there is an attempt to adopt the data type If this is successful there is an attempt to adopt the address If th
380. tags or an array Procedure You create tags or arrays in the Tags editor The dialog box is shown below Temperature sensor M3 Omron Area J wp lx Define the tag and array names Select the connection to the PLC The connection must already be configured in the Connections editor Select the data type The available data types depend on the PLC being used If you select an illegal data type the tag will not be available in the Discrete alarms and Analog alarms editors The following data types are supported for Omron controllers PLC Permitted data types Discrete alarms Analog alarms Series SYSMAC C CV DEC DEC BIN DEC DEC CS1 alpha and CP LDC LDC 324 Enter an address The tag addressed here contains the bit that triggers the alarm As soon as the bit of the tag is set on the PLC and is transferred to the HMI device in the configured acquisition cycle the HMI device recognizes the alarm as incoming After the same bit is reset on the PLC the HMI device recognizes the alarm as outgoing Select the array elements If the number of array elements is increased you can select more bit numbers in the Discrete alarms editor An array with a length of three words provides 48 alarm bits for example WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Omron controllers 7 3 User data areas 7 3 4 3 Step 2
381. te function and the data record already exists the HMI device aborts the job and enters 0000 1100 in the status word of the data record 5 The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 4 User data areas Writing to the PLC by means of configured function Step Action 1 Check Status word 0 Yes No 2 The HMI device enters the recipe and data record number Abort with system specified in the function and the status Transfer active in the alarm data record 3 The HMI device fetches the values of the data record specified in the function from the data medium and transfers the values to the PLC The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed 5 The control program can now evaluate the transferred data The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers Sequence of the transfer triggered by a job mailbox The transfer of data records between the HMI device and the PLC can be initiated by either one of these stations The two PLC jobs No 69 and No 70 are available for this type of transfer No 69 Read data record from PLC PLC gt DAT PLC job no 69 transfers data records from the PLC to the HMI device The PLC job is structured as follows
382. tection in the control program of HMI device startup e detection in the control program of the current HMI device operating mode e detection in the control program of the HMI devices ready to communicate state The Coordination area pointer has a length of two words Note The HMI device always writes the entire coordination area when updating the area pointer The control program may not make changes to the coordination area for this reason Assignment of bits in the Coordination area pointer Startup bit Operating mode Life bit 312 high order byte low order byte 15 8 7 2 4 0 1st word 2st word not assigned T E A EEEE L Startup bit Operation mode reserved fone a Life bit x assigned The startup bit is set briefly to 0 by the HMI device during startup It sets the bit permanently to 1 when startup is completed The operating mode bit is set to 1 as soon as the user switches the HMI device offline The state of the operating mode bit is 0 during normal operation of the HMI device You can determine the current operating mode of the HMI device by reading this bit The HMI device inverts the life bit at intervals of approximately one second You can check whether or not the connection to the HMI device is still up by querying this bit in the control program WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Omron controllers 7 3 User data
383. tes WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 148 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 5 Connecting cables for GE Fanuc 3 5 Connecting cables for GE Fanuc 3 5 1 Connecting cable PP1 RS 232 for GE Fanuc Connecting cable PP1 for adapter HE693SNP232A HMI device GE Fanuc connector 1 connector 2 9 pin D Sub female connector 9 pin D Sub female connector screw locking V 24 screw locking V 24 Poma enclosure I i Loi l Ooi lo GND 5 GND l lt S RxD j 2 TxD lt D TxD 3 RxD D l 7 RTS lt E 8 cts gt l I l l Voy 7 Shield with large area contact to casing at both ends Cable 5 x 0 14 mm shielded max length 15 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 149 Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 5 Connecting cables for GE Fanuc 3 5 2 Connecting cable PP2 RS 232 for GE Fanuc Connecting cable PP2 for adapter HE693SNP232A HMI device GE Fanuc connector 1 connector 2 15 pin D Sub connector 9 pin D Sub female connector shift latch V 24 screw locking V 24 enclosure YAYA Shield with large area contact to casing at both ends Cable 5 x 0 14 mm2 shielded max length 15 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 150 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 5 Connecting cables
384. tested there are no guarantees for RS 485 and RS 422 e Baud rate Under Baud rate define the transmission rate between the HMI device and the Modicon PLC Communication is possible at a baud rate of 19200 9600 baud Note The highest station address must be less than or equal to 63 if you set a transmission rate of 1 5 Mbaud at OP 73 or OP 77A If connecting a TP 170A to a SIMATIC S7 station at a transmision rate of 1 5 MBaud on PROFIBUS DP set a value less than or equal to 63 for the highest station address HSA e Data bits Under Data bits you can only select 8 e Parity Select None Even or Odd under Parity e Stop bits Under Stop bits you can select 1 or 2 Network parameters e Framing Under Framing you can set that RTU standard is used as framing WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 256 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Modicon controllers PLC dependent parameters 6 2 5 e Slave address Under Slave address you set the slave address of the PLC e CPU type 6 2 Communication via Modbus RTU protocol Select CPU type to specify the Modicon PLC which is connected to the HMI device You can choose between the following CPUs CPU 984 except CPU 984A 984B and 984X CPU 984 785 CPU TSX Quantum Permitted data types Modbus RTU Permitted data types The table lists the user data types that can be used when configuring tags
385. th error WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 322 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with Omron controllers 7 3 User data areas 7 3 4 Events alarms and acknowledgments 7 3 4 1 General information on events alarms and acknowledgments Function Messages return information about the PLC or HMI device operating states or problems to the user on the HMI device The message texts consist of configurable texts and or tags with actual values Operational messages and events must be distinguished The programmer defines what is an operational message and what is an error alarm Operational message An operational message indicates a state Example e Motor on e PLC in manual mode Alarm message An error alarm indicates a malfunction Example e Valve does not open e Excess motor temperature Alarms indicate exceptional operational states and must therefore be acknowledged Acknowledgment To acknowledge error alarms e Operator input on the HMI device e The PLC sets an acknowledgment bit Triggering alarms Triggering of an alarm in the PLC e Setting a tag bit e Measured value limits exceeded The location of tags or of the tag array is defined in WinCC flexible ES The tag or array must be set up on the PLC WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 323 Communication with Omron controllers 7 3 User data areas 7 3 4 2 Step 1 Creating
386. th synchronization R W R W Date time Transfer of the date and time from the HMI device to the PLC W R Date time PLC Transfer of the date and time from the PLC to the HMI device R W Coordination Requesting the HMI device status in the control program W R Project ID Runtime checks consistency between the WinCC flexible R W project ID and the project in the PLC PLC job Triggering of HMI device functions by the control program R W R W The next sections describe the area pointers and their associated PLC jobs 4 3 3 2 Screen number area pointer Function The HMI device saves information about the screen called on the HMI device to the Screen number area pointer This allows the transfer of the current screen contents from the HMI device to the PLC The PLC can trigger specific reactions such as the call of a different screen Application Configure and enable the area pointer in Communication gt Connections before you put it into use You can create only one instance of the Screen number area pointer and only on one PLC The screen number is transferred spontaneously to the PLC That is it is always transferred when a new screen is activated on the HMI device It is therefore unnecessary to configure an acquisition cycle WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 195 Communication with LG controllers 4 3 User data areas Structure The area pointer is a data area in the memory of the PLC w
387. th word Reserved e Current screen type 1 for the root screen or 4 for the permanent window e Current screen number 1 to 32767 e Current field number 1 to 32767 7 3 3 3 Date time area pointer Function This area pointer is used to transfer the date and time from the HMI device to the PLC The PLC writes control job 41 to the job mailbox When it evaluating the control job the HMI device saves its current date and time to the data area configured in the Date time area pointer All definitions are coded in BCD format The Date Time area pointer when used in a project which contains multiple connections must be enabled for each configured connection The date time data area has the following structure Data word Left byte Right byte 15 8 7 0 n 0 Reserved Hour 0 to 23 n 1 Minute 0 to 59 Second 0 to 59 Time n 2 Reserved Reserved n 3 Reserved Weekday 1 to 7 1 Sunday n 4 Day 1 to 31 Month 1 to 12 Date n 5 Year 80 to 99 0 to 29 Reserved Note The entry of values from 80 to 99 in the Year data area returns the years 1980 through 1999 values from 0 to 29 return the years 2000 through 2029 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 310 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Omron controllers 7 3 User data areas 7 3 3 4 Date time controller area pointer Function This area pointer is used to transfer the date and time from the PLC to the HMI device Use this area pointer if the PLC is
388. the function and the status Transfer active in the alarm data record 3 The HMI device reads the values from the PLC and stores them in the data record specified in the function 4 e If Yes was selected for the Overwrite function an existing data record is overwritten without any prompt for confirmation The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed e If No was selected for the Overwrite function and the data record already exists the HMI device aborts the job and enters 0000 1100 in the status word of the data record 5 The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 195 Communication with LG controllers 4 3 User data areas Writing to the PLC by means of configured function Step Action 1 Check Status word 0 Yes No 2 The HMI device enters the recipe and data record number Abort with system specified in the function and the status Transfer active in the alarm data record 3 The HMI device fetches the values of the data record specified in the function from the data medium and transfers the values to the PLC The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed 5 The control program can now evaluate the transferred data The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers Sequ
389. the highest possible value For discrete alarms use arrays and assign the individual alarms to one bit of the array tags themselves and not to the individual subelements For discrete alarms and arrays only tags of the D operand and data types Word and Int are permitted With screens the update rate that can actually be achieved depends on the type and amount of data to be displayed Configure short acquisition cycles only for objects which actually require shorter refresh cycles When using bit triggered trends if the group bit is set in the Trend transfer area the HMI device always updates all the trends whose bit is set in this area It then resets the bits The group bit in the PLC program can only be set again after all bits have been reset by the HMI device If large numbers of PLC jobs are sent in quick succession this can lead to overload in the communication between the HMI device and PLC The HMI device confirms acceptance of the job mailbox by entering the value zero in the first data word of the job mailbox The HMI device now processes the job for which it requires time If a new PLC job is entered again immediately in the job mailbox it may take some time before the HMI device can process the next PLC job The next job mailbox will only be accepted when there is computing capacity available WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Mitsubishi contr
390. the time master The PLC loads the data area of the area pointer All definitions are coded in BCD format The HMI device reads the data cyclically within the configured acquisition cycle and synchronizes itself Note Set an acquisition cycle of sufficient length for the date time area pointer in order to avoid any negative impact on HMI device performance Recommended Acquisition cycle of 1 minute if your process can handle it The date time data area has the following structure DATE_AND_TIME format in BCD code Data word Left byte Right byte n 0 Year 80 to 99 0 to 29 Month 1 to 12 n 1 Day 1 to 31 Hour 0 to 23 n 2 Minute 0 to 59 Second 0 to 59 n 3 Reserved Reserved Weekday 1to7 1 Sunday n 4 1 Reserved Reserved n 5 1 Reserved Reserved 1 The two data words must be available in the data area in order to ensure compliance of the data format with WinCC flexible and to avoid the reading of incorrect information Note Note that when you enter the year values 80 99 result in years 1980 through 1999 and the values 0 29 result in the years 2000 through 2029 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 311 Communication with Omron controllers 7 3 User data areas 7 3 3 5 Coordination area pointer Function Application The Coordination area pointer is used to implement the following functionality e de
391. tinguished The programmer defines what is an operational message and what is an error alarm Operational message An operational message indicates a state Example e Motor on e PLC in manual mode Alarm message An error alarm indicates a malfunction Example e Valve does not open e Excess motor temperature Alarms indicate exceptional operational states and must therefore be acknowledged Acknowledgment To acknowledge error alarms e Operator input on the HMI device e The PLC sets an acknowledgment bit Triggering alarms Triggering of an alarm in the PLC e Setting a tag bit e Measured value limits exceeded The location of tags or of the tag array is defined in WinCC flexible ES The tag or array must be set up on the PLC WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 141 Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 3 User data areas 3 3 4 2 Step 1 Creating tags or an array Procedure You create tags or arrays in the Tags editor The dialog is shown in the following figure 25 Connections Temperature sensor M3 GE Fanuc M Ulnt Cyclic continuous Operand x wwa TE e Define the tag and array names e Select the connection to the PLC The connection must already be configured in the Connections editor e Select the data type The available data types depend on the PLC being used If you select an illegal data type the tag will not be availa
392. tinuous lt undefined gt lt undefined gt Screen number 5 Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt gt lt undefined gt Project ID 1 Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt a M D 2 For each connection B li e pee ne ee Bata mailbo Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt off Tyob matbox 4 Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt off Coordination 1 Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt Off Date time 6 Cyclic continuous lt undefined gt lt il 3 Enabling an area pointer based on the example of a SIMATIC S7 PLC e Active Enables the area pointer e Name Name of the area pointer defined by WinCC flexible e Address Tag address of the area pointer in the PLC e Length WinCC flexible defines the default length of the area pointer e Acquisition cycle Define an acquisition cycle in this field to allow cyclic reading of the area pointer in Runtime An extremely short acquisition time may have a negative impact on HMI device performance e Comment Save a comment for example to describe the purpose of the area pointer iba WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with LG controllers Accessing data areas The table shows how the PLC and HMI device handle read R and write W access to the 4 3 User data areas data areas Data area Required for HMI device PLC Screen number Evaluation by the PLC in order to determine the active W R screen Data record Transfer of data records wi
393. tion Can be selected and used but is not approved Note Communication with SIMATIC 500 505 and with third party PLCs If you use the IF 1B port this must also be configured with the DIP switch on the back of the HMI device In this case the RS 422 received data and the RTS signal are interchanged WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 35 Working with connections 1 5 Device based dependency 1 5 3 Introduction Device based dependency of area pointers Area pointers are parameter fields from which WinCC flexible Runtime obtains information about the location and size of data areas in the PLC During communication the PLC and the HMI device alternately access these data areas for read and write operations Based on the evaluation of data stored in the data areas the PLC and HMI device trigger defined actions WinCC flexible uses the following area pointers Job mailbox Project ID Screen number Data record Date time Date time PLC Coordination Availability of the area pointers Overview Micro Panels The following tables show the availability of the area pointers for the HMI devices Note that the area pointers can be used only for available communication drivers OP 73micro TP 170micro TP 177micro Screen number Data record Date time Date time PLC Coordination Project ID Job mailbox Mobile Panels Screen number Data record
394. tion Transfer the project to the HMI device again are not synchronized with those in the PLC The diagnostic screens can be operated as usual ProAgent may be unable to show all diagnostic texts 320010 The diagnostic data stored in the configuration Transfer the project to the HMI device again are not synchronized with those in STEP7 The ProAgent diagnostics data is not up to date 320011 A unit with the corresponding DB number and Check the parameters of the SelectUnit function FB number does not exist and the units selected in the project The function cannot be executed 320012 The Step sequence mode dialog is no longer Use the ZP_STEP step sequence screen from the supported corresponding standard project for your project Instead of calling the Overview_Step_Sequence_Mode function call the FixedScreenSelection function using ZP_STEP as the screen name 320014 The selected PLC cannot be evaluated for Check the parameters of the ProAgent The Alarm view assigned to the EvaluateAlarmDisplayFault system function could not be found EvaluateAlarmDisplayFault system function 330000 GUI alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 330022 Too many dialogs are open on the HMI device Close all dialogs you do not require on the HMI device 330026 The password will expire after the number of Enter a new password days shown 350000 GUI alarms Number 350000 Effect ca
395. tion about the recipe number and data record number e The transfer of data records is triggered by means of a Job mailbox In order to synchronize transfer of data records between the HMI device and the PLC the following requirements must be met during configuration e An area pointer has been set up Communication gt Connections editor in Area pointer e The PLC with which the HMI device synchronizes transfer of data records is specified in the recipe Recipes editor properties view of the recipe Properties group in Transfer WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 195 Communication with LG controllers 4 3 User data areas Structure of the data area The data area has a fixed length of 5 words Structure of the data area 15 0 1 Word Current recipe number 1 999 2 Word Current data record number 0 65535 3 Word Reserved 4 Word Status 0 2 4 12 5 Word Reserved e Status The status word word 4 can adopt the following values Value Meaning Decimal Binary 0 0000 0000 Transfer permitted data record free 2 0000 0010 Transfer is busy 4 0000 0100 Transfer completed without error 12 0000 1100 Transfer completed with error Possible causes of error when transferring data records Possible causes of error 178 The section below shows possible error causes which lead to the cancellation of data record
396. tions Overview Micro Panels Words in total Alarms in total Mobile Panels Words in total Alarms in total Basic Panels Words in total Alarms in total Panels Words in total Alarms in total Multi Panels Words in total Alarms in total OP 73micro 16 250 Mobile Panel 170 Mobile Panel 125 2000 KTP400 Basic PN 13 200 OP 73 OP77A OP77B TP 170A 177 DP 125 2000 KTP600 Basic DP 13 200 KTP600 Basic PN 13 200 32 63 63 63 500 1000 1000 1000 MP 177 MP 270B 125 250 2000 4000 WinCC flexible Runtime Words in total Alarms in total WinCC flexible Runtime 250 4000 1 Only warning alarms possible WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 7 5 Device based dependency TP 170micro TP 177micro 32 32 500 500 Mobile Panel 177 Mobile Panel 277 Mobile Panel PN 277 IWLAN Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN 125 250 250 2000 4000 4000 KTP1000 KTP1000 TP1500 Basic Basic DP Basic PN PN 13 13 13 200 200 200 TP 170B TP177A TP 177B TP 270 TP 277 OP 170B OP 177B OP 270 OP 277 125 63 125 250 250 2000 1000 2000 4000 4000 MP 277 MP 370 MP 377 250 250 250 4000 4000 4000 39 Working with connections 1 5 Device based dependency 1 5 5 Device based dependency of direct keys Supported HMI devices You can use the functionality of the direct keys with the following HMI devices Overview Micro Panel
397. transfer cccccccceeceeeeeeeee cece cee eeseeeaeaeceeeeeeceaeaeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeenseeeeeess i 7 3 2 LED TAP DUNG rrinin eaa aa a a Aa a Eae A a a EEE g 7 3 3 Area POUM Cees recs colin niana A E E E E E ti satsetdyantea ls 307 7 3 3 1 General information on area pointers Omron Hostlink Multilink 0 ce eeeeeeeeteeeeeetteeeereee 307 3 3 2 Screen number area Pointen eenden aea a ae ela i See 309 13 33 Date time area PONE asediind is E EA ERAEN SOSEA SEEE EEEa a TEGERE 310 7 3 3 4 Date time controller area pointer ssnsnsnssistssettrtttttitintntnttntrtntntnnnntat inant annann ne anname meneen ea 311 7 3 3 5 Coordination area pointer eeccececesecesecneeceeenececnaecseenecnectsecseseeeeseesessaeesseeeseesaeeeeseieens 312 7 3 3 6 Project ID area pointer OMON e iessiisriseceirsinreiicsaiiideiii aE 313 E334 JobimailbOx area POM eP sirier taisies eh ad cae cha wa Cease td Oe es Ra ai aE 313 7 3 3 8 Data mailbox area POINTED sarisi niania cee a aa aaa aa Eaa 316 7 3 4 Events alarms and acknowledgments cccccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeesecacaeeeeeeseesceeeeeeeetecsncaeeeees 323 7 3 4 1 General information on events alarms and acknowledgments ccccceeseeteceeeeeeeeeeeees 323 7 3 4 2 Step 1 Creating tags OF AN afTay eee eeeceeeeeeteeeeeeteneeeeeeeneeeeteneeeeeseeeeeeseneeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeeaeees 324 T343 Step 2 CONTGUIIAG an Alarm peiaiecsstcaes shveus ernen AEE AE
398. trend value or an entire trend buffer This setting is defined in configuration data Bit triggered trends are normally used to visualize rapidly changing values One example might be the injection pressure in the production of plastic parts To trigger bit triggered trends create suitable external tags in the Tags editor of WinCC flexible The tags must be linked with the trend areas The HMI device and PLC then communicate with each other over these trend areas The following areas are available for trends e Trend request area e Trend transfer area 1 e Trend transfer area 2 required only with switch buffers Tags of the R or M operands are permitted They must be of the data type Word or an array tag of the data type Word During configuration you assign a bit to a trend This sets a unique bit assignment for all areas Trend request area If a screen is opened on the HMI device with one or more trends the HMI device sets the corresponding bits in the trend request area After deselecting the screen the HMI device resets the relevant bits in the trend request area Using the trend request area the PLC can recognize which trend is currently displayed on the HMI device Trends can also be triggered without evaluation of the trend request area Trend transfer area 1 This area is used to trigger trends In your PLC program you set the bit assigned to the trend in the trend transfer area and set the trend group bit The tr
399. trollers is 502 Remote slave address Under Remote slave address only when using a bridge set the slave address for the removed PLC If no bridge is being used the default value 255 or 0 must remain WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Modicon controllers 6 3 Communication via Modbus TCP IP protocol 6 3 5 Permitted data types Modbus TCP IP Permitted data types The table lists the user data types that can be used when configuring tags and area pointers Area with CPU Area with CPU 984 Name Premium Micro Compact Quantum data type Momentum Coil M 1 Ox Bit discrete output 16 bit group Discrete input l not realized by 1x Bit Premium Micro 16 bit group Input register IW not realized by 3x Bit Premium Micro Int Int Holding register MW 4x Bit 2 output Int Int Double Double Float ASCII Extended memory 6x Bit 2 Only available with the Quantum Momentum Int Int CPU Double Double Float ASCII 1 Due to a system characteristics of the external PLC the last x bits on the end of the address area cannot be accessed 2 In the case of write accesses note With the bit data type in the 4x 6x and MW areas after changing the specified bit the entire word is written back to the PLC There is no check to determine whether any other bits in the word have change
400. ture Switch buffers The switch buffer is a second buffer for the same trend that can be set up during configuration While the HMI device reads the values from buffer 1 the PLC writes to buffer 2 If the HMI device is reading buffer 2 the PLC writes to buffer 1 This prevents the trend values being overwritten by the PLC while the trend is being read out by the HMI device WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 195 Communication with LG controllers 4 3 User data areas 4 3 2 LED mapping Function Requirements LED assignment The function keys of the keyboard units of the Operator Panel OP Multi Panel MP and Panel PC are equipped with LEDs These LEDs can be controlled by the PLC This functionality can be used to activate an LED in order to tell the operator which key to press in a specific situation for example In order to enable control of an LED you must set up an LED tag or array tag in the PLC and declare this as the LED tag in the configuration data Assign the LEDs to the LED tag bits when you configure the function keys Define the LED tag and the corresponding bit for each function key in the General group of the properties view The bit number bit identifies the first of two consecutive bits that control the following LED states LED function all Mobile Panels Operator Panels Bitn 1 Bit n and Multi Panels Panel PCs
401. uc LG GLOFA GM Mitsubishi FX Mitsubishi P4 Modicon Modbus RTU Modicon Modbus TCP IP Omron Telemecanique Mobile Panels SIMATIC S7 PPI SIMATIC S7 MPI SIMATIC S7 PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC S7 PROFINET SIMATIC S5 AS51141 SIMATIC S5 PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC 500 505 NITP SIMATIC 500 505 PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC HMI HTTP Protocol OPC SIMOTION Allen Bradley DF 1 Allen Bradley DH 485 Allen Bradley Ethernet IP GE Fanuc LG GLOFA GM Mitsubishi FX Mitsubishi P4 Modicon Modbus RTU Mobile Panel 170 Mobile Panel Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes OP 73micro No No No No No No No No No No No 177 DP Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes 78 Yes 7 8 No Yes 7 8 Yes 8 Yes 8 Yes 7 8 Yes 8 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 TP 170micro 1 No No No No No No No No No No No Mobile Panel 177 PN No No No Yes No No No No Yes No Yes No No Yes 7 No No No No No 1 5 Device based dependency TP 177micro No No No No No No No No No No No Mobile Panel Mobile Panel 277 9 277 IWLAN Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes Yes yes 3 No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes 7 8 No Yes 78 No Yes 78 Yes Yes 7 8 N
402. uc 16 9 18 1 controllers In WinCC flexible 15 8 7 0 configure Analog alarms The only difference between discrete alarms and analog alarms is that instead of a bit number you configure a limit value The alarm is triggered when this limit is exceeded The outgoing alarm is triggered when the low limit is violated making allowances for any configured hysteresis WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 144 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 3 4 4 Procedure 3 3 User data areas Step 3 Configure the acknowledgment Create suitable tags on the PLC to acknowledge an error alarm You assign these tags to an alarm in the Bit messages editor You make the assignment in Properties gt Acknowledgment The following figure shows the dialog for configuring an acknowledgment Discrete Alarms z ol j DISCRETE ALARMS ngine overtemperature Errors a Temperature sensor M3 0 ms lt No group gt M m General gt pg gt J amer infotext Tag Temperature sensor M w T EE tag gt m Process ht a i Bit 1 th b g m Trigger gt Events Distinction in terms of acknowledgment e Acknowledgment on the HMI device e Acknowledgment by the PLC Acknowledgment by the PLC In Acknowledgment PLC tag you configure the tag or the array tag and the bit number
403. unction Parameter 1 2 3 40 Transfer date time to PLC in the S7 format DATE_AND_TIME An interval of at least 5 seconds must be maintained between two successive jobs to prevent overload of the HMI device Parameter 1 2 3 41 Transfer date time to PLC In OP MP format An interval of at least 5 seconds must be maintained between successive jobs in order to prevent overload of the HMI device Parameter 1 2 3 46 Update tags Causes the HMI device to read the current value of the PLC tags whose update ID matches the value transferred in Parameter 1 Function corresponds to the UpdateTag system function Parameter 1 1 100 49 Clear process alarm buffer Parameter 1 2 3 50 Clear alarm buffer Parameter 1 2 3 51 Screen selection Parameter 1 Screen number Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Field number 69 Read data record from PLC Parameter 1 Recipe number 1 999 Parameter 2 Data record number 1 65535 Parameter 3 0 Do not overwrite existing data record 1 Overwrite existing data record 70 Write data record to PLC Parameter 1 Recipe number 1 999 Parameter 2 Data record number 1 65535 Parameter 3 1 278 OP 73 OP 77A and TP 177A HMI devices also execute the Screen selection job mailbox if the on screen keyboard is active WinCC flexible 2008 Communicati
404. up to 4 PLCs is possible over the RS 232 interface Panel PCs and Multi Panels or RS 232 RS 422 converter Note The HMI device can only be operated as a master 5 1 2 Communication between the HMI device and controller Mitsubishi Communications principle Tags User data areas 198 The HMI device and the PLC communicate using tags and the user data areas The PLC and the HMI device exchange data using process values In your configuration create tags that point to an address on the PLC The HMI device reads and displays the value from the defined address The operator can also make an input on the HMI device that is then written to the address on the PLC User data areas are intended for the exchange of special data and are set up only when such data is used Data for which user data areas are required for example e Job mailboxes e Transferring data records e Date time synchronization e Sign of life monitoring You set up the user data areas when you create the project in the project window of the HMI device by selecting Communication gt Connections in the Range pointers work area At the same time you also set up the user data areas with the corresponding address area on the PLC WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 2 Communication via PG protocol Special features of connections with protocol 4 5 2 5
405. upport Representatives and offices Training center If you have questions concerning the use of the described product which are not answered in this manual please contact the Siemens representative in your area Find your contact partner at ttp www siemens com automation partne A guide to the technical documentation for the various SIMATIC products and systems is available at ttp www siemens com simatic tech doku portal The online catalog and the online ordering system is available at ttp mall automation siemens com To familiarize you with automation systems we offer a variety of courses Please contact your regional training center or the central training center in D 90327 Nuremberg Germany Phone 49 911 895 3200 Internet http Awww sitrain com Technical support You can reach the technical support for all A amp D products via the support request form on the web Phone 49 180 5050 222 Fax 49 180 5050 223 Additional information about our technical support is available in the Internet at ttp Awww siemens com automation service WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 7 Preface Service amp support on the Internet In addition to our documentation we offer our complete knowledge base on the Internet at There you will find e The newsletter which provides the latest information on your products e Relevant documentation for your applicat
406. uses PROFIsafe packages have not arrived within the necessary period There is a communication problem with the F CPU RT is terminated Remedy Check the WLAN connection WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 373 Appendix 8 1 System alarms buttons Number Effect causes Remedy 350001 PROFIsafe packages have not arrived within Check the WLAN connection the necessary period There is a communication problem with the F CPU The PROFIsafe connection is re established 350002 An internal error has occurred Internal error Runtime is terminated 350003 Feedback concerning the connection established with the F CPU The Emergency Off buttons are active immediately 350004 PROFIsafe communication was set and the connection was cleared The Runtime can be terminated The Emergency Off buttons are deactivated immediately 350005 Incorrect address configured for the F slave Check and modify the address of the F slave in No PROFIsafe connection WinCC flexible ES 350006 The project has started At the start of the Press the two enabling buttons one after another in project the enabling buttons must be checked the Enable and Panic positions for functionality 350008 The wrong number of fail safe buttons was Change the number of fail safe buttons in the configured project No PROFIsafe connection 350009 The device is in O
407. uses Remedy 150000 No more data is read or written Possible causes Ensure that the cable is plugged in the PLC is e The cable is defective operational the correct port is being used e The PLC does not respond is defective etc Restart the system if the system alarm persists e The wrong port is used for the connection e System overload 150001 Connection is up because the cause of the interruption has been eliminated 160000 Connection alarms IVar WinLC OPC Connection Number Effect causes Remedy 160000 No more data is read or written Possible causes Ensure that the cable is plugged in the PLC is e The cable is defective operational the correct port is being used e The PLC does not respond is defective etc Restart the system if the system alarm persists e The wrong port is used for the connection e System overload 160001 Connection is up because the cause of the interruption has been eliminated WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 373 Appendix 8 1 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 160010 No connection to the server because the server Check access rights identification CLS ID cannot be determined Values cannot be read or written 160011 No connection to the server because the server Check for example if identification CLS ID cannot be determined e The server name is co
408. ust be met during configuration e An area pointer has been set up Communication gt Connections editor in Area pointer e The PLC with which the HMI device synchronizes transfer of data records is specified in the recipe Recipes editor properties view of the recipe Properties group in Transfer WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 317 Communication with Omron controllers 7 3 User data areas Structure of the data area The data area has a fixed length of 5 words Structure of the data area 15 0 1 Word Current recipe number 1 999 2 Word Current data record number 0 65535 3 Word Reserved 4 Word Status 0 2 4 12 5 Word Reserved e Status The status word word 4 can adopt the following values Value Meaning Decimal Binary 0 0000 0000 Transfer permitted data record free 2 0000 0010 Transfer is busy 4 0000 0100 Transfer completed without error 12 0000 1100 Transfer completed with error Possible causes of error when transferring data records Possible causes of error 318 The section below shows possible error causes which lead to the cancellation of data record transfer e Tag address not set up on the PLC e Overwriting data records not possible e Recipe number does not exist e Data record number does not exist Note The status word may only be set by the HMI device The PLC
409. verride mode Exit Override mode It may no longer be possible to detect the location because transponder detection fails 350010 Internal error The device has no fail safe Send the device back Worldwide contact person 368 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Appendix 8 2 Abbreviations 8 2 Abbreviations Abbreviations The abbreviations and acronyms used in the manual have the following meaning PLC Programmable Logic Controller ANSI American National Standards Institute AS 511 Protocol of the PG interface to SIMATIC S5 ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange SM Events CCFL Cold Cathode Fluorescence Lamp CF Compact Flash CPU Central Processing Unit CS Configuration System CSA Customer Specified Articles CSV Comma Separated Values CTS Clear To Send DC Direct Current DCD Data Carrier Detect DI Digital Input DIP Dual In Line Package DP Distributed Peripheral I O DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory DSN Data Source Name DSR Data Set Ready DTR Data Terminal Ready ESD Electrostatic Discharge and components modules that can be damaged by it EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility EN European standard ESD Electrostatic Discharge HF High Frequency HMI Human Machine Interface GND Ground IEC International Electrotechnical Comm
410. verwritten without any prompt for confirmation The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed e If No was selected for the Overwrite function and the data record already exists the HMI device aborts the job and enters 0000 1100 in the status word of the data record 5 The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 93 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 3 User data areas Writing to the PLC by means of configured function Step Action 1 Check Status word 0 Yes No 2 The HMI device enters the recipe and data record number Abort with system specified in the function and the status Transfer active in the alarm data record 3 The HMI device fetches the values of the data record specified in the function from the data medium and transfers the values to the PLC The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed 5 The control program can now evaluate the transferred data The control program must reset the status word to zero in order to enable further transfers Sequence of the transfer triggered by a job mailbox The transfer of data records between the HMI device and the PLC can be initiated by either one of these stations The two PLC jobs No 69 and No 70 are available for this type of transfer No 69 Read
411. vniaeatainadsianiddbiannaielwiaiansiegee 2 2 2 3 Configuring the controller type and protocol ssssssssssressereersrnssernnessnnaatsnnannananetnndansnnadsnnaannaand 2 2 2 4 Configuring protocol parameterS essseeesrresserrreseeiicerrnesterndernnnasenndatnandatdudatnnnasdanaaannanae naat annaanA 2 2 2 5 Permitted data types Allen Bradley DH485 ssesesssssiesesrrsesrresesrrestrrssttrrnsttnnsttnnnstnnnnsennnnten ane 2 2 2 6 Optimizing the configuration eee eee eect ceee eect etee tenkt nantin tnat eeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeseeeeeaeeeeeeaaes 64 2 2 2 7 Commissioning components Allen Bradley DH485 ecceeseceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeteeeeeeseenaees 65 2 2 3 Communication via Allen Bradley Ethernet IP cc ccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeenneeeceseeeeeeaeeesesateeseenaeeeeeaaes WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 9 Table of contents 10 2 2 3 1 Communication requirements Allen Bradley Ethernet IP 0 0eeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaas 2 2 3 2 Installing the communication driver Allen Bradley Ethernet IP 2 2 3 3 Configuring the PLC type and protocol Allen Bradley Ethernet IP eeeseceeesseeeeeesteeeeeees 2 2 3 4 Configuring protocol parameters Allen Bradley Ethernet IP c cceeseseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaas 68 2 2 3 5 Examples Communication path 0 cccccceccccecececeeeeeccaeeeeeeee
412. w has been met e The data mailbox status is set to Transfer completed e The data mailbox status is set to Transfer completed with error WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0O Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 4 User data areas Reaction to an aborted transfer due to errors If the transfer of data records is aborted due to errors the HMI device reacts as follows e Triggering by the operator in the recipe display Information in the status bar of the recipe view and output of system alarms e Triggered by function Output of system alarms e Triggering by PLC job No feedback message on the HMI device You can nonetheless evaluate the status of the transfer by querying the status word in the data record Sequence of the transfer when triggered by a configured function Reading from the PLC using a configured function Step Action 1 Check Status word 0 Yes No 2 The HMI device enters the recipe and data record number Abort with system specified in the function and the status Transfer active in the alarm data record 3 The HMI device reads the values from the PLC and stores them in the data record specified in the function 4 e If Yes was selected for the Overwrite function an existing data record is overwritten without any prompt for confirmation The HMI device sets the status Transfer completed e If No was selected for the Overwri
413. wing points e The HMI device must not be attached at the start or end of the LAN e Both ends of the bus must be terminated Refer to the Allen Bradley documentation on installing the RS 485 network for example Allen Bradley 1761 6 4 e Cable length of the entire DH485 network max 1 220 m Note The shield of the cable must not be connected to the casing of the HMI device HMI device Allen Bradley connector 1 connector 2 n 9 pin D Sub connector 6 pin Phoenix connector screw locking enclosure shield Data B GND Data A Data B GND Data A Data B GND Data A shield Cables 5 x 0 14 mm shielded max length 1220 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 114 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with GE Fanuc controllers 3 3 1 Communication with GE Fanuc 3 1 1 Communication partner GE Fanuc Introduction This section describes the communication between the HMI device and the GE Fanuc automation PLC of the series 90 30 90 70 and VersaMax Micro These series are collectively called GE Fanuc PLC 90 in the remainder of this section With this PLC the PLC s own protocol SNP multipoint connection is used for communication 3 1 2 Communication between HMI device and controller GE Fanuc Communications principle The HMI device and the PLC communicate using tags and the user data areas Tags The PLC and the HMI device exchange data using process values In your configuratio
414. x 8 1 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 230202 WININET DLL has detected an error This error Depending on the cause is usually generated if it is not possible to When an attempt to connect fails or a timeout error connect to the server or if the server denies occurs AROR because he client couldnot e Check the network connection and the network authenticate itself A rejected server certificate could also causea Check the server address communication error in secure SSL e Check whether the WebServer is actually running connections on the destination station For details refer to the error text in the alarm Faulty authorization This text is always output in the language of e The configured user name and or password do your Windows installation as it is returned by not match those on the server Establish the Windows operating system consistency Base ae i i a a dby th When the server certificate is rejected Spare Or ME a Arm ve WGP teeta tag DYNE Certificate signed by an unknown CA Windows operating system may not be aoe i displayed for example An error has occurred Either ignore this item in your project or WININET DLL returns the following error e Install a certificate that has been signed with a Number 12055 Text HTTP lt no error text root certificate known to the client computer available gt The date of the certificate is invalid e Either ignore this item in your project o
415. x for the SLC503 SLC504 or SLC505 PLCs 2 2 2 5 Permitted data types Allen Bradley DH485 Permitted data types The table lists the user data types that can be used when configuring tags and area pointers Name File type Data type ASCII A ASCII Binary B BIT UNSIGNED INT Counter C BIT SIGNED INT UNSIGNED INT Float F REAL Digital input l BIT UNSIGNED INT Data register integer N BIT SIGNED INT UNSIGNED INT SIGNED LONG UNSIGNED LONG REAL Digital output O BIT UNSIGNED INT Control R BIT UNSIGNED INT Status S BIT UNSIGNED INT Timer T BIT SIGNED INT UNSIGNED INT 1 Valid for SLC 503 SLC 504 and SLC 505 WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 63 Communication with Allen Bradley controllers 2 2 Contiguring the Allen Bradley communication driver Representation in WinCC flexible Short names of data formats in WinCC flexible UNSIGNED INT UlInt UNSIGNED LONG ULong SIGNED INT Int SIGNED LONG Long Special features of connections over Allen Bradley DH485 Area pointers can only be created in the N O I S and B file types 2 2 2 6 Only the N O I S and B tags in File Type are allowed for use as trigger tag for discrete alarms These tags are only valid for the data types Int and UInt Array tags may only be used for discrete alarms and trends That is you can only c
416. x 0 14 mm2 shielded max length 15 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 295 Communication with Modicon controllers 6 5 Connecting cables for Modicon Modbus 6 5 1 3 Connecting cable PP2 RS 232 for Modicon Point to point cable 2 PLC TSX Compact gt PC HMI device Modicon Modbus connector 1 connector 2 9 pin D Sub female connector 8 pin RJ45 connector enclosure shield GND Pin 1 is at the top when looking at the controller Cables 3 x 0 14 mm2 shielded max length 15 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 294 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 Communication with Modicon controllers 6 5 Connecting cables for Modicon Modbus 6 5 1 4 Connecting cable PP3 RS 232 for Modicon Point to point cable 3 PLC TSX Compact gt Multi Panel HMI device Modicon Modbus connector 1 connector 2 8 pin RJ45 connector 15 pin D Sub male connector Type Phone Jack enclosure shield GND GND RxD TxD Y 4 TxD RTS Y2 YA CTS Pin 1 is at the top when looking at the controller Cables 3 x 0 14 mm2 shielded max length 15 m WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3AB0 295 Communication with Modicon controllers 6 5 Connecting cables for Modicon Modbus WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 296 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO Communication with Omron controllers 7
417. xible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 195 Communication with LG controllers 4 3 User data areas 4 3 3 5 Coordination area pointer Function Application The Coordination area pointer is used to implement the following functionality e detection in the control program of HMI device startup e detection in the control program of the current HMI device operating mode e detection in the control program of the HMI devices ready to communicate state The Coordination area pointer has a length of two words Note The HMI device always writes the entire coordination area when updating the area pointer The control program may not make changes to the coordination area for this reason Assignment of bits in the Coordination area pointer Startup bit Operating mode Life bit 172 high order byte low order byte 15 8 7 2 4 0 1st word 2st word not assigned T E A EEEE L Startup bit Operation mode reserved fone a Life bit x assigned The startup bit is set briefly to 0 by the HMI device during startup It sets the bit permanently to 1 when startup is completed The operating mode bit is set to 1 as soon as the user switches the HMI device offline The state of the operating mode bit is 0 during normal operation of the HMI device You can determine the current operating mode of the HMI device by reading this bit The HMI device inverts the life bit at int
418. y DF 1 Area pointers can only be created in the N O I S and B file types Only the N O I S and B tags in File Type are allowed for use as trigger tag for discrete alarms These tags are only valid for the data types Int and UInt WinCC flexible only supports array tags for discrete alarms and trends That is you can only create array tags using tags of the N O I S and B file type and Int and UInt data type Note I O modules with 8 or 16 ports occupy one data word on the PLC I O modules with 24 or 32 ports occupy two data words The HMI device does not output an error message if using non existent bits You should always make sure that I O modules with 8 or 24 ports only occupy the bits that are actually assigned to a port 2 2 1 6 Optimizing the configuration Acquisition cycle and update time Discrete alarms 54 The acquisition cycles for the Area pointers and of the tags defined in the configuration software are decisive in terms of the update times which can actually be achieved The update time is equivalent to the acquisition cycle transmission time processing time Items to observe when optimizing the update times in configuration data e Optimize the maximum and minimum size of the data areas e Define data areas that belong together as belonging together You can improve the update time by setting up one large data area instead of several small areas
419. ycle e Set the transmission rate to the highest possible value For discrete alarms use arrays and assign the individual alarms to one bit of the array tags themselves and not to the individual subelements For discrete alarms and arrays only tags of the M area and data type WORD are permitted With screens the update rate that can actually be achieved depends on the type and amount of data to be displayed Configure short acquisition cycles only for objects which actually require shorter refresh cycles When using bit triggered trends if the group bit is set in the Trend transfer area the HMI device always updates all the trends whose bit is set in this area It then resets the bits The group bit in the PLC program can only be set again after all bits have been reset by the HMI device WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 195 Communication with LG controllers 4 3 User data areas Job mailboxes If large numbers of job mailboxes are sent in quick succession this can lead to overload in the communication between the HMI device and PLC The HMI device confirms acceptance of the job mailbox by entering the value zero in the first data word of the job mailbox The HMI device now processes the job for which it requires time If a new job mailbox is entered again immediately in the job mailbox it may take some time before the HMI device can process the next job mailbox The
420. z ALARMS Be overtemperature Errors i Temperature sensor M3 ze lt No group gt M m General Acknowledgement gt Properties Acknowledgement HMI D TEI Acknowledgement PLC m Infotext m Process Tag Temperature sensor l gt Tag lt No tag gt m Trigger Bit 1 ap 4 br g p Events Distinction in terms of acknowledgment e Acknowledgment on the HMI device e Acknowledgment by the PLC Acknowledgment by the PLC In Acknowledgment PLC tag you configure the tag or the array tag and the bit number based on which the HMI device can recognize an acknowledgment by the PLC A bit set in the tag triggers acknowledgment of the assigned error alarm bit at the HMI device This tag bit returns a function similar to acknowledgment on the HMI device which is triggered by pressing the ACK button for example The acknowledgment bit must be located in the same tag as the bit for the error alarm WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2 User s Manual 07 2008 6AV6691 1CA01 3ABO 295 Communication with Mitsubishi controllers 5 4 User data areas Reset the acknowledgment bit before setting the bit in the alarm area again The figure below shows the pulse diagram Error alarm Acknowledgment PLC HMI device Arrival of the TO Reset Al New error alarm via PLC I acknowledgm bit l error alarm gt Acknowledgment on the HMI device In Ack read tag you c

WinCC flexible 2008 Communication Part 2

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents